THREE    HUNDRED 

DECORATIVE  AND  FANCY  ARTICLES 

PRESENTS,    FAIRS 

ETC.,    ETC. 

WITH  DIRECTIONS   FOR    MAKING 


NEARLY  ONE  HUNDRED   DECORATIVE 
DESIGNS 


BY 

LUCRETIA  P.  HALE  AND  MARGARET  E.  WHITE 


BOSTON 
S.   W.   TILTON   AND   COMPANY 


Copyright, 

BY  S.  W.  TILTON  AND  COMPANY, 


PRESS  OF  ROCKWELL  AND  CHURCHII 
39  Arch  St.,  Boston. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.  SOMETHING  TO  MAKE  FOR  A  PRESENT   ....  i 

II.     APRONS 4 

III.  BAGS ii 

IV.  HOUSEHOLD 29 

V.     LAWN  TENNIS  ACCESSORIES 57 

VI.     FOR  THE  LIBRARY 64 

VII.     MISCELLANEOUS 75 

VIII.     PERSONAL „     .  102 

IX.     SACHETS 115 

X.     TRAVELLING  CONVENIENCES 123 

XI.     WALL-POCKETS,   ETC 138 

XII.     FOR  THE  WORK-TABLE 146 

XIII.  FAIR  SUGGESTIONS 162 

XIV.  -WEDDINGS 176 

XV.     CHRISTMAS 187 


THREE    HUNDRED    PRESENTS. 


CHAPTER    I. 

SOMETHING    TO    MAKE    FOR    A    PRESENT. 

THIS  cry  is  heard  not  only  just  before  Christmas,  but  all 
the  year  round.  The  exhausted  mother  must  listen  to 
this  appeal  whenever  the  family  birthdays  occur,  or  at 
the  birthdays  of  friends,  or  when  the  young  friends  are 
to  be  married,  or  at  the  recurrence  of  wedding  anniver- 
saries. 

The  following  chapters  propose  to  answer  these  various 
appeals.  It  is  easier  to  prepare  for  the  several  birthdays 
as  they  come  along  than  for  Christmas,  because  there  is 
but  one  person  to  provide  for,  and  his  or  her  taste  can  be 
carefully  consulted.  It  is  well  known,  perhaps,  that  he  or 
she  is  in  want  of  some  especial  thing,  and  this  can  be 
made  with  reference  to  the  wants  of  the  individual.  In 
some  families  there  prevails  the  custom  of  — 


THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 


BIRTHDAY  LISTS, 

upon  which  the  desires  of  the  youthful  brother  or  sister 
can  be  written  down,  and,  if  possible,  gratified.  But  there 
is  always  a  wish  on  the  part  of  the  giver  to  find  something 
new,  and,  if  possible,  made  by  her  (or  him)  self,  and  it  is 
hoped  that  in  the  three  hundred  or  more  articles  de- 
scribed in  the  following  pages  this  wish  can  be  easily  car- 
ried out. 

Under  the  head  "Personal,"  articles  are  described  for 
especial  personal  use ;  under  that  of  "Household,"  direc- 
tions are  given  for  useful  articles  in  household  use,  and  the 
headings  of  the  other  chapters  indicate  as  far  as  possible 
the  objects  described.  These  are  arranged  alphabetically 
for  convenience,  but  the  reader  is  advised  to  study  all  the 
chapters,  as  it  has  been  impossible  to  classify  the  sub- 
jects accurately.  It  is  hoped,  therefore,  that  the  mother 
will  find  satisfaction  for  these  birthday  demands,  as  well 
as  for  the  other  occasions  for  presents.  The  giving  of 

WEDDING  PRESENTS 

will  be  treated  of  in  a  chapter  by  itself,  but  the  intervening 
chapters  will  give  numerous  suggestions  for  making  them. 
The  "  Household  "  chapter  especially  gives  useful  hints, 
and  others  will  be  found  in  the  "  Library "  and  "  Work- 
table,"  while  especial  tastes  can  be  consulted  under  the 
head  of  "Personal."  But  we  would  here  again  advise  a 
careful  survey  of  the  whole  book,  where  something  can 
surely  be  found  to  suit  the  emergency. 


SOMETHING  TO  MAKE  FOR  A  PRESENT.  3 

PHILOP^NA  PRESENTS 

are  required,  as  the  name  indicates,  as  a  "  penalty "  for 
not  being  quick  enough  to  bring  out  the  word  "Philo- 
paena"  at  the  right  moment.  If  some  one  finds  two 
almonds  in  one  shell,  and  gives  one  of  them  to  a  friend,  a 
tacit  agreement  is  formed  that  at  the  next  meeting, 
the  one  who  succeeds  in  making  the  other  accept  any 
object,  saying  "Philopaena"  at  the  same  time,  shall  win  a 
present. 

"What  shall  I  give  as  a  Philopsena  to  Jack?"  asks  the 
disturbed  young  lady,  who  unthinkingly  took  her  tennis 
racket  from  him  with  the  word  "  Philopaena,"  as  he  lifted 
it  from  the  ground,  after  having  exchanged  almonds  the 
night  before.  Under  the  head  of  "  Lawn  Tennis  Acces- 
sories," she  may  find  something  to  answer  her  question, 
as  well  as  to  recall  the  time  when  Jack  won  his  Philo- 
paena. 

We  hope,  indeed,  that  these  chapters  are  so  full  that 
they  will  serve  not  only  to  suggest  presents  for  every  con- 
ceivable kind  of  birthday  and  other  day,  for  the  children 
as  well  as  grown-up  people  to  make,  but  also  that  it  may 
furnish  ideas  for  the  frequently  recurring  FAIRS  and 
BAZAARS  which  demand  so  much  inventive  talent. 

A  chapter  is  given  to  suggestions  for  carrying  out  fairs 
and  bazaars,  and  another  upon  CHRISTMAS,  containing 
numerous  entertainments,  and  various  ways  of  giving  pres- 
ents at  Christmas. 


CHAPTER   II. 

APRONS. 

A  MEDIAEVAL  APRON  should  be  made  of  crash.  The 
Barnsley  crash  is  the  most  useful  for  the  purpose,  as  it 
comes  wide  enough,  and  is  a  heavy  fabric  suitable  for  em- 
broidery and  for  fringing.  Cut  a  piece  fifty  inches  long 
and  eighteen  inches  wide.  This  should  be  sloped  at  the 
top  towards  the  outside,  'to  suit  the  shoulders,  leaving  the 
sides  straight.  At  the  neck  cut  away  a  triangular  piece, 
leaving  the  shoulders  five  inches  deep,  and  slanting  in- 
wards towards  the  centre  nine  and  one  half  inches  from 
the  top.  To  this  the  back  should  be  fitted,  made  in  bib- 
like  form  to  fit  the  seam  of  the  front  shoulder-piece  ;  fifteen 
inches  deep  at  the  deepest  part,  at  the  top  of  the  shoul- 
ders. A  triangular  piece  should  be  cut  out  from  the  mid- 
dle, as  the  apron  goes  on  over  the  head,  leaving  the  back 
piece  nine  inches  long  at  the  middle,  the  shortest  part  ; 
this  bib-piece  should  slant  from  the  shoulders  till  it  is  only 
two  and  one  half  inches  wide  at  the  bottom  of  the  back. 
Here  a  belt  of  the  same  material  should  be  attached,  from 
two  and  one  half  to  three  inches  wide,  to  fasten  at  the  side. 

The  bottom  of  the  apron  should  be  fringed,  as  described 
for  such  work  in  Tilton's  Art-Needlework,  and  a  broad  row 
of  embroidery  in  colored  crewels  should  be  put  above  the 
fringe.  A  narrower  row,  corresponding  in  pattern  and 
colors,  should  be  worked  round  the  neck  and  the  two  edges 
4 


APRONS. 


5 


of  the  belt.  The  fringing  should  be  left  till  the  last.  The 
apron  fits  prettily,  and  is  very  effective  as  well  as  useful 
in  doing  artistic  or  household  work. 

HANDKERCHIEF  APRON. — A  very  pretty  apron  can  be 
made  either  of  a  figured  silk  or  cotton  handkerchief  by 
trimming  the  material  with  lace  and  using  the  corners  to 
be  pinned  •  in  front  for  a  bib. 
This  can  either  be  pinned  on, 
or  ribbons  can  be  attached  to 
tie  it  at  the  back.  The  apron 
should  not  be  larger  than  twenty- 
eight  or  thirty  inches  square  to 
fit  nicely. 

The  gay  foreign  silk  handker- 
chiefs, or  the  cotton  bandannas 
worn  on  the  head  by  the  colored 
women,  are  useful  for  this  pur- 
pose. Pockets  can  be  added,  if 
desired. 

Another  variety  of  these  is 
the 

JABOT  APRON.  —  A  handker- 
chief, or  square  piece  of  ma- 
terial is  taken  in  the  same 
way  as  the  last  described ;  but  the  point  is  brought  up  to 
the  throat,  and  cut  off  or  turned  in,  and  the  top  is  gathered 
closely  and  put  into  a  binding  to  go  round  the  throat  and 
fasten  behind.  Another  close  gathering  is  made  in  front 
at  the  belt,  bringing  it  to  fit  the  waist,  in  the  same  way  as 
the  upper  skirts  of  dresses  are  sometimes  made,  as  in  Fig.  2. 


FIG.  2. 


O  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

FANCY  APRONS  make  pretty  Christmas  presents,  and 
give  opportunity  for  the  displaying  of  ingenuity  and  skill. 
They  are  made  of  pongee,  madras,  muslin,  silk,  or  any 
fancy  material,  and  are  trimmed  with  ribbon,  and  embroid- 
ered as  fancy  dictates. 

DRESSY  APRONS  are  made  in  colored  satin,  with  a  bib, 
and  liberally  trimmed  with  lace ;  with  one  if  not  two 
pockets.  These  can  be  made  of  any  color  desired.  For 
instance,  one  of  amber  satin  is  handsome,  covered  with  a 
square  of  lace,  one  point  brought  up  to  the  left  side  of  the 
bib,  the  rest  draped  across  the  apron  itself.  Another 
pretty  one  can  be  made  of  cardinal  satin  cut  in  battle- 
ments all  round,  each  bordered  with  lace,  put  on  full. 
Sometimes  they  are  made  of  alternate  strips  of  lace  and 
insertion. 

YELLOW  SATIN  APRONS,  cut  out  in  battlements,  with  a 
frill  of  black  lace  underneath,  and  pockets  and  bib  of  frills 
of  narrower  lace,  are  fashionable.  Some  ladies  are  very 
fastidious  about  the  appointments,  of  their  tea-tables,  and 
vary  their  personal  lace  and  ribbons  to  correspond  with 
those  of  their  tea  cloth  and  cosey. 

LONG  BLACK  LACE  APRONS  are  made  over  gold  or  red 
surah"  or  satin,  with  small  bibs,  and  a  bow  of  the  color  at 
the  left  side  of  the  waist.  The  length  and  width  are  a 
matter  of  personal  taste.  Handsome  silver  waist  clasps 
are  worn  sometimes  in  the  centre  of  the  band  which  joins 
the  bib,  and  these  are  sewn  on,  or  more  frequently  attached 
to  a  black  waistband,  fitting  and  keeping  the  apron  in  its 
place.  Black  pins  fix  the  bib  corners  to  the  bodice.  One 
silver  clasp  is  sometimes  placed  on  the  right  hip,  securing 


APRONS.  7 

the  lace  of  the  apron  and  holding  a  cluster  of  ribbon 
loops.  These  little  fancies  are  quite  optional.  The  lace 
is  either  black  imitation  Chantilly  or  Spanish  ;  more  often 
the  former.  Black  satin  Merveilleux,  with  a  broad  inser- 
tion of  Russian  work  in  colored  silks,  or  with  a  frill  of  lace 
over  collar,  are  worn.  For  simpler  ones,  Madras  figured 
muslin,  Liberty's  quaint  flowered  cottons,  and  plain  muslin 
with  a  very  broad  hem  and  a  frill  of  cream  lace,  are  suita- 
ble. Many  ladies  wear  foreign  handkerchiefs,  brought 
home  from  abroad. 

LARGE  BLACK  LACE  APRONS  are  much  patronized  for 
afternoon  wear.  The  bib  is  either  composed  of  several 
rows  of  narrow  gathered  lace,  or  of  one  square  of  piece 
lace,  puckered  into  the  waistband.  One  pocket  is  at  the 
side  (optional),  and  a  colored  pocket-handkerchief  peeps 
out  of  it. 

A  SYRIAN  MUSLIN  CURTAIN  will  also  make  a  very  taste- 
ful apron,  mounted  on  satin  sheeting,  or  on  Turkey  red 
twill,  or  gold  colored  sateen.  The  curtain  is  folded  in  half, 
fixed  to  the  band,  divided,  and  drawn  back,  like  paniers, 
and  gathered  down  the  sides  of  the  apron  material.  An- 
other way  is  to  take  the  curtain  in  half,  carry  it  up  to  the 
throat,  where  it  is  gathered  to  form  the  top  of  the  full  bib, 
gathered  again  at  the  waistband  of  the  apron,  and  looped 
back  in  paniers.  Both  ways  are  novel  and  becoming,  and 
not  at  all  clumsy,  as  the  Syrian  muslin  is  thin. 

A  FIGURED  SATEEN  WORK-APRON  can  be  made  very 
prettily,  with  a  pocket  for  work.  Cut  a  plain  apron  of  the 
sateen,  twenty-one  and  one  half  inches  long  ;  slope  it,  mak- 
ing it  twenty  inches  wide  at  the  bottom,  and  eleven  inches 


8  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

at  the  top.  Put  it  into  a  belt  of  the  same,  curving  it  a  lit- 
tle at  the  belt.  Make  a  bib,  ten  and  one  half  inches  long  ; 
stitch  this  on  over  the  belt,  coming  down  in  a  point,  three 
inches  below  the  top  of  the  belt.  This  bib  should  be 
curved  at  the  top,  eight  inches  wide  at  the  widest  part, 
sloping  to  four  and  one  half  inches  at  the  top  of  the  belt, 
and  sloping  out  again  to  five  and  one  half  inches,  when  it 
should  be  brought  suddenly  to  a  point.  The  pockets  are 
made  in  one  piece,  the  shape  of  the  apron.  This  piece 
should  be  sloped  like  the  apron,  and  cut  eleven  inches  at 
the  widest  part,  and  ten  at  the  top,  fourteen  inches  deep. 
This  piece  should  be  put  on  six  and  one  half  inches  below 
the  belt,  with  three  gathering  threads  in  the  middle  to 
draw  it  up  to  seven  inches.  The  gathers  should  reach  three 
and  one  half  inches,  dividing  the  piece  into  two  openings  at 
the  top.  The  outer  edges  should  be  plaited  down  to  the 
apron  with  four  plaits  each  side  near  the  top  on  the  outer 
edges,  bringing  them  at  about  two  inches  distance  from 
the  edge  of  the  apron.  Put  on  a  lace  two  inches  wide 
round  the  apron,  and  round  the  bib  and  its  point,  also  all 
round  the  pocket  piece.  Add  strings  of  the  material, 
twenty  inches  long,  three  and  one  half  wide  at  the  ends. 
This  makes  a  very  jaunty  apron,  which  is  also  very  con- 
venient to  use  for  embroidery  work,  as  the  pocket  is  very 
serviceable. 

WORK  APRON.  —  This  is  a  very  useful  style  of  apron  to 
hold  knitting,  fancy  work,  etc.  It  has  a  lining  foundation, 
and  pocket  at  top,  with  the  apron  part  gathered  on  be- 
low ;  the  corners  and  band  are  of  fancy  embroidery.  The 
bottom  is  finished  with  fringe,  as  shown  in  the  illustra- 


APRONS. 


tion,  Fig.  3,  and  ribbon  bows  are  added  for  further  deco- 
ration. 

A  CRASH  APRON  is  very  easily  made  of  a  yard  of  crash, 
by  drawing  a  fringe  at  either  end.  The  fringe  should  be 
at  least  five  inches  long  without  the  heading,  which  can  be 
as  deep  as  you  please,  of 
Solomon's  Knot,  or  Jose- 
phine Knot.  Make  an  open- 
work pattern  above,  by  draw- 
ing the  threads  and  working 
them,  or  run  in  a  ribbon. 
Double  down  the  upper  end 
to  make  a  fold  of  eight 
inches,  including  the  fringe. 

CHECKED  CRASH  TOWELS, 
with  red  and  white  or  blue 
and  white  squares,  can  be 
embroidered  to  make  very 
ornamental  aprons.  Take 
such  a  towel,  which  should 
be  about  a  yard  long  and 
fringed  ;  cut  off  from  the  up- 
per end  a  piece  ten  inches 
long  ;  this  is  to  be  put  on 
ten  inches  from  the  top  for 
a  row  of  three  pockets.  But 
before  putting  it  on,  embroider  it,  as  follows,  with  red  or 
blue  embroidery  cotton,  the  color  of  the  stripes.  Use 
cotton  that  will  wash.  In  every  alternate  square  work 
five  French  knots,  one  in  each  corner,  one  in  the  centre. 


FIG.  3. 


10  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

The  intermediate  squares  are  crossed  in  Point  Russe. 
This  strip  should  be  turned  in  at  the  top,  put  on,  and  the 
pockets  made,  —  in  herring-bone,  with  the  fringe  left  on,  — 
the  ends  of  the  fringe  drawn  into  a  pattern  if  desired,  and 
additional  rows  of  herring-bone  or  other  Oriental  patterns 
should  be  added  above  the  lower  fringe.  The  proportions 
of  the  strip  for  the  pockets  must  be  adapted  to  the  length 
of  the  fringes. 

FEEDING  BIB.  —  This  should  be  made  of  a  piece  of  pique, 
or  coarse  crash,  sixteen  inches  long  and  twelve  inches 
broad.  Cut  out  to  fit  the  neck,  and  decorate  in  any  de- 
sired pattern  in  Holbein  stitch,  or  with  any  quaint  designs. 
Barnsley  crash  will  be  found  especially  suitable,  as  it  is 
heavy  and  of  even  texture. 

A  PRETTY  ROMAN  APRON  can  be  made  of  linen  some- 
times called  strainer  cloth.  Take  a  yard  of  the  material, 
turn  over  the  upper  end,  as  for  the  crash  apron,  and  trim 
both  ends  with  torchon  lace.  Make  a  row  of  open  work 
with  drawn  threads.  Above  this,  work  in  cross-stitch  a 
pattern  consisting  of  a  row  of  conventional  figures,  cocks, 
peacocks,  any  kind  of  birds,  done  in  pink,  alternating  with 
brown  patterns  of  cross-stitch  and  Holbein  in  brown  filling- 
silk. 


CHAPTER   III. 

BAGS. 

BAGS  are  always  in  demand  and  are  of  all  kinds,  from 
the  dainty  silk  work-bag  hung  on  the  arm  to  the  stout 
linen  shoe-bag  in  a  useful  but  inconspicuous  position  on 
the  closet  door. 

WORK-BAG.  —  This  bag  is  made  of  copper-colored  plush, 
lined  with  yellow  satin.  Cut 
from  each  of  these  materials  two 
pieces  seven  inches  wide,  six 
inches  long,  curving  them  at 
the  bottom.  For  the  front  of 
the  bag,  work  on  the  plush  a  lit- 
tle pattern,  similar  to  the  illus- 
tration. Put  in  the  lining,  and 
at  an  inch  from  the  top  make 
a  running  for  an  elastic.  Fin- 
ish across  the  bottom,  as  in 
Fig.  4,  with  copper-colored  che- 
nille trimming  and  balls.  For 

the  handle  put  on  a  copper-colored  satin  ribbon  fifteen 
inches  long  and  one  inch  wide,  fastening  it  to  the  bag 
on  each  side,  with  a  ball  like  those  on  the  bottom. 

SHOPPING-BAG.  —  Cut  out  of  seal-skin  plush,  a  piece 
fourteen  inches  long  and  ten  inches  wide.  With  fine 


12  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

cotton  thread,  baste  on  a  strong  brown  cambric  lining. 
Fold  across  the  middle,  to  form  the  bottom  of  the  bag, 
which  should  be  wider  than  it  is  deep.  From  one  half  a 
yard  of  brown  silk  twenty-four  inches  wide,  cut  two 
pieces  eleven  inches  long  and  three  and  one  half  inches 
wide.  Line  with  brown  cambric ;  gather  on  both  edges, 
and  insert  between  the  two  sides  of  the  plush  bottom,  sew- 
ing the  puffs  across  the  bottom  in  a  seam,  which  curves  a 
little,  to  prevent  an  awkward,  sharp  corner.  Cut  from  the 
plush  two  pieces, 'nine  inches  long  and  two  inches  wide. 
Double  so  as  to  make  the  strip  when  sewed  together 
three-quarters  inch  wide.  Sew  these  firmly  with  strong 
linen  thread  to  the  top  of  the  plush  bottom  for  handles. 
Make  a  plain  bag  of  the  remainder  of  the  silk,  lining  it 
up  to  the  running  for  the  strings  with  cambric;  above 
that  point,  turn  down  the  silk  for  a  lining  to  the  frill  at 
the  top,  which  ought  to  be  about  two  and  one  half  inches 
deep  ;  make  the  runnings  for  the  strings,  which  must  be 
made  of  silk  braid  ;  sew  the  silk  top  to  the  plush  bottom, 
and  cover  the  seam  by  facing  over  it  the  cambric  lining. 
If  the  silk  is  a  little  less  wide  than  the  plush,  full  the  puffs 
at  the  top  enough  to  make  the  two  of  the  same  size. 
Turn  the  handles  up  as  they  will  naturally  stand  when  the 
bag  is  in  use,  and  stitch  them  a  half  inch  from  the  plush 
to  the  silk  top. 

ANOTHER  SHOPPING-BAG. — This  bag,  as  illustrated  in 
Fig.  5,  is  made  of  gray  Java  canvas,  lined  with  brown 
satin.  The  canvas  should  be  worked  like  the  pattern,  in 
chenille,  in  point  russe  stitches;  the  smaller  pattern  in 
brown,  black,  and  yellow  filling-silk. 


SAGS. 


Cut  out  of  the  Java  canvas  a  piece  sixteen  and  one  half 
inches  long,  ten  and  one  half  inches  wide,  the  corners  of 
which  should  be  rounded, 
as  shown  in  illustration. 
Bind  the  canvas  with 
brown  ribbon.  For  the 
bag,  cut  a  piece  of  brown 
satin  twelve  and  one  half 
inches  long  and  nine  and 
one  half  inches  wide.  On 
the  upper  edge  make  a 
hem  and  a  running  for 
the  strings,  which  should 
be  made  of  brown  silk 
cord  of  the  same  color, 
finished  with  tassels  at 
the  end.  Attach  this  bag  at  the  bottom  and  sides  to  the 


FIG.  5. 


handles 


cut  out  of  the  canvas  two  strips 
eleven  inches  long  and  one  and 
one  half  inches  wide.  Double  and 
sew  together  each  of  these  strips  ; 
finish  on  the  edge  with  button-hole 
stitch  in  black  filling-silk.  Add  a 
ruche  of  brown  satin  ribbon  three 
quarters  inch  wide  to  the  outer  edge 
of  the  canvas,  and  finish  with  a  bow 
of  brown  satin  ribbon. 

POMPADOUR   WITH   LACE  TRIM- 
MING. —  Fig.  6,  shows  a  pretty  way 


14  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

of  trimming  and  embroidering  a  Pompadour  of  any  size  or 
material. 

A  BLACK  VELVET  BAG  embroidered  with  golden  rod  is 
handsome,  made  in  the  same  manner. 

POMPADOUR.  —  This  bag  is  to  be  made  of  a  piece  of 
brown  plush  nine  inches  wide  and  twelve  inches  long. 
For  the  pocket  put  on  a  piece  three  and  one  half  inches 
high  and  twenty-two  inches  long.  Line  with  silk  ;  round 
off  the  corners  of  the  bag,  as  well 
as  the  piece  for  the  pocket.  Make 
and  decorate  as  in  Fig.  7. 

HANDKERCHIEF  WORK-BAGS. — 
Colored  silk  handkerchiefs,  edged 
all  round  with  lace,  with  a  draw- 
string run  round  just  to  escape 
the  corners,  make  good  work-bags, 
with  a  pompon  at  each  corner, 
and  at  each  end  of  the  drawstring ; 
a  little  silk  bag  of  scent  is  tacked 
inside.  Two  handkerchiefs  of  de- 
cided contrast  in  color  are  often 
joined  to  form  the  outside  and 
Fig'  7'  lining. 

These  are  also  pretty  made  in  the  same  way  of  a  square 
of  plain  or  dotted  muslin  trimmed  with  lace.  The  square 
needs  to  measure  about  twenty-four  inches  on  each  side. 
The  place  for  the  drawing-strings  can  be  made  of  lace  in- 
serting. 

A  MACRAME  BAG,  a  little  different  from  the  common 
pattern,  can  be  made  as  in  Fig.  8.  Work  a  square  in  mac- 


BAGS.  15 

rame  of  about  eight  inches  on  each  side.  The  pattern  in 
the  illustration  can  be  easily  followed.  Make  a  bag  of  silk 
as  wide  as  the  diagonal  of  the  macrame  square,  and  a  little 
longer  than  it  is  wide  ;  attach  the  macrame  to  this,  putting 
on  a  plaited  ruche.  Make  a  handle  of  macrame  insertion. 
Put  on  a  bow  where  the  handle  is  joined. 


HARLEQUIN  BAG. — This  very  pretty  bag  can  be  made 
from  small  scraps  of  material  as  follows  :  — 

Cut  from  silk,  satin,  or  velvet,  two  pieces  (which  need 
not  be  alike  in  color)  five  and  one  half  inches  long  and  four 
and  one  half  inches  wide  for  the  sides  of  the  bag.  Round 
off  the  two  corners  at  the  bottom.  Cut  from  scraps  of 
ribbon  or  silk  eighteen  pieces,  four  inches  long  and  two 
inches  wide.  Sew  these  together  on  the  longest  edges. 


1 6  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

This  will  give  you  a  strip  of  silk  which  is  to  be  gathered 
around  three  sides  of  the  larger  pieces  already  described. 
This  forms  the  bag.  Make  a  bag  of  the  usual  square 
shape,  just  the  width  of  the  top  of  the  harlequin,  and  six 
inches  long.  Put  this  into  it  for  a  lining.  Across  the  top 
sew  on  each  side,  a  piece  of  silk  seven  inches  long  and  two 
and  three  quarters  inches  wide.  Line  with  a  different 
color.  Make  running  places  for  strings,  which  should  be 
either  of  narrow  ribbon  or  silk  braid.  The  greater  variety 
of  colors  that  you  can  put  into  this  bag,  if  they  are  taste- 
fully combined,  the  prettier  will  be  the  effect. 

CHAIR  BAGS.  — These  bags,  to  hang  over  the  back  of  a 
chair,  form  a  pretty  ornament  for  parlor  or  chamber,  and 
can  be  used  to  hold  wools  or  embroidery  materials  in  one 
end  and  a  duster  in  the  other ;  or,  in  a  chamber,  as  a  recep- 
tacle for  soiled  clothes.  They  can  be  made  of  any  mate- 
rial, but  we  should  advise  a  bright-figured  sateen,  lined 
with  a  lighter  color  of  the  same  fabric. 

The  material  should  be  forty  inches  long  and  forty-six 
inches  wide. 

Double  the  sateen  on  the  wrong  side  until  the  two  sel- 
vedge edges  meet,  and  run  together  at  each  end  a  seam 
ten  inches  long,  beginning  at  the  bottom.  Do  the  same 
with  the  lining.  Fold  both  the  outside  and  the  lining  so 
that  across  the  bottom  of  the  bag  the  seam  will  come  in 
the  middle,  instead  of  at  the  side.  Put  the  outside  and 
lining  back  to  back,  and  at  one  end  stitch  them  together 
acres'  the  bottom.  Turn  the  bag  right  side  out  and  tack 
together  the  outside  and  lining  around  the  opening  left  in 
the  seam.  Finish  on  the  straight  end  with  a  row  of  balls 


BAGS.  17 

matching  the  colors  of  the  sateen.     Draw  up  the  other 
end  and  put  in  three  balls. 

AMERICAN  POMPADOUR  is  made  in  the  same  way,  but 
not  so  large,  and  is  convenient  as  a  shopping  bag,  to  slip 
through  a  muff,  and  should  be  long  enough  to  hang  about 


FIG.  9. 

a  quarter  of  a  yard  below  the  muff  at  each  end.  This  can 
be  made,  like  the  illustration  (Fig.  9),  of  cashmere,  lined 
with  silk,  with  embroidered  border  on  the  straight  e 

Indeed  every  variety  of  material  can  be  used  for  these 
bags,  and  they  can  be  made  of  any  size  desired,  following 


1 8  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

the  proportions  given  above.  They  can  also  be  made  long 
enough  to  be  carried  twisted  once  over  the  arm. 

SCHOOL  BAGS.  —  Bags  for  carrying  school  books  are  very 
useful  made  in  this  way.  The  bag  when  done  should  not 
be  more  than  ten  or  eleven  inches  wide  and  one  yard  long. 
They  can  be  made  of  brown  felting,  lined  with  a  firm  cam- 
bric. They  should  be  square  at  each  end.  Use  gilt  rings, 
and  finish  the  ends  with  a  fringe  of  gilt  coins  or  crescents, 
which  should  be  put  on  profusely  to  be  handsome. 

RIBBON  BAG.  —  This  will  require  three  strips  of  ribbon 
four  inches  wide  and  sixteen  inches  long.  The  strips  may 
be  of  the  same  or  of  contrasting  colors. 

Fold  each  strip  across  the  middle  of  the  length  and  sew 
together  along  one  edge.  Join  strips  one  and  two  by  sew- 
ing them  together  on  one  edge,  from  the  top  to  the  bottom. 
Insert  strip  three,  and  the  bag  is  made.  Face  around  the 
top  with  silk,  and  make  runnings  for  strings,  two  or  three 
inches  from  the  top  to  form  a  frill.  The  strings  should  be 
of  silk  braid  or  narrow  ribbon. 

Finish  with  four  tassels  on  the  bottom,  one  at  each  of 
the  three  corners  and  one  in  the  centre  of  the  bag. 

If  preferred,  the  bottom  of  the  ribbons  (across  the  folded 
part)  can  be  slanted,  instead  of  being  left  straight. 

Narrower  ribbon  can  be  used  by  taking  four  strips 
instead  of  three.  In  this  case  three-inch  ribbon  would  be 
the  right  width. 

CAP  BAG.  —  A  bag  like  a  ball,  for  carrying  caps,  can  be 
made  by  cutting  eight  pieces  of  crinoline  wire  twenty-three 
inches  long,  joining  them  together  in  circles,  and  binding 
them  together  top  and  bottom  in  the  shape  of  a  ball,  leav- 


BAGS. 


ing  even  distances  between  every  wire.  This  will  form  a 
wire  ball  as  large  as  an  ordinary  sized  "football."  Cut 
sixteen  pieces  of  brown  holland  the  size  and  shape  of  the 
spaces  between  the  wires,  but  a  little  larger.  Stitch  all 
these  sections  together,  leaving  one  seam  undone  for  the 
opening ;  turn  the  right  side  out,  and  bind  the  two  edges 
with  ribbon  or  tape,  and  put  on  three  buttons  and  loops ; 
now  put  the  holland  case  over  the  wire  ball,  making  the 
opening  come  between  two  of  the 
wires.  To  keep  the  case  in  its  place 
it  must  be  fastened  here  and  there 
to  the  wire ;  finish  by  sewing  on  a 
loop  of  ribbon  to  form  the  handle. 
This  bag  is  greatly  improved  in 
appearance  if  a  small  wreath  of 
flowers  is  worked  down  the  centre 
of  each  section  of  holland,  or  it  can 
be  painted  like  a  terrestrial  globe. 

CRUSH  BAG.  — The  ordinary  bags 
for  opera  cloaks  are  about  half  a 
yard  wide  and  a  yard  long  ;  they  are 
made  in  satin  sheeting  or  red  twill, 

and  have  the  owner's  monogram  worked  upon  them  ;  or 
they  can  be  made  of  the  envelope  shape,  just  the  size  of 
the  cloak  when  folded,  like  a  nightgown  case,  fastened 
with  a  couple  of  narrow  straps  and  a  handle,  the  mono- 
gram in 'red  letters  on  the  outside. 

These  can  be  made  the  same  shape  as  the  American 
Pompadour,  of  light  colored  cretonne,  lined  with  plain 
lisrht  sateen. 


20 


THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 


LADY'S  NECESSAIRE.  —  This  necessaire  can  be  worn  at 
the  side,  attached  to  the  belt,  and  Will  be  found  very  con- 
venient. It  is  made  of  satin. 
Cut  out,  in  the  shape  shown  in 
Fig.  10,  a  piece  of  card-board  six 
and  one  quarter  inches  wide  and 
five  inches  high.  Cover  the  front 
with  satin  and  the  back  with  lin- 
ing silk.  Make  the  pocket  of 
satin  lined  with  silk.  It  will 
want  to  be  three  inches  high,  and 
must  fit  the  back  at  the  bottom. 
The  sides  must  be  sloped  out,  so 
that  the  top  of  the  pocket  will 
measure  one  and  one  half  inches 
more  in  width  than  the  back  does 
at  the  same  point.  Bind  the  back 
and  pocket  together  with  narrow 
ribbon.  Make  the  divisions  for 
the  memorandum  book  and  other 
articles.  Finish  the  edge  with 
a  large  silk  cord  tied  at  the  top 
in  bows  as  shown  in  the  illus- 
tration. 

CHATELAINE-BAG  (Fio.  n). — 
First,  cut  the  lining  of  black  silk, 
seven  inches  long  in  the  middle, 
slanted  up  to  four  and  three 

quarters  inches,  and  five  and  one  half  inches  broad.  The 
outside  is  covered  either  with  black  silk  cord  or  ecru-colored 
twine  done  in  macrame. 


BAGS. 


21 


Begin  the  macrame  for  the  flap  as  usual,  using  the  rod 
at  the  upper  part  of  the  bag  for  the  foundation.  Work 
the  flap  in  any  pattern  which  will  lead  down  to  a  point. 

For  the  bag  begin  as  usual  over  a  foundation  cord,  and 
work  the  same  pattern  as  the  flap  for  the  length  of  the 
bag.  Finish  with  a  fringe. 

Put  in  the  silk  lining.  For  the  cord  to  pass  around  the 
waist,  make  a  series  of  Josephine  knots,  at  equal  distances 
as  in  the  illustration,  Fig.  n. 

A  TOILET-BAG  can  be  tastefully  made  of  linen  crash. 
If  the  crash  is  sixteen 
inches  wide,  the  bag 
can  be  made  of  the 
width  of  the  crash. 
Double  this  over  for 
the  length  of  the  bag, 
and  cut  off  a  piece 
about  seven  inches 
wide.  Fringe  the  two 
sides  of  this  by  ravel- 
ling, and  then  draw 

.  ,  i  r  FIG.    12. 

the    threads    for  two 

rows  of  Punto  Tirato  work,  leaving  an  equal  space  in  the 
middle  and  on  each  side.  The  double  crossed  stitch  given 
in  Tilton's  Art  Needlework  is  a  pretty  pattern.  Line  the 
bag  with  red  silk,  and  put  in  red  ribbon  strings. 

This  is  also  very  pretty  for  a  work-bag. 

OPERA-GLASS  BAG. — For  this  bag,  as  in  Fig.  12,  cut 
a  stiff  bottom  out  of  cardboard  four  and  one  half  inches 
long  and  one  and  one  half  inches  wide,  and  round  the 


22  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

corners.  Out  of  crimson  plush,  cut  two  pieces,  five  and 
one  half  inches  high,  and  seven  and  one  half  inches  wide 
at  the  top,  sloped  down  to  five  inches  at  the  bottom  (or  to 
fit  the  cardboard  bottom).  Embroider  this  to  suit  your 
fancy.  Cover  the  cardboard  with  plush,  join  the  sides  of 
the  bag  and  sew  to  the  bottom  piece. 

For  the  inside,  make  a  second 
bottom  of  cardboard  the  shape  of 
the  first,  but  one  eighth  inch  smaller 
all  around.  Cover  this  with  crim- 
son lining  silk.  Cut  a  thin  card- 
board the  shape  of  the  plush  bag, 
but  only  half  its  height.  Cover 
this  with  silk  and  sew  to  the  second 
bottom.  On  the  top  of  the  case 
thus  formed,  sew  a  silk  lining  for 
the  remaining  part  of  the  plush 
bag.  Slip  the  silk  bag  into  the 
plush  one,  and  fasten  them  together 
by  hemming  the  lining  on  to  the 
outside  around  the  top,  and  make 
the  runnings  for  the  strings  one 
and  one  half  inches  below  this 
seam. 

The  dimensions  given  above  are  for  an  opera-glass  of 
the  usual  size  but  of  course  the  bag  can  be  made  of  any 
size  that  may  be  desired,  being  careful  to  follow  the  pro- 
portions here  given. 

SKATE-BAG  (Fio.  13).  —  This  bag  is  made  of  cloth  lined 
with  chamois-skin.  For  the  outside  cut  a  piece  sixteen 


SAGS. 


inches  long  and  seven  inches  wide,  and  slope  at  the  bottom 
as  in  Fig.  13.  The  lining  should  be  a  little  smaller.  Make 
it  fourteen  inches  long  and  six  and  one  half  inches  wide. 

Stitch  each  up  separately,  put  the  lining  into  the  bag  so 
that  the  seams  will  not  show.     Hem  the  outside  down 
upon  the  lining  and  run  a  place  for 
the  strings.     The  handle  is  made  of  a 
strip  of  the  cloth  twelve  inches  long 
and  one  inch  wide,  doubled  over. 

VIOLIN-BAG. — The  dimensions  of 
this  bag  must,  of  course,  depend 
upon  the  size  of  the  instrument  for 
which  it  is  made. 

The  material  is  billiard-cloth  lined 
with  quilted  silk  or  chamois-skin. 
The  design  is  done  in  outline  em- 
broidery, as  in  Fig.  14.  The  bag  is 
left  open  at  the  top,  on  both  sides,  to 
the  depth  of  six  or  eight  inches,  and 
fastened  with  buttons  and  loops. 

VIOLIN  BLANKET. —  A  blanket  made 
of  a  'square  of  chamois -skin  large 
enough  to  cover  it  thoroughly  is  quite 
essential  to  keep  the  instrument  from 
being  injured  by  changes  in  tempera- 
ture. 

GAME-BAGS.  — The  game-bag  represented  by  Fig.  15,  is 
made  of  yellow  leather  and  furnished  with  shoulder  straps 
and  girdle  for  the  waist ;  the  front  pocket  is  done  with 
Macrame  stitch  and  thread  in  a  series  of  Solomon's  knots, 


24 


THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 


the  diamond  shaped  open-work  being  made  of  Josephine 
knots.  The  front  flap  is  composed  of  deer-skin  bound 
with  leather.  The  lining  should  be  made  of  stout  drilling 
or  buckram,  and  a  pocket  for  cartridge  cases  attached 
to  the  back  of  this  lining  inside.  For  this  pocket  cut  a 
bit  of  cardboard  eight  inches  long  and  three  inches  wide, 
and  cover  it  with  leather.  On  the  outside,  at  the  back, 

finish  as  in  Fig.  16.  At- 
tach a  long  bag,  half  as 
long  as  the  width,  with  a 
flap  at  one  end  to  close 
up  the  bag,  and  a  strap 
which  can  be  fastened  to 
a  button  at  the  bottom 
of  the  bag,  so  that  when 
it  is  empty  it  can  be 
doubled  back  as  in  the 
illustration  Fig.  16. 

In  front  of  the  bag  fas- 
ten to  the  edge  of  the 
flap  some  narrow  leather 
straps  furnished  '  with 
metal  rings,  as  in  Fig.  15. 
These  straps  are  to  be  used  for  tying  up  the  birds  that 
have  been  shot. 

ANOTHER  GAME-BAG  can  be  more  simply  made  by  work- 
ing a  pouch  of  Macram^  twine  ;  this  bag  should  be  made 
with  a  flap  to  close  over  the  top,  and  leather  shoulder 
straps  should  be  added. 

PIECE-BAG.  —  Take   three   pieces   of   calico,  the  width 


FIG.   15. 


BAGS. 


of  the  material,  thirty  inches  long.  Sew  the  three  pieces 
together  with  one  seam,  so  that  when  done  they  shall 
make  a  bag  with  a  partition  in  the  middle.  This  will  give 
you  a  bag  on  each  side  of  the  middle  piece. 

On  the  outside  of  each  bag  make  a  slit  for  the  opening 
fourteen  inches  long.  Bind  with  red  braid ;  sew  the  bag 
together  at  the  top. 

You  will  need  a  bar  of  wood  eleven  inches  long,  one 
and  one  half  inches 
wide,  two  and  one  quar- 
ter inches  thick.  Stitch 
on  the  machine  a  place 
deep  enough  for  this 
bar,  which  must  then 
be  run  through  the  top 
of  the  bag.  Make  two 
gimlet  holes  at  each  end 
of  the  bar  through  which 
you  must  put  a  double 
piece  of  braid  to  hang 
the  bag  up  by. 

TRIPLE  BUTTON  BAG. 
This  is  made  by  con- 
necting three  separate  bags  on  one  string.  The  string  of 
the  bags  should  pass  through  the  hem  of  each,  leaving  a 
little  frill  at  the  top.  The  middle  bag  should  be  larger  than 
the  other  two,  about  four  inches  square  ;  the  bags  should 
be  made  of  pongee  or  some  pretty  material. 

ANOTHER  SET  OF  BUTTON  BAGS.  —  Make  four  bags  of 
sateen  four  inches  square.  Two  must  be  made  of  figured 


26  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

and  two  of  plain  material.  Make  a  hem  at  the  top  one 
inch  wide.  In  the  hem  of  each  bag  make  four  button- 
holes, two  on  one  side  and  two  on  the  other,  one  and  one 
half  inches  from  the  edges.  When  done  lay  the  bags  on 
top  of  one  another,  so  that  the  figured  ones  shall  come 
on  the  outside,  and  the  plain  ones  in  the  centre.  Put  two 
strings  of  narrow  ribbon  through  the  button  holes,  arrang- 
ing them  to  draw,  as  in  an  ordinary  bag. 

SPONGE-HOLDER.  —  Another  useful  article  and  easy  to 
be  made,  is  a  bag  to  hold  a  sponge,  when  it  is  hung  in  the 
sun  to  dry.  This  is  best  made  in  netting,  but  coarse 
crochet  work  would  answer  nearly  as  well. 

The  bag  should  be  made  of  crochet  cotton,  and  if  netted 
a  mesh  should  be  used  measuring  one  and  one  half  inches 
in  circumference.  When  completed  it  should  be  seven 
or  eight  inches  square.  Around  the  top  put  in  a  draw- 
ing-string of  strong  cord,  and  put  on  a  loop  to  hang  it 
up  by. 

SOAP-BAG.  —  Take  two  bits  of  flannel  five  inches  square 
and  sew  them  together  on  three  sides  in  the  shape  of  a 
bag.  Turn  this  right  side  out.  Around  the  three  sewn 
edges,  make  a  trimming  by  working  them  over  with  scarlet 
worsted  in  loose  button-hole  stitch.  Turn  down  a  narrow 
hem  across  the  two  open  edges,  and  finish  them  in  the 
same  way. 

Collect  all  the  pieces  of  nice  toilet  soap  that  are  too 
small  to  be  kept  any  longer  in  the  soap  dishes.  Cut  four 
pieces  of  flannel  four  inches  square,  and  lay  the  pieces  of 
soap  between  them,  basting  around  the  bits  of  soap  to 
keep  them  in  place. 


BAGS.  27 

Put  this  bag  inside  the  cover  you  have  made,  and  run 
the  open  edges  together  slightly.  This  makes  a  good 
wash-cloth  for  the  face  and  neck,  and  can  be  easily  re- 
newed when  necessary. 

SPONGE-BAGS.  —  These  can  be  made  of  India-rubber 
cloth,  in  the  form  of  a  common  bag,  and  bound  around 
the  edges  with  scarlet  worsted  braid  ;  or  they  can  be  made 
of  any  serviceable  material  and  lined  with  oiled  silk.  The 
last  idea,  however,  is  to  make  them  ornamental,  by  either 
covering  them  with  colored  sateen  and  working  a  flower  on 
each  side ;  or  in  American  cloth,  painting  them  and  bind- 
ing all  round  with  galoon. 

SPONGE-BOX.  —  This  is  made  from  a  tin  mustard  box  or 
spice  box,  which  is  large  enough  and  has  a  tight-fitting 
cover.  The  outside  is  painted  some  ground-color,  upon 
which  is  put  a  spray  of  nasturtiums  or  any  flower  one 
chooses. 

CLOTHES-PIN  BAG.  —  Out  of  bed-ticking,  cut  a  piece 
twenty-eight  inches  wide  and  twenty-one  inches  high. 
Slope  the  sides  of  this  piece  from  the  bottom  to  the  top, 
making  the  top  only  eighteen  inches  wide.  Cut  this  a 
little  curving,  (across  the  top)  to  fit  the  figure.  To  the 
bottom  sew  a  piece  twenty-eight  inches  wide  and  twelve 
inches  high.  This  piece  is  not  to  be  sloped  at  the  sides. 
Sew  this  to  the  bottom  for  the  pocket ;  Divide  this  with 
herring-bone  into  three  spaces  or  pockets.  Bind  the 
bottom  and  sides  with  scarlet  braid  ;  put  on  a  belt  at 
the  top  to  fasten  around  the  waist  with  a  button  and 
button-hole. 

A  DUSTER-BAG  can  be  made  of  a  strip  of  cretonne  nine 


28  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

inches  wide  and  one  yard  long.  Double  up  this  strip  about 
half  its  length  for  the  bag ;  fold  the  upper  end  into  a  point 
and  bring  this  over  so  that  only  the  point  will  cover  the 
top  of  the  bag,  passing  the  pointed  end  through  a  metal 
ring  to  hang  the  bag  by.  This  should  be  firmly  fastened 
with  folds.  The  bag  can  be  made  longer  or  shorter  as 
desired,  and  should  contain  a  set  of  dusters.  Finish  with 
a  tassel  made  by  a  strip  of  the  cretonne,  cut  into  a  fringe 
at  one  end. 


CHAPTER   IV. 

HOUSEHOLD. 

MANTEL-BOARD.  —  An  embroidered  lambrequin  is  a 
very  handsome  present  to  make  for  a  friend,  if  the  giver 
is  skilful  in  embroidery,  to  be  made  of  velvet,  satin,  cloth, 
or  felting,  which  should  be  cut  in  scallops  or  points  at  the 
bottom,  or  finished  by  having  the  edge  cut  up  for  four  or 
five  inches  in  narrow  strips  one  quarter  of  an  inch  wide. 
This  is  a  good  suggestion  for 

A  WEDDING  PRESENT.  —  If  made  for  this  purpose  it 
will  be  more  useful  if  a  mantel-board  is  also  made  to 
fit  the  mantel-piece  for  which  the  lambrequin  is  des- 
tined. 

If  the  mantel-piece  is  narrow,  this  board  should  project  a 
little  from  the  edge.  The  usual  way  to  cover  it  is  to  sew 
the  top  and  lining  together  on  the  wrong  side  and  slip  the 
board  in  between.  The  top  must  be  made  of  some  mate- 
rial to  match  or  correspond  with  the  lambrequin,  and  the 
lining  must  be  of  some  firm  buckram,  or  drilling,  of  the 
same  color  as  the  top.  The  lambrequin  can  be  sewed  or 
nailed  to  this,  and  the  edge  covered  with  gimp  held  by 
brass-headed  nails,  or  by  a  cord  sewed  on,  with  tassels  at 
the  corners. 

The  cover  is  strained  over  the  shelf.  Tack  to  the  wall 
29 


30  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

the  ends  of  lining  of  the  cover ;  or  the  board  can  be 
fastened  by  screw-eyes.  . 

If  fringe  is  used,  unless  very  massive,  it  is  always  advis- 
able to  back  it  by  a  double  band  of  stuff  in  the  same  shade, 
which  can  be  lightly  sewn  or  nailed  to  the  edge  of  the 
board  underneath,  and  not  only  improves  the  set,  but  pro- 
tects the  fringe  from  smoke  and  dust. 

MANTEL-CURTAINS.  —  These  are  used  for  draperies  to 
cover  the  sides  of  a  mantel-piece  in  winter,  and  in  summer 
can  be  drawn  over  the  grate,  like  afire-blind,  to  conceal  it. 

The  rod  upon  which  the  curtain  hangs  is  secured  beneath 
the  mantel-piece  (the  outline  of  which  it  follows)  to  the 
wall  or  the  mantel-piece  itself,  and  on  this  the  rings  slip  to 
and  fro,  the  rings,  of  course,  being  sewn  to  the  curtains. 
At  the  end  of  each  side  of  the  brass  rods  there  should  be 
either  a  hook  to  secure  it  to  an  "  eye  "  placed  in  the  wall, 
or  else  each  end  should  be  pointed,  and  fit  into  a  hole  in 
the  wall  on  each  side  of  the  fireplace.  Sometimes  brass 
wire  is  substituted  for  the  brass  rod,  and  sometimes  a  red 
picture  cord  is  used,  as  being  more  portable  and  less 
expensive.  It  answers  the  purpose  equally  well. 

The  curtains  should  hang  full,  and  the  length  should  be 
about  a  quarter  of  a  yard  longer  than  they  are  required, 
and  when  caught  up  with  ribbon  and  secured  to  the  wall 
by  a  nail,  they  will  be  long  enough  to  hang  gracefully.  It 
depends  on  what  material  is  used  as  to  whether  the  cur- 
tains require  a  lining.  If  of  a  thin  texture,  chintz  or 
sheeting,  a  lining  of  some  bright  color  improves  them  ; 
but  if  the  material  be  of  cotton,  backed  satin,  or  felting, 
or  velvet,  no  lining  is  needed.  Oatmeal  cloth  with  a  pat- 


HOUSEHOLD.  3 1 

tern  of  flowers  on  it  in  crewels,  has  a  very  good  effect,  and 
is  to  be  had  in  several  beautiful  colors.  Feltings,  too, 
are  much  used  now,  and  look  very  rich  for  mantel-piece 
curtains.  Satin  of  colors  to  correspond  with  the  furniture 
of  the  room  looks  very  well  for  this  purpose,  and  with 
flowers  painted  on  it  the  effect  is  very  handsome.  To  cut 
flowers  out  of  cretonne,  chintz,  and  sewing  on  to  a  dark- 
colored  cloth  or  serge,  makes  very  pleasant  work,  which 
looks  exceedingly  well  when  finished.  The  chintz  should 
be  edged  entirely  with  button-hole  stitch  in  dark  green  silk 
to  enhance  the  effect. 

MIRROR  DRAPERY.  —  An  effective  piece  of  color  can  be 
introduced  into  a  room  by  making  curtains  for  mirrors  or 
pictures.  The  plain,  bright,  soft  India  silks  should  be 
used.  Cause  a  brass  rod  to  be  put  at  the  top  and  bottom 
of  the  frame,  projecting  from  the  wall  as  much  as  the 
frame  does.  Take  as  many  breadths  of  the  silk  as  are 
necessary  to  cover  the  mirror  or  picture,  making  the  cur- 
tain in  two  separate  pieces.  Make  the  curtain  the  length 
of  the  space  between  the  two  rods,  allowing  for  a  broad 
hem  on  both  ends.  Sew  on  brass  rings,  and  slip  them  on 
the  rods.  The  curtains  will  then  open  from  the  centre 
by  slipping  them  to  each  side  of  the  frame. 

It  is  often  a  convenience  to  be  able  to  shut  off  from  a 
mirror  or  a  glass  covered  engraving,  the  reflected  light  so 
troublesome  to  the  eyes. 

Curtains  used  for  mirrors  and  pictures  are  also  fas- 
tened in  folds  to  the  top  of  the  frame,  and  draped  on  each 
side  in  festoons,  secured  to  the  wall  with  bows  of  ribbon. 
This  style  of  decoration  is  particularly  suited  for  chambers. 


32  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

PORTIERES. — These  are  made  of  every  variety  of  ma- 
terial, too  numerous  to  be  enumerated.  Some  of  the  most 
popular  are  plush,  felting,  serge  cloth,  cotton  tapestry, 
woollen  tapestry,  colored  cotton  flannels,  satin  sheeting, 
crash,  etc.  The  modes  of  decorating  them  are  equally 
numerous. 

One  of  the  newest  ways  of  arranging  portieres,  is  with 
a  piece  turning  down  from  the  top,  to  the  depth  at  least  of 
half  a  yard.  They  generally  have  rings  sewn  to  them,  by 
which  they  are  attached  to  a  rod  placed  in  the  doorway  : 
but  if  they  are  not  required  to  draw,  they  are  often  nailed 
above  the  doorway  so  that  they  can  be  allowed  to  fall  or 
be  looped  up  and  show  the  room  beyond.  The  loopings 
are  generally  placed  high  up,  French  fashion,  But,  in 
good  truth,  the  arrangement  of  portieres  depends  much  on 
the  materials  of  which  they  are  made.  The  cheap  blue 
and  white  striped  curtains  sold  by  Lasenby  Liberty  are 
much  used.  Many  of  the  woollen  tapestry  or  damask  bro- 
cades have  a  dado  at  the  lower  edge  of  velvet  half  a  yard 
deep,  matching  the  dominant  color. 

SCREENS.  —  The  foundation  is  of  wood,  which  can  be 
made  by  any  carpenter,  if  the  size  of  each  leaf  be  calcu- 
lated^ The  framework  must  be  first  covered  with  sail- 
cloth, which  ought  to  be  stretched  firmly  on.  The  sail- 
cloth is  fastened  to  the  edges  by  tacks,  and  when  the 
pict  e  on,  th^se  must  be  covered  with-  ornamental 

beading.  It  is  b,est  to  Suy  the  framework  complete,  and 
we  \v"i'd  not  advise  a  attempt  to  be  made  at  varnishing, 
as  it  •'s  a  good  deal  of  skill  and  practice,  besides  being 

rather  dirty  work. 


HOUSEHOLD.  33 

The  best  pictures  are  bright-colored  ones  ;  those  given 
with  the  Illustrated  London  News,  the  Queen,  and  many 
of  the  Christmas  periodicals,  are  just  the  thing.  Photo- 
graphs would  be  so  very  expensive,  as  a  very  large  number 
is  used  up  in  an  incredibly  short  space  of  time.  Have  as 
many  cut-out  flowers  and  leaves  as  possible  to  cover  angles 
and  hard  lines,  and  it  is  as  well  to  make  the  pictures  in 
careless  groups,  and  not  a  stiff  arrangement.  In  pasting 
on  the  pictures,  rub  from  one  side  to  the  other,  to  avoid 
any  unsightly  creases,  which  spoil  the  effect  of  the  prettiest 
pictures.  Almost  the  whole  beauty  depends  upon  an  ar- 
tistic arrangement  of  the  scraps.  We  have  seen  one  very 
pretty  one  where  the  plan  had  been  used  of  first  throwing 
them  down  carelessly  on  a  table,  and  then  putting  them 
on  the  screen  exactly  in  the  way  they  had  fallen. 

The  ordinary  size  for  screens  of  this  description  is  five 
feet  six  inches  high,  and  each  leaf  two,  or  two  and  one  half 
feet  broad.  Screens  for  standing  before  an  empty  grate 
or  in  a  corner  can  be  arranged  from  a  small  clothes-horse, 
covered  with  cretonne  or  any  fancy  material. 

EMBROIDERY  is  very  effective  on  screens.  Indeed  it  is 
perhaps  the  best  way  of  showing  off  a  handsome  piece  of 
work,  either  on  the  smaller  screens  just  described,  or  on 
the  separate  leaves  of  a  large  screen. 

The  material  after  working  should  be  stretch^  1&  firmly 
on  with  tacks,  which  can  be  covered  by  a  narrow  gaj. 
gimp,  held  down  by  brass-headed  ":  M!S.  .  The  designs  on 
the  Japanese  screens  are  very  suggestive  for  em1^  TV, 
as  they  combine  grace  and  color  so  happily.  A  ,t  .utern 
is  very  tiresome,  but  the  pretty  branches  stretching  across 


34 


THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 


the  screen,  such  as  are  found  among  the  Japanese  designs, 

are  exceedingly  effective. 

A  handsome  cretonne  stretched  across  the  frame  and 

held  down  by  brass-headed  nails  with  a  lining  of  cream- 
colored  cambric  makes  a 
very  pretty  screen. 

BOLSTER-PILLOW.  — 

Make  a  pillow  of  down  or 
feathers  fourteen  inches 
long  and  fourteen  inches 
in  circumference.  For  a 
cover  take  two  triangular 
pieces  of  plush  of  contrast- 
ing colors,  twenty  -  two 
inches  on  the  straight  sides 
and  sew  them  together  on 
the  slanting  sides.  Cover 
the  seam  with  an  embroid- 
ery of  applique  as  shown 
in  Fig.  17.  For  directions 
for  applique",  see  Tilton's 
Art  Needlework. 

Sew  the  cover  together, 
face  the  ends  with  satin 
three  and  one  half  inches 
deep.  Insert  the  pillow, 
gather  up  the  ends,  as  in 
the  illustration,  and  finish 

with  bows   of  ribbon  in  one  end,   and   silk   balls  in  the 

other. 


HOUSEHOLD. 


35 


SMALLER  BOLSTER-PILLOW.  —  This  should  be  thirteen 
inches  long  and  eleven  inches  in  circumference.  Cover 
with  plush  or  some  plain  material.  Draw  it  up  at  the 
ends.  As  in  Fig.  18,  put  on  a 
cord  with  tassels.  Decorate  as 
in  the  illustration,  with  embroid- 
ery, or  put  around  it,  at  equal 
distance  from  the  ends,  a  point 
lace  insertion  three  inches  wide, 
edged  with  lace.  This  insertion 
can  be  made  of  knitted  lace  or 
macrame,  done  with  ecru  colored 
thread.  This  style  of  cushion  is 
now  used  in  Paris  on  the  long 
lounge  chairs  that  are  much  af- 
fected. 

PLUSH  PILLOW.  —  Fig.  19 
shows  another  method  of  mak- 
ing a  plush  cover  for  a  bolster 
pillow.  It  is  ornamented  with 
appliques  of  satin-stitch  embroid- 
ery, pompon  fringe,  and  with  rich 
silk  cords  and  tassels,  the  pom- 
pons bordering  the  two  ends. 
This  "dormeuse,"  as  it  is  called 
in  France,  is  adapted  to  arm- 
chairs and  sofas,  and  serves  as 
a  head  rest.  The  model  is  from 

Paris.  The  cords  serve  to  tie  up  the  cover  at  each  end. 
The  same  pattern  is  used  for  night-gown  sachets,  as 
described  under  that  head. 


THREE   HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 


EMBROIDERED  SoFA-PiL- 
LOWS  are  very  handsome, 
of  plush,  cloth,  felting,  pon- 
gee, and  other  materials. 
The  work  is  described  in 
Art-Needlework. 

PINE  -NEEDLE  PILLOWS 
are  made  of  crash  or  pon- 
gee, with  a  branch  of  pine 
embroidered  upon  them, 
and  are  filled  with  the 
fragrant  pine-needles, 
dried ;  or  such  a  pillow  can 
be  filled  with  sweet  fern, 
dried. 

HOP  PILLOWS  have  al- 
most taken  the  place  of 
pine-needle  pillows,  since 
hops  have  a  soporific  ef- 
fect. A  pillow  made  of 
pongee,  and  embroidered 
with  a  device,  such  as 
"  Schlafe  wohl,"  or  "  Sweet 
be  thy  Slumber,"  makes 
an  acceptable  gift. 

CRETONNE  TABLE-COVER. 
A  charming  cover  for  a 
small  table  can  be  made 
from  a  square  of  bright- 
flowered  cretonne,  edged 


FIG.  19. 


HOUSEHOLD.  37 

with  Nottingham  lace  four  or  five  inches  deep,  put  on 
either  plain  or  jiull. 

FIVE-O'CLOCK  TEA-CLOTHS.  —  The  greatest  novelty  is 
Russian  cross-stitch  in  washing  silks  on  fancy-grounded 
Madras  muslin,  edged  with  tinted  lace,  sewn  on  rather  full. 
The  cross-stitch  is  usually  done  on  coarse  canvas,  which  is 
drawn  away  afterwards,  as  described  in  Tilton's  Canvas- 
Work.  This  canvas,  being  first  tacked  on,  supports  the 
somewhat  delicate  background,  and  gives  substance  for 
working  on.  The  work  must  not  be  puckered,  and,  when 
finished,  should  be  very  lightly  damped  at  the  back,  and 
ironed  with  a  tolerably  hot  iron.  The  work  is  very  pretty 
and  uncommon,  and  cleans  perfectly,  though  there  is  a  risk 
in  washing  it.  The  cream  muslin,  with  faintly  tinted  leaves 
and  flowers  over  it,  is  used  also,  and  the  silks  match  to  a 
certain  extent.  It  can  be  worked  in  the  four  corners  in 
crewels,  with  a  foundation  composed  of  pale  coffee-colored 
muslin.  Cream  spotted  muslin  tea-cloths,  edged  with  lace, 
are  very  pretty,  with  small  silk  "  pompons  "  at  the  corners  ; 
also  the  new  flowered  nainsook  muslin  with  lace,  one  cor- 
ner turned  up  with  loops  of  colored  ribbon,  with  a  cosey 
to  match,  made  up  over  silk. 

Many  of  the  fashionable  tea-cloths  are  now  of  pale-colored 
Roman  sheeting,  bordered  with  a  frill  of  deep  cream  and 
coffee-colored  lace,  or  with  festoons  of  fancy  Madras  mus- 
lin, with  colored  flowers,  caught  up  with  the  silk  pompons 
matching  in  color. 

EMBROIDERED  TABLE-COVERS  give  an  opportunity  for 
the  display  of  every  variety  of  work,  in  borders  of  appli- 
que, or  directly  on  cloth  or  felting,  in  the  corners  or 


38  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

across  the  ends,  in  various  stitches  described  in  Art- 
Needlework. 

A  NEW  METHOD  of  making  table-covers  is  to  tie  the  cor- 
ners with  ribbon  bows,  which  may  be  pushed  up,  so  that 
the  cloth  will  fit  any  smaller  table.  A  table-cover  of  white 
Madras,  lined  with  yellow  sateen  and  tied  with  yellow  bows, 
gives  any  table  a  light  and  graceful  appearance. 

BELL-PULLS.  —  The  length  is  two  and  one  half  yards ; 
width,  four  inches.  Embroidery  on  silk  or  satin  is  most 
suitable  for  a  drawing-room.  Take,  if  possible,  the  pre- 
vailing color  in  the  latter  for  the  foundation.  Black  satin, 
however,  worked  with  yellow  wheat  and  daisies,  looks  well 
with  almost  anything.  Line  with  yellow,  and  put  a  yellow 
cord  around  the  edge,  with  a  tassel  of  the  same  color. 
Crewel-work  is  most  suitable  for  bed-rooms.  Cretonne  em- 
broidery does  very  well,  too. 

A  handsome  pattern  in  imitation  point  lace  is  very  ef- 
fective for  a  bell-pull,  done  with  linen  braid,  especially  if 
the  lambrequins  and  other  furniture  are  decorated  with 
lace. 

PILLOW-SHAMS.  —  These  can  be  made  in  great  variety. 
Dotted  and  figured  muslins,  lined  with  a  color,  are  some- 
times used,  but  fine  linen  is  more  elegant  and  durable. 
Cut  your  material  large  enough  to  cover  well  all  the  edges 
of  the  pillow,  but  not  so  large  that  the  two  shams  shall 
interfere  with  one  another  when  on  the  bed. 

A  monogram  is  the  best  device  for  the  centre.  The  four 
sides  can  be  finished  in  a  broad  hem,  or  in  tucks.  A  small 
vine  embroidered  around  the  sides,  and  the  edges  finished 
in  scallops,  is  very  handsome. 


HOUSEHOLD.  39 

Lace  insertion  let  in  around  the  sides,  with  a  hem  of  the 
linen  the  width  of  the  lace,  on  each  side  of  it,  to  be 
trimmed  when  done  with  lace  to  match  the  insertion,  is 
particularly  pretty.  The  insertion  should  be  lined  with  a 
color.  An  embroidered  ruffle  gathered  to  the  sides  is  a 
simple  and  effective  finish. 

Some  ladies  prefer  to  a  pillow-sham  an  ornamental  pil- 
low-case, made  large  enough  to  slip  easily  over  the  pillow 
when  covered  with  the  ordinary  pillow-case.  The  orna- 
mental ones  are  carefully  removed  and  folded  away  when 
the  bed  is  made  ready  for 'the  night. 

A  SCARF  PILLOW-SHAM.  —  The  pillow-sham  made  long 
enough  to  cover  both  pillows  is  in  some  respects  more 
convenient  than  two,  and  is  heavily  embroidered  or 
trimmed  at  each  end. 

FENDER-STOOLS.  —  For  bedroom  use,  direct  your  car- 
penter to  make  a  fender-stool  of  the  ordinary  shape,  taking 
care  that  the  top  board  is  the  length  of  the  hearth.  It 
should  be  ten  or  twelve  inches  wide,  and  must  stand  seven 
inches  from  the  floor  on  the  lowest  side. 

Cover  the  top  of  the  stool  with  cotton  batting.  Over 
this  stretch  very  tightly,  strong  unbleached  cotton  cloth, 
fastening  it  to  the  stool  with  upholsterer's  tacks.  Over 
this  put  a  second  cover  of  cretonne,  to  match  the  furnish- 
ings of  the  chamber.  Make  a  flounce  of  cretonne  deep 
enough  to  come  to  the  floor,  and  tack  around  the  four 
sides  of  the  stool. 

You  will  now  have  made  not  only  a  fender-stool,  but 
also  a  convenient  place  for  keeping  boots  and  shoes  in 
hiding.  For  drawing-rooms  the  stool  should  be  made  of 


40  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

hard  wood,  such  as  oak  or  black  walnut,  and  covered  with 
worsted-work,  or  plush  embroidered. 

CHAIR-BACK  COVERS.  —  Squares  or  oblong  pieces  of 
Madras  muslin,  e"cru  color,  and  edged  with  a  deep  lace,  can 
be  arranged  as  chair-backs  by  tying  a  large  bow  round  the 
centre,  fastening  to  'the  top  of  the  chair,  and  letting  the 
two  ends  fall  downwards,  Russian  fashion.  Plush  stamped, 
the  pattern  outlined  in  gold  ;  fine  bolting-cloth  embroid- 
ered; a  piece  of  damask,  with  just  a  stripe  of  the  pattern 
at  the  edge,  outlined  with  gold-colored  silk  ;  alternate  strips 
of  painted  or  embroidered  satin,  velvet,  sateen,  plain  or 
fancy  ribbon,  or  Liberty's  silks  and  guipure  insertion,  the 
whole  bordered  with  antique  furniture  lace,  put  on  full  at 
the  corners,  are  all  very  effective  ;  also  strips  of  pretty  cre- 
tonne edged  with  lace.  Satin  sheeting,  painted  or  worked 
with  one  large  spray,  thrown  carelessly  across  from  the 
left-hand  corner,  looks  well.  All  these  are  very  easy 
to  make.  The  black  satin  antimacassars  are  in  several 
styles ;  sometimes  with  conventional  sprays  all  over,  at 
one  end  wild  roses,  or  in  stripes  of  japonica,  or  with  hops 
in  one  corner.  They  are  bordered  with  white  lace. 

SCARFS. — The  Turkish  and'  Indian  embroidered  chair- 
backs  are  perhaps  more  in  fashion  than  any  other  kind. 
For  these  scarfs  the  ground  should  be  covered  with  a  fil- 
ling of  darning,  in  silk,  and  each  figure  or  portion  of  a 
figure  worked  over  with  its  own  color  in  silk.  Gather  the 
scarf  up  in  the  middle  and  fasten  it  to  the  chair  with  a 
large  bow. 

FOOT-STOOL.  —  The  cover  for  Fig.  20  is  easily  made  in 
the  Ball  pattern  described  in  Tilton's  Crochet.  Any  simple 


HOUSEHOLD.  41 

canvas  pattern  can  be  worked.  The  design  is  carried  out 
by  changing  the  color  for  the  several  balls  when  it  is 
needed ;  the  border  is  worked  separately  with  a  fringe  of 
balls,  and  tassels  should  be  put  at  the  corners,  as  in  the 
illustration. 

ANOTHER  FOOT-STOOL.  —  Fig.  2 1   is  worked  in  Smyrna 
wool  done  on  very  coarse  canvas.     It  is  worked  over  two 


.     FIG 


meshes  each  one  half  inch  wide  and  in  half-cross  stitch. 
After  the  second  mesh  is  worked  over,  cut  the  threads  on 
the  first  mesh,  and  use  this  for  the  third  row  and  repeat. 
This  has  the  solid,  raised  effect  of  a  Persian  rug.  The 
work  is  very  easily  done  with  a  curved  needle,  when  it 
can  be  found,  or  a  large  stout  tape  needle  can  be  used. 
Small  remnants  of  double  zephyr  can  be  used  for  the 


42  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

work,  which  can  be  done  in  any  simple  canvas  pattern,  as  in 
the  illustration,  Fig.  21.  If  varied  colors  are  used,  there 
should  be  a  plain  border  of  black,  or  some  dark  color  to 
set  off  the  whole.  This  stitch  is  very  handsome  for  rugs. 
MUSIC-STOOL. — The  cover  for  the  music-stool,  repre- 
sented in  Fig.  22,  is  done  by  drawing  double  threads 
through  a  coarse  Penelope  canvas  with  a  crochet  needle  as 


described  in  Tilton's  Crochet  book.  The  stitch  gives  a 
plush-like  effect.  The  corners  of  the  music-stool  should 
be  covered  with  plush  put  on  in  plaits,  as  in  the  illustra- 
tion. 

SILVER  TRIPODS.  —  Have  three  blackthorn  sticks,  and 
cover  them  with  tinfoil,  each  in  long  strips  about  one  and 
one  half  or  two  inches  broad.  Paste  each  loosely  round,  and 
leave  it  to  dry  ;  then  press  it  tight.  Tie  the  sticks  to- 


HOUSEHOLD. 


43 


gether  three  inches  from  the  top.  Put  cross-bar  pieces  of 
wood  from  one  leg  to  another  at  the  bottom,  at  a  distance 
of  two  inches  from  the  end  of  the  legs.  Cover  a  little 
wicker  basket  with  tinfoil,  and  suspend  to  the  centre  by  a 
piece  of  string  also  covered  with  tinfoil.  Inside  the  basket 
place  a  small  cup 
for  holding  flowers. 

RUSTIC  WHEEL- 
BARROWS can  also 
be  made  from  twigs 
gilded,  and  are  used 
for  flowers  or  to 
keep  on  the  cen- 
tre-table as  recept- 
acles for  small  arti- 
cles. 

RUSTIC  STAND. 
A  bundle  of  these 
twigs  gilded  can 
also  be  arranged  in 
the  form  of  a  flower- 
pot with  a  base,  a 
torsade  and  bow  of  ribbon  marking  the  separation  of  vessel 
and  stand. 

HOME-MADE  RUGS.  —  These  articles  are  so  serviceable, 
and  the  genuine  Persian  and  Turkish  rugs  are  so  expen- 
sive, that  we  do  not  wonder  that  American  ingenuity  has 
turned  itself  to  invent  some  method  of  manufacturing 
them  within  the  reach  of  every  housewife.  The  New 
England  housekeeper  has  for  a  long  time  not  only  adorned 


44  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

her  own  home,  but  has  won  prizes  at  country  shows,  by 
her  skill  in  making  handsome  and  durable 

RAG  RUGS.  —  These  warm  and  inexpensive  rugs,  or 
mats,  are  made  by  collecting  all  the  thick  rags  of  the 
household,  light  and  dark,  and  cutting  them  into  pieces 
about  half  an  inch  or  thereabouts  in  width  ;  the  length  is 
not  of  so  much  consequence.  These  little  bits  should  be 
drawn  with  a  coarse  bone  crochet  needle  or  rug  hook 
through  the  meshes  of  a  piece  of  coarse  canvas,  such 
as  packing  bags  are  made  of,  leaving  loops  to  stand 
up  on  the  right  side  ;  if  drawn  firmly  through,  no  fas- 
tening is  required,  and  the  pattern  can  be  made  to  suit 
the  taste  or  fancy  of  the  makers.  If  light  rags  pre- 
dominate, then  the  centre  may  be  of  a  light  shade  and 
the  border  variegated  ;  or,  if  the  colors  are  equal,  it 
might  be  worked  in  lines  with  a  border  of  one  color. 
The  patterns  found  on  the  Turkish  rugs  can  be  easily 
imitated.  Any  one  skilled  in  design  should  first  mark 
them  out  in  broad  lines  on  the  burlap  required,  which  can 
be  easily  followed. 

This  work  has  been  made  even  easier  in  late  years,  as  the 
burlap  or  foundation  can  be  found  with  pattern  marked 
and  careful  directions  for  work.  The  burlap  founda- 
tion, or  body  only  of  the  rug,  may  be  bought  all  print- 
ed or  stamped  in  colors  with  a  proper  design.  With 
the  directions  for  working"  the  rug  are  sent  simple  reci- 
pes or  instructions  for  coloring  rags,  yarn,  etc.,  a  great 
variety  of  colors,  and  at  a  very  small  expense.  Yarn, 
waste  filling,  etc.,  of  any  color,  are  furnished  when  re- 
quired. 


HOUSEHOLD.  45 

The  most  convenient  method  of  holding  the  rug 
body  or  pattern  while  working  it  or  drawing  in  the  rag 
filling,  is  to  sew  or  tack  it  into  a  simple  frame  com- 
posed of  four  strips  of  board  about  two  inches  wide 
and  seven  eighths  of  an  inch  thick.  This  frame  may 
be  supported  on  the  backs  of  chairs,  or  in  any  con- 
venient manner ;  but  the  best  way  is  to  use  the  im- 
proved iron  clamps,  which  are  provided  with  screws  for 
holding  the  frames  together,  and  also  with  sockets  for 
receiving  the  legs.  They  are  also  useful  for  supporting 
quilting  frames. 

Proper  rug  hooks  are  furnished,  made  of  brass  wire  with 
hard  wood  handles,  as  shown  in  Fig.  23,  finished 
very  nicely,  and  bent  to  fit  the  hand  so  as  not  to 
tire  the  arm  in  working.  Filling  of  all  colors, 
which  can  be  used  instead  of  rags,  can  be  easily 
found. 

RUG-MAKING  MACHINE.  —  There  has  also  been  intro- 
duced a  machine  for  "drawing  in"  the  filling  of  such  rugs. 
This  machine  is  an  ingenious  device,  saving  much  muscu- 
lar strength,  performing  its  work  rapidly  and  satisfactorily, 
and  has  the  merit  of  being  inexpensive,  simple  in  its 
construction,  and  easily  operated,  and  with  a  little  practice 
can  be  successfully  used  by  an  intelligent  child  of  ten 
years  of  age. 

KNOTTED  RUGS.  —  A  very  effective  rug  or  mat  can  be 
made  with  the  odds  and  ends  of  wools  thus :  Work  knotted 
stitches  into  coarse  woolwork  canvas  in  irregular-shaped 
patches  of  different  colors,  avoiding  putting  decided  con- 
trasts together,  but  arranging  blues,  greens,  reds,  browns, 


46  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS, 

and  yellows,  crimson  and  scarlet,  greens  and  violets  next  to 
each  other.  Care  must  be  taken  that  the  wool  is  arranged 
in  equal  thicknesses,  thus  :  two  strands  of  fingerings,  four 
of  crewel  wool,  will  be  required  to  work  in  with  fleecy. 
Several  rows  of  knots  in  some  dark-colored  wool  must  be 
worked  on  the  rug  as  a  border.  Knotted  stitches  are 
made  by  twisting  wool  once  or  twice  round  the  needle 
before  returning  it  into  the  same  hole  where  the  stitch  was 
commenced. 

BURLAP  RUG.  —  A  very  quick  and  simple  method  of 
making  a  rug  is  by  working  in  cross-stitch  on  the  kind  of 
burlap  that  comes  in  regular  threads,  different  from  com- 
mon bagging.  This  is  not  unlike  Java  canvas,  and  can  be 
worked  in  any  Berlin  pattern.  It  is  usually  done  in  one 
color,  of  a  deep  red,  for  instance,  and  the  same  color  is 
brought  into  the  fringe  of  drawn  threads  at  either  end. 

WOOL  RUG.  —  Tie  together  and  wind  into  balls  odds 
and  ends  of  worsted  of  all  colors  and  lengths.  If  your 
remnants  are  chiefly  of  double  zephyr,  double  or  treble 
your  finer  wools  as  may  be  necessary  to  make  them  all  of 
the  same  thickness.  From  these  balls  cast  on  to  medium- 
sized  ivory  knitting  needles  ten  stitches  if  the  wool  is  fine, 
eight  if  coarse.  Knit  back  and  forward  until  you  have  a 
strip  as  long  as  you  wish  your  rug  to  be.  Knit  as  many 
of  these  strips  as  you  require  for  the  width  of  your  rug. 

Out  of  bed-ticking  cut  a  foundation  the  size  you  wish. 
Double  your  strips  lengthwise  through  the  centre  and  sew 
them  by  the  two  edges  on  the  bed-ticking,  putting  a  strip 
to  every  stripe  in  the  ticking.  When  all  are  sewed  on, 
cut  the  strips  open  through  the  middle  and  ravel  them  a 


HOUSEHOLD,  47 

little.  The  effect  is  handsomer  if  the  strips  are  dampened 
and  pressed  with  a  hot  iron  before  they  are  sewed  to  the 
foundation. 

The  same  method  can  also  be  carried  out  with  a  sew- 
ing machine  by  the  use  of  a  Patented  Rug-Maker,  an  inge- 
nious contrivance  which  does  away  with  the  necessity  of 
even  knitting  the  strips,  and  which  saves  time  by  sewing 
them  on  the  ticking  with  the  machine,  instead  of  by 
hand.  This  is  called  the  Pearl  Rug-Maker.  A  hand- 
some rug,  with  border  two  by  four  feet,  can  be  made  in 
from  three  to  seven  hours  ;  any  sized  rug  may  be  made. 
All  kinds  of  cloth  —  small  pieces  from  the  waste  basket, 
wool  carpet  waste,  odds  and  ends  of  yarn  —  can  be  utilized 
in  making  handsome,  durable  rugs.  Silk  clothing  too 
much  worn  for  patchwork,  can  be  made  into  stool  and 
ottoman  covers,  and  designs  in  flowers  produced  with  very 
little  trouble.  All  the  material  comes  on  the  upper  side, 
and  is  firmly  sewed  on  a  base  or  foundation  of  coarse  cloth. 

Handsome  Smyrna  rugs  can  be  worked  in  the  stitches 
given  in  this  book  for  the  covers  of  footstools,  in  Ball 
pattern,  with  crochet,  Fig.  20,  and  in  the  handsome  canvas 
pattern  given  with  Fig.  21. 

A  HANDSOME  KNIT  SMYRNA  RUG  can  be  made  with 
ends  of  Smyrna  wool,  as  described  in  Tilton's  Knitting 
Book.  Cut  the  ends  of  worsted  two  and  one  quarter  inches 
long,  and  use  No.  13  steel  needles.  The  first  row  should 
be  knit  plain  with  coarse  knitting  cotton.  For  the  second 
row  knit  one  plain,  take  an  end  of  the  worsted,  and  lay  it 
between  the  needles,  one  half  lying  in  front  next  you,  knit 
one  stitch,  as  in  Fig.  24,  then  double  back  the  other  end, 


48 


THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 


so  that  it  comes  evenly  side  by  side  with  the  first  in  front 
on  the  side  next  you.  Knit  one  plain  row  again  and  re- 
peat, bringing  the  ends  always  on  the  same  side.  Knit 
in  strips  to  be  sewed  together.  After  it  is  finished  cut  the 
threads  even  at  the  top.  Any  Berlin  pattern  can  be 
worked,  changing  the  colors,  the  two  ends  of  the  doubled 


worsted  and  two  knit  stitches  making  one  stitch  of  the 
pattern. 

MATERIALS  for  this  work  can  be  found,  conveniently 
prepared  for  knitting  these  Smyrna  Rugs,  in  boxes  pro- 
vided with  wools  cut,  with  needles,  cotton  for  foundation, 
and  mesh  for  cutting  more  wools,  as  in  Fig.  25.  In  using 
this,  wind  the  worsted  to  be  used  over  the  grooved  mesh, 
and  cut  the  worsted  along  the  groove.  This  makes  the 
ends  of  the  desired  length. 


HOUSEHOLD.  49 

UMBRELLA-STAND.  —  Get  a  piece  of  drain  pipe  ten  or 
twelve  inches  in  diameter,  and  two  and  one  half  feet  high, 
closed  at  one  end.  Put  on  a  ground  in  oil  paints,  and  on 
this  paint  clusters  of  flower-de-luce,  or  branches  of  altheas, 
or  any  large  flower.  The  more  delicate  flowers  will  not  be 
effective. 

This  is  to  stand  in  the  vestibule  or  corner  of  the  hall,  to 
hold  umbrellas,  and  is  a  convenient  as  well  as  handsome 
receptacle  for  them,  as  they  can  be  put  in  wet  and  allowed 
to  drain. 

BASKETS  FOR  PET  CATS  OR  DOGS.  —  Buy  one  of  the 
baskets  made  for  the 
purpose  of  giving  to 
a  pet  cat  or  small  dog 
his  own  resting-place 
in  the  drawing-room. 
Line  this  with  quilted 

FIG.  25. 

satin,  wadded,  and  fin- 
ish on  the  edges  with  a  silk  cord.     Into  the  hood  of  the 
basket  tie  a  bow  of  broad  satin  ribbon. 

A  less  expensive  resting-place  for  a  pet  can  be  made  by 
using  instead  of  a  wicker  basket  one  of  the  long  oval 
wooden  baskets  in  which  grapes  are  brought  to  market. 
Cover  the  outside  with  a  dark  figured  sateen,  and  the 
inside  with  a  plain  pink  or  blue,  and  decorate  with  ribbon 
bows. 

FINGER-PLATES  FOR  DOORS.  — Many  housekeepers  like 
finger-plates  to  save  the  paint  above  and  below  the  door- 
knob from  getting  soiled  and  worn.  They  can  be  bought 
in  china  and  glass  at  the  china  stores  ;  but  pretty  ones 
might  also  be  made  by  any  ingenious  person. 


SO  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

For  each  door  have  a  carpenter  cut  two  pieces  of  light 
wood,  eight  inches  high,  three  inches  wide  and  one  quarter 
inch  thick,  with  the  corners  rounded  and  edges  bevelled. 
Decorate  these  with  painting,  or  pen  and  ink  drawing, 
or  decalcomanie.  Let  your  design  get  thoroughly  dry,  and 
then  cover  with  two  coats  of  varnish.  These  are  to  be 
screwed  to  the  door,  even  with  the  outer  edge,  one  just 
above  and  the  other  just  below  the  door-knob.  Book- 
binders' pasteboard,  decorated  and  varnished  could  also  be 
used,  but  would  not  be  quite  so  durable  as  wood. 

DUSTERS.  — A  set  of  dusters  is  a  nice  present  for  a 
little  girl  to  give  to  her  mamma,  as  they  are  so  easily 
made.  Get  cheese-cloth  at  five  cents  a  yard,  and  cut  it  in 
squares  three  quarters  of  a  yard  in  size.  In  one  corner 
work  the  word  Duster.  Hem  all  the  sides,  or  finish  the 
edge  with  button-hole  stitch  in  bright  worsted.  Scarlet  is 
the  best  color  to  use,  because  it  does  not  fade  when  it 
is  washed. 

DUSTER-BAG.  —  A  pretty  bag  to  hold  a  duster  for  parlor 
use  can  be  made  of  fine  crash.  Make  the  bag  of  two 
pieces  ten  inches  long,  and  six  inches  wide.  On  one  side 
work,  in  two  shades  of  the  same  color,  circles  the  size  of  a 
finger  ring,  in  groups  of  two,  overlapping  each  other.  On 
the  other  side  work  a  name  or  monogram  or  flower. 
Make  up  the  bag  leaving  a  ruffle  above  the  strings  three 
inches  deep,  which  must  be  lined  with  bright-colored  silk. 
Use  ribbon  of  the  same  color  for  strings.  Another  duster- 
bag  is  described  on  page  27. 

SWEEPING-CAPS.  —  Cut  cambric  or  calico  in  a  half, 
square,  with  the  corner  rounded,  measuring  thirty-six 


HOUSEHOLD.  5 1 

inches  long  and  twenty-two  inches  deep.  There  are  two 
drawstrings,  one  running  along  the  length  at  a  distance  of 
five  inches  from  the  edge,  and  the  other  in  a  half  circle  at 
six  inches  from  the  edge,  but  eight  inches  in  the  centre, 
opposite  the  corner.  This  is  owing  to  the  drawstring 
being  in  a  half  circle,  and  the  corner  pointed,  or  rather 
rounded.  The  first  drawstring  gathers  the  hood  round 
the  face,  the  second  round  the  nape  of  the  neck,  thus  form- 
ing the  shape.  A  bow  of  the  print  or  a  ruche  of  lace 
round  the  front  can  be  added  for  additional  ornament.  In 
pale  pink,  gray,  and  blue  print,  these  caps  are  most 
pretty. 

ANOTHER  SWEEPING-CAP.  —  Another  way  to  make  a 
sweeping-cap  is  to  cut  a  circle  eighteen  inches  in  diameter. 
Bind  the  edge  with  calico  or  braid.*  two  inches  from  the 
edge  all  around  ,  face  on  a  piece  for  a  running  string. 
Into  this  put  either  tape  or  elastic  and  draw  up  to  suit  the 
size  of  the  head. 

D'OYLEYS. — There  is  such  a  variety  in  the  making  of 
D'Oyleys,  and  they  are  so  constantly  needed,  that  indi- 
vidual taste  can  be  gratified  in  making  a  very  useful 
present  in  a  set  of  them.  Many  patterns  for  making 
them  are  given  in  Tilton's  Art-Needlework.  They  are 
very  pretty  of  very  fine  crash  fringed,  with  a  border  of 
drawn-work,  a  different  pattern  for  each  D'Oyley.  A 
monogram  can  be  worked  in  the  centre,  or  a  motto. 

A  very  pretty  set  can  be  made  for  fruit  napkins,  with  a 
motto  referring  to  a  different  fruit  for  each  D'Oyley,  or 
a  separate  fruit  can  be  worked  on  each.  Pretty  patterns 
in  cross-stitch  can  be  done,  in  imitation  of  the  Bulgarian 


52  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

work,  on  loose-threaded  India  cotton,  or  coarse  Irish  linen. 
The  work  should  be  done  over  canvas,  in  gold  thread  and 
red,  or  some  bright-colored  filo-floss,  the  threads  of  the 
canvas  to  be  drawn  out  afterwards.  Etching-stitch  should 
be  done  either  in  fine  black  silk,  or  in  one  thread  of  filo- 
floss,  and  the  stitches  should  be  of  the  finest.  A  close 
row  of  cats'  heads  makes  an  original  border  round  the  edge 
of  a  D'Oyley,  done  in  fine  etching-stitch.  D'Oyleys  can 
be  bought  like  the  illustration  in  Fig.  26,  with  a  border 
ready  for  cross-stitch  ;  and  a  small  design  of  a  goblet,  cup 


FIG.  26. 

and  saucer,  or  Japanese  vases,  is  pretty  for  the  centre, 
done  in  two  shades  of  blue  or  in  any  desired  color. 

CHINA-CLOSET  TOWELS.  —  A  set  of  china-closet  towels 
neatly  hemmed  and  marked  is  sure  to  be  gladly  received 
by  a  housekeeper.  Towels  for  china  should  be  made  of 
the  linen  that  comes  for  the  purpose,  checked  off  with 
blue  or  red,  and  the  word  CHINA  should  be  marked  on 
each  one.  A  pretty  way  of  marking  is  to  work  one  letter 
of  the  word  in  each  of  the  five  squares  across  one  end  of 
the  towel,  arranging  the  word  so  that  it  shall  come  either 


HOUSEHOLD.  S3 

at  one  side,  quite  in  the  corner,  or  across  the  middle  of 
the  towel.  Old  table-linen  makes  the  best  towels  for 
wiping  silver.  Cotton-flannel  is  also  much  used,  but  soft 
linen  damask  is  better.  These  should  be  marked  SILVER 
in  some  distinct  way.  Little  drawings  in  indelible  ink 
of  some  of  the  articles  they  are  to  be  used  for,  such  as 
forks  or  spoons  crossed,  or  a  cream-pitcher  or  sugar-bowl, 
also  make  a  mark  which  easily  distinguishes  these  towels 
from  all  others. 

TEA-POT  HOLDER. — This  is  made  of  a  square  of  knit- 
ting, done  in  pearls.  The  border  at  the  sides  is  of  crim- 
son, the  checks  in  the  centre  are  alternate  crimson  and 
white.  Cast  on,  of  any  fine  yarn,  fifty-five  stitches,  i. 
Knit  fifteen  stitches  of  the  crimson  yarn,  five  of  white, 
five  of  crimson,  five  of  white,  five  of  crimson,  five  of 
white,  fifteen  of  crimson.  In  going  back,  follow  the  same 
order.  Repeat  until  you  have  knit  four  turns.  2.  You 
must  now  reverse  the  checks.  This  you  do  by  knitting  as 
before,  fifteen  stitches  of  crimson  for  the  border,  five 
additional  stitches  of  crimson,  five  white,  five  crimson, 
five  white,  five  crimson,  fifteen  crimson.  Repeat  until 
you  have  knit  four  turns.  You  will  now  return  to  the 
order  given  in  No.  I.  Alternate  the  checks  in  this  way 
until  you  have  made  eleven  rows  of  checks.  Bind  off  and 
sew  the  holder  together  at  the  top.  At  the  bottom  sew 
it  together  only  across  the  checks,  leaving  it  open  across 
the  border.  At  the  point  where  the  seam  stops  put  on  a 
cord  and  tassel.  In  passing  the  different  colored  yarn 
from  one  check  to  the  other,  draw  it  as  tight  as  possible 
across  the  under  side  so  that  the  checks  when  done  shall 


54  THREE   HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

be  puffed,  while  the  border  lies  flat.  This  is  very  import- 
ant as  it  forms  the  chief  beauty  of  the  holder. 

KNIFE-CASES.  —  These  are  made  of  cotton-flannel  and 
are  very  good  to  keep  knives  in  which  are  not  in  constant 
use.  They  are  equally  valuable  to  put  silver  forks  and 
spoons  in,  as  they  will  prevent  their  getting  scratched  or 
rubbed.  The  dimensions  given  below  are  for  dinner- 
knives. 

Cut  a  piece  of  colored  or  white  cotton-flannel  two  and 
one  half  inches  wide  and  twenty-four  inches  long.  Double 
back  so  that  the  nap  will  come  inside,ten  inches,  and  sew 
up  at  the  sides.  Bind  all  around  with  scarlet  braid.  Di- 
vide the  pocket  thus  made  into  twelve  spaces  which  will 
each  measure  one  and  three  quarters  inches. 

A  CORN-NAPKIN  is  pretty  and  convenient.  Made  of 
white  linen,  it  is  large  enough  to  cover  and  keep  warm  a 
plate  of  corn.  The  corners  are  embroidered  with  two  ears 
of  corn  and  blades,  in  corn  color  and  green  silk. 

COSIES.  —  These  are  covers  much  used  in  Germany  and 
in  England  for  keeping  liquids  warm,  and  are  valuable, 
also,  to  keep  the  heat  in  boiled  eggs. 

Tea-cosies  can  be  made  of  worsted  work,  bead  work, 
crewel  embroidery  on  crash,  sheeting,  and  satin,  quilted 
satin,  plain  satin.  The  plain  satin  should  be  ornamented 
with  a  spray  of  artificial  fruit  or  flowers  delicately  placed 
on  one  side.  Old-gold  satin  with  a  cluster  of  poppies  on 
one  side,  and  navy-blue  satin,  with  a  spray  of  buttercups, 
with  a  feather  butterfly  hovering  on  a  wire,  are  pretty. 
They  can  also  be  composed  of  strips  of  satin  ribbons  run 
together  about  two  and  one  half  inches  wide  diagonally, 


HOUSEHOLD.  55 

joined  by  a  chain  stitch  of  gold  filoselle,  and  finished  on 
the  bottom  with  a  frill  of  white  lace  ;  or  one  can  sew 
to  a  foundation  of  pink  silk,  narrow  white  lace,  in  a  fan 
shape,  one  row  just  touchng  the  edge  of  the  other,  ending 
in  the  centre  with  a  rosette  of  pink  satin  ribbon  and  a 
humming  bird.  A  simpler  and  very  inexpensive  one  can 
can  be  made  from  the  following  directions  :  — 

Cut  two  pieces  of  flannel,  fourteen  inches  by  twelve 
inches.  Curve  the  upper  edge,  beginning  on  the  upright 
sides  four  inches  from  the  bottom.  Decorate  the  two  sides 
according  to  your  fancy,  and  sew  them  together,  leaving  the 
bottom  open.  Cut  a  lining  of  the  same  shape  and  size  as 
the  outside,  excepting  it  should  measure  one  inch  less  than 
the  outside,  from  the  bottom  to  the  top  of  the  curve.  Wad 
this  lining  quite  thickly  with  cotton  batting,  quilted  to 
it.  Sew  the  edges  together  as  in  the  outside.  Put  the 
lining  into  the  outside,  and  bind  the  two  together  at  the 
bottom  with  worsted  braid.  Put  on  a  loop  at  the  top  to 
hang  it  up  by  when  not  in  use. 

Still  another  pretty  way  of  decorating  a  cosey  is  by  cut- 
ting out  the  shape  in  canvas,  laying  on  the  crewels  in 
lengths,  as  many  as  four  or  six  together,  and  then  tacking 
them  down  at  distances  with  large  cross-stitches  in  gold- 
colored  filoselle  or  knitting  silk.  The  crossed  stitches 
clown  each  line  of  crewels  should  be  arranged  to  fit  in 
neatly,  every  alternate  cross  being  in  a  line,  and  the  inter- 
mediate ones  above  and  below.  This  work  has  a  good 
effect  and  is  very  easy,  and  particularly  suitable  for  old 
ladies  or  invalids,  who  require  easy  work.  This  is  also 
good  for  kettle-holders  and  mats. 


5  6  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS, 

FLAT-IRON  WIPERS.  —  Sew  into  a  long  strip,  pieces  of 
old  cotton-flannel  or  other  thick  cloth,  torn  into  widths  of 
one  and  one  half  inches.  Braid  these  together  and  sew 
round  and  round  into  a  circular  mat  of  any  size  you  wish. 
These  are  better  than  any  cloth  to  clean  flat-irons  in  iron- 
ing. 

FLAT-IRON  PADS.  —  These  are  to  put  underneath  the 
flat-iron  stand  to  keep  the  ironing-sheet  from  getting 
scorched.  Make  a  bag  (ten  inches  by  twelve  inches  is  a 
convenient  size)  of  bed-ticking,  leaving  it  open  at  one  end. 
Bind  all  around  with  scarlet  braid.  Make  a  pad  of  several 
thicknesses  of  newspaper,  and  slip  into  the  bag,  basting 
together  the  open  en  ' 

KEY  RACK.  —  Cover  a  wooden  rolling-pin  of  small  size, 
from  six  to  eight  inches  long,  with  plush,  tying  the  ends 
with  satin  bows  of  the  same  color  ;  screw  in  as  many 
brass  hooks  in  rows  as  you  desire,  and  nail  on  the  back  a 
satin  ribbon  to  hang  it  by.  This  is  useful  to  hold  keys, 
button-hooks,  scissors,  and  other  small  things. 

ANOTHER  KEY  RACK  can  be  made  in  the  same  way  as 
the  case  for  memoranda,  by  attaching  rows  of  hooks  to  a 
small  board  covered  with  plush  or  gilt  canvas.  This  can 
be  supported  by  the  pretty  chain  and  rod  used  for  hanging 
screens. 


CHAPTER   V. 

LAWN    TENNIS    ACCESSORIES. 

MANY  useful  and  acceptable  presents  can  be  made  in 
connection  with  the  popular  game  of  Lawn  Tennis.  At 
many  country  houses  a  supply  of  tennis  shoes  is  kept  for 
those  who  do  not  possess  a  pair  of  their  own. 

A  VERY  NEAT-LOOKING  RECEPTACLE  can  be  made  for  this 
in  holland,  or  dark  blue  or  red  chintz,  to  be  hung  up 
against  a  wall.  The  whole  thing  is  about  a  yard  square, 
and  it  has  two  rows  of  pockets,  in  which  the  pairs  of  shoes 
are  kept.  The  materials  are  one  yard  of  Hessian,  which  is 
very  coarse  holland,  like  sacking,  three  yards  of  brown  hol- 
land, and  a  dozen  yards  of  colored  or  white  braid.  The 
Hessian  is  for  the  back,  which  goes  against  the  wall,  and 
into  this,  at  the  top,  is  slipped  a  piece  of  stick  to  keep  it 
flat  and  straight.  The  holland  is  then  cut  and  sewn  on  in 
broad,  flat  plaits,  and  stitched  down  the  sides  to  form  the 
pockets,  each  plait  forming  the  pocket.  At  the  top  of 
each  row  of  pockets  a  flounce  is  added,  which  falls  par- 
tially over,  and  makes  all  look  neat  and  tidy.  The  pock- 
ets and  flounces  are  all  bound  with  braid.  The  flounce 
has  just  to  be  raised  to  admit  of  the  shoes  being  taken 
out  or  put  in.  Sometimes  a  button  and  hole  are  added  to 
close  the  pocket  over  the  shoes,  but  this  is  not  necessary. 

57 


58  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

Make  four  rosettes  of  braid  for  the  corners  as  a  finish. 
The  size  of  this  wall  shoe-bag  is,  of  course,  according  to 
taste  and  requirements,  and  the  number  of  pockets  also. 
If  this  shoe  case  is  for  use  in  a  large  family,  it  is  a  good 
plan  to  work  a  name  or  a  monogram,  or  even  one  letter,  on 
each  pocket,  so  that  the  shoes  go  into  the  pocket  with 
their  owners'  mark,  and  are  not  mixed  up  with  others. 
One  row  could  be  thus  marked,  and  the  other  row  left 
unmarked  for  extra  shoes  kept  for  visitors.  This  is  also 
a  useful  arrangement  to  hang  in  a  small  hall,  or  a  room 
where  the  racquets,  etc.,  are  kept.  It  can  have  a  design 
of  crossed  racquets  and  ball  worked  on,  in  red  or  dark  blue 
ingrained  cotton,  at  the  top,  on  the  straight  piece  just 
above  the  upper  flounce.  If  in  colored  chintz,  the  binding 
should  be  white  braid.  A  somewhat  similar  receptacle 
can  be  made  with  long  pockets  to  hold  racquets.  They 
can  either  be  put  in  in  an  upright  position,  or  laid  down 
horizontally.  Small  pockets  for  keeping  garden  gloves 
in,  can  also  be  added,  above  or  at  the  side  of  the  others. 
These  shoe  receptacles  are  sometimes  made  for  bedrooms, 
either  in  white  muslin  over  a  color,  in  holland,  or  in  the 
chintz  of  the  furniture.  For  directions  how  to  make 
these,  see  Boot  Bags,  Wall  Bags,  and  Splashers. 

UMBRELLA  TENTS.  —  Another  novelty  is  to  put  em- 
broidery on  the  umbrella  tents  to  be  seen  so  frequently  on 
garden  lawns.  The  design  is,  of  course,  bold  and  large, 
and  is' either  all  round  or  only  in  the  various  divisions.  A 
design  of  the  beautiful  red  passion-flower,  Tasconia,  hang- 
ing from  its  stalk,  with  leaves  of  shades  of  green  and 
lighter  tendrils,  is  most  effective.  The  stalk  should  be  in 


LAWN  TENNIS  ACCESSORIES.  59 

brown,  and  gracefully  undulating.  The  large  purple  clem- 
atis is  also  very  effective.  The  work  is  most  pleasant. 
It  must  be  as  neat  as  possible,  as  there  is  no  lining,  so  the 
stitches  show.  If  one  of  these  umbrella  tents  is  particu- 
larly intended  for  a  tennis  court,  as  shelter  for  a  looker-on 
or  an  exhausted  player,  it  could  be  worked  with  racquets 
and  balls. 

LAWN  TENNIS  BELTS.  — Work  a  pretty  pattern  on  crim- 
son silk  in  embroidery,  or  use  silk  canvas.  Line  the  belt 
with  white  ribbon,  inside  which  a  second  lining  of  leather 
must  be  placed.  Bind  with  crimson  velvet,  and  fasten  a 
clasp  at  the  ends.  The  common  belts  worn  by  boys  over 
blouses  are  very  suitable  for  a  foundation,  as  they  can  be 
covered  with  embroidered  silk,  Panama  canvas,  or  any 
other  work. 

TENNIS  APRONS.  —  The  Russian  apron  is  of  navy  blue 
twill,  about  thirty  inches  long  and  twenty-eight  inches 
wide,  and  has  two  bands  of  Turkey  red  stitched  on,  with  a 
row  of  Russian  embroidery  (cross  stitch),  or  coarse  white 
insertion  lace  between.  The  bands  are  three  and  one  half 
inches  wide,  the  same  width  between  and  from  the  edge. 
The  whole  may  be  reversed.  There  is  one  large  square 
pocket  on  one  side,  embroidered  or  trimmed  to  match. 

ANOTHER  APRON  is  of  cream  unbleached  linen,  edged 
with  red,  blue,  and  cream  coarse  Russian  lace,  headed  by 
a  pattern  worked  in  thick  red  washing  thread  on  canvas, 
which  is  afterwards  drawn  away  shred  by  shred,  as  de- 
scribed in  Tilton's  Art-Needlework.  The  pocket  is 
square,  and  in  the  centre  worked  to  match,  and  the  left 
corner  of  the  apron  is  turned  back  and  buttoned  with  a 


60  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

red  covered  button,  showing  two  crossed  racquets  and  a 
ball  worked  on  in  red  thread.  Black  lace  aprons  for  elderly 
ladies,  and  cream  lace  for  younger  ones,  trimmed  with  col- 
ored satin  ribbons,  are  always  attractive. 

GARDEN-CUSHIONS.  —  Another  piece  of  garden  work  is 
a  cushion  for  hanging  on  a  chair  or  seat,  made  of  crash 
and  embroidered.  A  strap  of  braid  is  attached  to  the  two 
top  corners,  passing  over  the  back  of  the  seat  and  fastening 
it.  These  cushions  are  long  and  rather  narrow.  They  must 
be  made  according  as  they  are  needed  and  are  padded. 
They  are  very  comfortable  and  are  highly  appreciated  by 
those  who  have  the  benefit  of  them.  They  are  generally 
made  about  ten  inches  long  and  six  inches  wide.  If  work- 
ing them  is  an  objection  they  can  be  made  of  any  odds 
and  ends  of  chintz  or  material,  and  in  colored  plush  they 
look  very  pretty,  but  the  white  worked  ones  are  the  most 
effective  and  ornamental.  They  are  very  quickly  finished, 
as  only  a  spray  of  good  flowers  and  leaves  is  required. 
They  are  also  pretty  with  chintz  birds  or  flowers  appliqued 
on  and  button-holed. 

MATS.  —  Mats,  to  match,  made  of  Hessian,  are  very  use- 
ful to  put  down  before  chairs  on  the  grass.  A  very  coarse 
needle  must  be  used. 

BASKET-CHAIRS. — The  covered  basket-chairs  so  often 
seen  on  the  sands  of  French  watering-places,  called  at 
some  places  bourriches,  are  now  being  much  used  in 
gardens,  and  are  capital  for  keeping  off  sun  and  wind. 
These  are  sometimes  lined  with  pink  or  blue  twill  to  render 
them  ornamental  and  becoming,  and  have  a  colored  wool 
ball  fringe  edging  them.  Round  cushions  can  be  made 


LAWN  TENNIS  ACCESSORIES. 


61 


FIG.  27. 


and  worked  for  the  seats  of  these  chairs,  and  also  a  small 
pocket  to  hang  up  at  the  side  to  hold  a  book  or  pocket 
handkerchief. 


62  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

TENNIS-BALL  BOXES.  — Boxes  for  keeping  the  tennis-balls 
in  are  now  often  to  be  seen,  either  covered  with  crash  or 
coarse  linen  previously  worked  with  crossed  racquets  and 
balls,  or  painted  with  some  appropriate  design.  If  the 
box  is  large  enough,  a  design  in  outline  could  be  worked 
with  dark  blue  filoselle,  of  a  net  with  figures  playing  tennis. 
Sometimes  the  box  containing  everything  appertaining  to 
lawn  tennis  is  neatly  covered  with  holland  or  chintz,  has  a 
padded  top,  and  is  used  on  the  ground  as  an  ottoman.  An 
old  cupboard,  with  plain  sunk  panels,  looks  very  well, 
having  pieces  of  coarse  linen  worked  in  outline  with  dark 
blue  cotton ;  the  design,  a  pretty  figure ;  the  linen  neatly 
fixed  in  the  panels  by  means  of  small  tacks ;  a  margin  of 
blue  in  a  zigzag  pattern  added  all  round.  We  have  seen 
one  like  this  in  a  hall,  and  everything  belonging  to  the 
garden  and  tennis  was  kept  in  the  cupboard.  A  flour- 
barrel  also  makes  a  good  receptacle  for  lawn-tennis  imple- 
ments. This  can  be  easily  painted,  first  with  a  coat  of 
oil  paint  mixed  with  drying  oil,  or  specially  mixed  by  any 
working  gilder  and  painter  (the  latter  is  perhaps  the  best 
as  a  quantity  of  tube  oils  is  required),  and  then  when  dry 
decorated  with  a  band  of  a  bright  color,  or  some  roughly 
painted  daisies  or  poppies.  Varnish  after  some  days,  and 
the  whole  will  be  impervious  to  rain  and  friction.  If  you 
are  not  enough  of  an  artist  to  paint  your  design,  you  can 
gum  on  sprays,  or  a  wreath  of  colored  paper-glazed  flowers, 
such  as  are  sold  for  scrap  screens,  and  cover  the  whole 
with  varnish,  finishing  off  with  a  bow  of  ribbon,  matching 
the  tub,  at  one  end  of  the  handle.  A  barrel  ornamented 
in  this  way  also  makes  a  pretty  wood-box. 


LAWN  TENNIS  ACCESSORIES.  63 

LAWN  TENNIS  NET.  —  Directions  for  making  a  Lawn 
Tennis  net  are  given  in  Tilton's  Art-Needlework. 

A  LAWN  TENNIS  BAG  can  be  made  of  netting,  for  which 
also  directions  will  be  found  in  Tilton's  Art -Needle- 
work. This  is  useful  for  carrying  balls  about  in,  as  well 
as  for  keeping  them  together  when  not  in  use. 


CHAPTER   VI. 

FOR    THE    LIBRARY. 

LIBRARY  STEPS.  —  A  pair  of  steps  convenient  for  reach- 
ing books  in  a  private  library  can  easily  be  made  orna- 
mental, and  furnish  a  valuable  present  for  a  gentleman. 
A  common  set,  of  pine-wood,  can  be  bought  for  sixty- 
two  cents.  Begin  by  painting  them  in  such  oil  paint  as 
can  be  obtained  at  a  painter's  shop.  A  dark  red  makes 
the  best  ground.  Put  a  bit  of  carpet  on  each  step,  cor- 
responding with  the  carpet  in  the  room  for  which  the 
steps  are  to  be  used,  or  of  some  handsome  color.  Make 
a  border  of  macrame  fringe  for  the  front  of  each  step,  and 
to  go  round  the  front  and  two  sides  of  the  upper  step. 

FOR  CHINA-CLOSET  STEPS  it  is  better  to  put  on  the 
carpet  with  brass-headed  nails,  and  without  fringe.  Be- 
sides the  ground-work  of  dark  red  paint,  the  closet  steps 
might  be  ornamented  with  Japanese  designs  of  cups  and 
saucers,  or  other  table  furniture. 

A  BOOK-WAGON  is  very  convenient  in  a  library,  and 
especially  useful,  for  any  one  suffering  with  lameness,  or 
a  writer  at  work  with  many  books,  which  need  to  be 
kept  together.  A  boy's  small  express  wagon  is  suitable 
for  this  purpose,  and  should  be  as  wide  as  the  length  of 
the  books  to  be  used,  such  as  foreign  dictionaries  or  other 
64. 


FOR    THE  LIBRARY.  65 

large  books.  Furnish  the  cart  with  a  lining  of  any  bright 
serviceable  material  which  can  be  made  up,  like  a  Spanish 
Alforca  described  hereafter.  The  pockets  at  the  two  ends 
are  useful  for  holding  papers,  scratch-blocks,  pencils,  etc. 
The  handle  of  the  cart  should  be  shortened  so  that  it  need 
not  be  in  the  way.  A  fringe  should  be  put  over  the  sides 
of  the  cart,  and  a  pretty  cover,  might  be  embroidered  to 
keep  the  books  from  the  dust.  Pretty  moveable  book- 
cases, or  tables  with  shelves  for  this  purpose,  can  be  found 
at  the  furniture  dealer's,  but  these  are  apt  to  be  expensive, 
and  are  difficult  to  move  when  filled  with  books.  But  the 
wagon  can  easily  be  rolled  from  one  part  of  the  room  to 
another,  or  from  room  to  room. 

INK-STAND  SPLASHER.  —  Cut  out  from  heavy  woollen 
cloth  of  some  dark  color,  a  piece  twelve  inches  long  and 
eight  inches  wide.  Bind  this  all  around  with  galloon  to 
match.  Work  some  simple  decoration  in  point-russe  or 
feather-stitch  one  half  inch  from  the  outer  edge,  in 
bright  colored  worsteds  or  embroidery  silks.  In  the 
left-hand  upper  corner  of  the  splasher  fasten  a  small  cal- 
endar for  the  current  year.  Cut  a  strip  of  the  material 
two  and  one  half  inches  long  and  one  inch  wide.  Bind  or 
button-hole  the  edge,  and  fasten  on  the  left-hand  lower 
corner  for  postage  stamps.  Make  a  pen-wiper,  either  book- 
shape  or  round,  as  you  prefer,  and  fasten  on  the  right-hand 
side  of  the  splasher,  half  way  between  the  top  and  bottom, 
or  across  the  upper  corner.  Chamois  skin  is  the  best  mate- 
rial to  use  for  the  leaves  of  the  pen-wiper,  and  should  be 
finished  at  the  edge  by  being  cut  into  regular,  small  points. 
Along  the  bottom  put  elastic  ribbon  divided  into  suitable 


66  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

spaces,  and  into  them  put  pen-holder,  pencil,  and  pen- 
knife, or  small  rule  ;  a  square  glass  inkstand  will  be  needed 
to  complete  the  writing  implements,  and  should  stand  in 
the  space  between  the  pen-wiper  and  the  calendar. 

POCKET  PENCIL  AND  PEN  CASE.  —  From  a  bit  of  kid 
cut  two  pieces  four  inches  long  and  two  inches  wide. 
Cut  the  corners  rounding  at  the  bottom  ;  at  the  top  of 
one  piece  cut  out  a  semi-circle.  Stitch  the  two  pieces 
together,  leaving  them  open  at  the  top.  Divide  this 
case  by  lines  of  stitching,  into  spaces  of  the  requisite 
width  to  hold  a  stylographic  pen  and  two  pencils. 

BLOTTING-BOOK.  —  Cut  from  thick  blotting  paper  of  dif- 
ferent colors  six  or  eight  pieces,  twelve  inches  long  and 
ten  inches  wide.  Select  the  color  you  prefer  for  the  cover, 
and  paint  upon  it  some  tasteful  design.  Tie  the  cover  and 
leaves  together  at  one  corner,  and  cover  the  knot  with  a 
bow  of  satin  ribbon  two  and  one  half  inches  wide. 

BLOTTING-BOOK.  —  For  the  covers  of  your  book,  cut  a 
piece  of  silk,  satin,  or  kid  ten  inches  long  and  seven  inches 
wide.  On  this  embroider  your  design.  This  piece  must 
then  be  laid  flat,  and  lined  by  pasting  tissue  paper  over  the 
inside  with  embroidery  paste.  The  edges  of  the  outside  cover 
should  be  turned  in,  and  this  paper  also  holds  them  in  their 
place.  Over  this,  line  with  watered  silk,  or  silk  of  any 
kind ;  it  is  usual  to  paste  this  silk  over  thin  cardboard ;  if 
this  is  used,  exactly  in  the  centre  of  the  cardboard  cut  it 
half  through,  so  that  it  will  fold  evenly.  This  fold  must 
be  placed  to  the  centre  of  the  book,  and  placed  with  the 
cut  edges  next  to  the  outside  cover.  This  cardboard  must 
be  covered  with  the  silk  next,  and  this  is  again  fastened 


FOR    THE  LIBRARY.  67 

down  to  the  outside  cover  with  a  little  very  dry  glue ;  on 
no  account  use  it  too  liquid  or  it  will  destroy  the  cover. 
In  the  centre  you  now  sew  down  a  piece  of  narrow  ribbon 
or  elastic  for  the  blotting  paper ;  this  you  should  purchase 
in  one  of  the  usual  books ;  they  are  to  be  had  all  sizes, 
and  you  have  only  to  remove  the  outside  cover  and  your 
book  is  complete.  Or,  if  you  prefer,  you  can,  with  little 
additional  labor,  make  the  book  yourself  out  of  sheets  of 
blotting  paper  of  different  colors,  which  can  be  bought  at 
any  stationer's. 

WRITING  PAD.  —  The  most  useful  size  for  these  is  eigh- 
teen inches  long,  but  they  are  frequently  made  twelve 
inches  long,  the  width  ten  inches.  The  foundation  should 
be  a  strong  piece  of  cardboard,  with  four  corners  of  leather, 
into  which  the  blotting  paper  slips.  They  might  also  be 
made  of  enamelled  cloth,  to  cover  the  cardboard  at  the 
back ;  a  little  painted  flower  on  each  corner  would  be  a 
pretty  addition. 

BOOK  COVERS.  —  These  can  be  made  of  linen,  embroid- 
ered with  silks  and  crewels ;  or  of  velvet  or  plush,  deco- 
rated with  silks,  or  gold  and  silver  threads. 

Cut  the  material  large  enough  to  allow  it  to  turn  two  or 
three  inches  over  the  edges  of  the  book  you  wish  to  cover. 
Sew  the  corners  together,  or,  if  you  prefer,  tie  with  ribbons 
across  the  inside  of  the  covers.  A  cover  of  this  descrip- 
tion might  be  used  for  any  annual,  such  as  the  Boston 
Blue  Book,  or  Visiting  Directory,  for  successive  years. 
The  title  of  the  book  makes  a  pretty  ornament  on  the  out- 
side of  one  of  the  covers. 

ORNAMENTAL  CATCH-ALLS. — A  great  variety  of  pretty 


68  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

catch-alls  can  be  made  to  stand  on  a  writing  or  centre 
table,  to  hold  letters,  or  cards,  or  photographs.  A  few 
suggestions  for  these  will  be  found  below. 

WOODEN  BOWLS.  —  Large  wooden  bowls,  painted  in 
oils,  with  designs  of  reeds,  water  lilies,  and  water,  are 
new  and  striking.  The  inside  of  the  bowls  should  be 
gilded. 

IRON  SKILLETS.  — These  can  also  be  painted.  A  ground 
of  deep  blue  with  a  wreath  of  large  white  daisies  is  very 
effective. 

DISH  DRAINER.  —  Buy,  for  a  quarter  of  a  dollar,  a 
Folding  Dish  Drainer.  They  can  be  found  at  any 
kitchen  furnishing  shop.  If  you  wish  to  keep  the  wood 
light,  merely  varnish  it ;  if  dark,  paint  it  black,  or  gilt 
would  be  pretty.  Into  the  slats  at  the  sides  interlace 
ribbon,  alternating  the  spaces  which  the  ribbon  covers,  as 
in  basket  weaving.  For  this  you  will  need  a  whole  piece 
of  ribbon  one  inch  wide.  A  ribbon  or  strip  of  silk  seven 
inches  wide  can  be  used.  In  this  case  the  effect  produced 
is  of  stripes.  If  the  wide  ribbon  is  used,  you  will  require 
one  yard  and  fifteen  inches.  Pass  the  ribbon  from  one 
side  to  the  other,  leaving  a  length  of  seven  inches  between 
the  two  sides  to  form  the  side  pieces.  These  must  be  laid 
in  plaits  at  the  bottom,  like  the  sides  of  a  pocket-book.  If 
narrow  ribbon  is  used,  the  sides  can  be  made  in  the  same 
way,  by  passing  the  ribbon  from  one  side  to  the  other ; 
or  a  better  way  would  be  to  line  the  whole  thing  with  silk, 
making  the  side  pieces  of  the  material  used  for  lining. 
This  catch-all  is  particularly  adapted  to  holding  photo- 
graphs. By  unlacing,  or  pushing  up  the  lower  row  of 


FOR    THE   LIBRARY.  69 

ribbon,  it  can  be  folded  together,  and  easily  packed  in 
one's  trunk  to  carry  to  the  country  or  seaside  in  summer. 

TAMBOURINES.  —  These  are  mere  trifles  of  the  day,  and 
of  no  particular  use,  except  to  hang  on  to  a  deep  mantel 
valance  at  one  corner,  or  over  the  edge  of  a  screen,  or  to 
hold  a  few  odds  and  ends  on  a  table.  They  have  also  been 
used  at  Christmas  for  putting  bonbons  in,  with  a  net  cov- 
ering to  keep  them  in,  and  a  folded  lace  mat  below.  They 
are  also  pretty  on  a  writing-table  to  hold  letters  ready  for 
the  mail.  The  toy  tambourines  are  the  ones  used,  and  the 
edges  are  not  painted,  but  the  parchment  is  either  on 
both  sides  or  only  on  the  inner  one. 

BATTLEDORES.  —  A  pair  of  small  battledores,  tied  cross- 
ways  with  a  large  bow,  holding  a  wall-basket  with  another 
bow,  and  a  painting  on  each  parchment,  is  one  of  the  last 
novelties,  even  newer  than  the  painted  and  ribboned  tam- 
bourine. 

WASTE-PAPER  BASKETS.  —  Baskets  made  for  this  use 
are  numberless  in  size  and  style,  and  are  decorated  in  a 
variety  of  ways.  One  of  the  simplest  as  well  as  prettiest 
ways  is  to  lace  ribbons  into  the  sides  of  a  four-sided  basket, 
which  is  made  of  rattans,  with  very  little  wicker-work. 
The  ribbons  should  be  of  contrasting  colors  ;  old  gold, 
blue,  and  olive  are  pretty.  They  are  to  be  woven  in  and 
out  of  the  rattans  like  basket-work  ;  ribbon  No.  2  revers- 
ing the  order  of  No.  i,  and  No.  3  going  back  to  that  of 
No.  i,  and  so  on.  Place  a  full  bow  of  loops  and  ends  at 
the  front  of  the  basket. 

DRUMS.  —  Large  drums  made  of  Panama  canvas,  worked 
in  a  handsome  pattern  of  cross-stitch  and  lined  with  col- 


70  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

ored  merino  to  match,  can  be  used  either  as  work-baskets 
or  waste-paper  baskets.  The  largest  sized  round  baking- 
powder  tins  make  an  excellent  foundation  for  these.  A 
round  muff  box  can  also  be  used,  but  it  is  not  as  service- 
able as  the  other. 

WOODEN  PAILS.  —  A  common  wooden  pail  may  be  made 
into  a  useful  and  pretty  waste-paper  basket.  The  inside 
should  be  painted  or  lined  with  some  suitable  material. 
The  outside  can  be  covered  with  cretonne  or  silk  laid  in 
folds,  with  a  torsade  and  bow  of  ribbon  around  the  centre, 
and  the  handle  wound  with  ribbon.  A  frill  of  lace  can  be 
made  to  fall  over  the  outside  at  the  top ;  or,  Turkey  red 
can  be  used  to  cover  the  outside,  and  a  piece  of  macrame 
to  fit  the  pail  can  be  put  over  this.  The  handle  should 
then  be  covered  with  macrame. 

TABLE  CLOTHS  WITH  POCKETS. — These  are  used  to 
cover  a  work  or  writing  table,  and  may  be  made  either  of 
brown  broadcloth,  heavy  flannel,  or  felting,  lined  with  sati- 
nette,  or  cretonne  lined  with  merino.  Each  pocket,  which 
is  made  by  putting  a  straight  strip  of  the  material  lined 
across  the  ends  of  the  cloth,  has  a  grecque  in  brown  braid, 
with  a  row  of  herring-bone  stitches  in  yellow  silk.  The 
initials  of  the  owner  are  worked  in  braid  in  the  centre. 
These  pockets,  which  are  of  French  contrivance,  are  very 
useful. 

PEN-WIPERS.  — These  can  be  made  in  an  almost  endless 
variety  of  designs  —  of  which  we  give  a  few  below,  begin- 
ning with  the  most  simple  ones. 

i.  Cut  from  chamois-skin  four  circles  from  three  to  four 
inches  in  diameter.  Pink  or  notch  the  edges  ;  place 


FOR    THE   LIBRARY.  7 1 

these  evenly  together  and  in  the  centre  cut  two  holes 
through  all  the  leaves.  Pass  a  narrow  ribbon  through  the 
holes  and  fasten  with  a  bow.  On  the  outer  leaf,  draw 
with  pen  and  ink,  or  paint  in  sepia,  some  design.  Bul- 
rushes are  pretty ;  or  you  can  print  some  motto,  such 

as  "Extracts  from  the  pen  of ,"  putting   in  the 

name  of  the  friend  to  whom  it  is  to  be  given.  If  you 
prefer,  the  outside  leaf  or  cover  can  be  made  of  dark 
woollen  material,  finished  on  the  edge  with  a  button-hole 
of  bright  sewing-silk.  In  the  centre  you  can  put  a  little 
mouse  or  frog,  or  any  of  the  small  Japanese  figures  that 
are  to  be  found  at  the  toy  or  variety  stores.  A  small  box 
for  postage  stamps  might  form  a  convenient  centre  orna- 
ment. 

2.  Cut  out  of  flannels  of  contrasting  colors,  four  circles 
from  three  to  four  inches  in  diameter.      Finish  around  the 
edge  as  above,  or  overcast   the  edges  with  beads.     Fold 
each  circle  into  a  right-angled  triangle,  or  a  quarter  of  a 
circle.     Place  the  four  pieces  thus  folded  together,  so  as 
to  form  a  circle  again,  and  fasten  them  at  the  centre  with 
a  button,  or  bow,  or  tassel. 

3.  Put  sixteen  or  more  pieces  together  in  this  way  and 
you  will  have  a  prettier  and  more  useful  pen-wiper.     When 
done  it  will  be  the  shape  of  half  an  orange.     Sew  to  the 
edges  of  these  a  cord  of  bright  colors,  or  tinsel,  and  the 
effect  will  be  charming. 

4.  Small   china  dolls  dressed   in  full  skirts  of  woollen 
material,  with  a  i  ed  riding-hood  drawn  over  the  head,  are 
ornamental  to  a  desk  or  writing-table.     The  skirts  must 
be  stiff  enough,  and   even  enough  around  the  bottom,  to 
enable  the  doll  to  stand  alone. 


72  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

5.  Pen-wipers  are  often  made   in   imitation  of  flowers. 
Dahlias,  pansies,  and  cowslips  are  quite  common.     Below 
are  given  the  directions  for  making  a  tulip  :  — 

Out  of  a  yellow-green  flannel  cut  two  oval  pieces  six 
inches  long  and  four  inches  wide.  Between  these  put  two 
similar  ones  of  chamois  skin.  Notch  all  four  on  the  edges. 
This  makes  the  pen-wiper.  For  the  stem  of  the  tulip,  cut 
a  piece  of  stiff  paper  four  and  one  half  inches  long  and 
one  half  inch  wide.  Make  into  a  roll  and  cover  with  the 
flannel.  For  the  petals  of  the  tulip  cut  out  of  cardinal-red 
flannel  six  pieces  two  inches  long  and  one  and  one  eighth 
inches  wide.  Shape  in  imitation  of  the  flower.  To  do  this, 
cut  from  half  way  up  the  side  to  the  top,  sloping  all  the  way 
and  ending  in  a  point.  Again  cut  from  the  middle  of  the 
petal  down  towards  the  bottom,  sloping  very  slightly,  and 
rounding  the  lower  edge.  Button-hole. these  all  round  with 
silk  to  match.  On  one  end  of  the  stem  sew  three  loops  of 
twisted  yellow  silk  for  the  stamens.  Around  these  sew 
the  red  petals,  lapping  one  over  the  other  at  the  bottom  to 
make  the  cup  shape  of  the  flower.  Sew  this  and  the  stem 
to  the  pen-wiper.  Cut  two  leaves  of  the  flannel  four  and 
one  half  inches  long  and  one  and  one  quarter  inches  wide  in 
widest  part.  Shape  like  the  petals.  Button-hole  around  the 
edges  with  silk  of  their  own  color.  Lay  the  leaves  over  the 
stem  in  such  away  that  the  base  of  the  leaves  shall  lap  over 
each  other,  and  the  tips  of  the  leaves  shall  be  three  inches 
apart.  Fasten  to  the  pen-wiper  at  the  base  of  the  leaves. 

6.  A  crocheted  fez  filled  with  soft  woollen  leaves,  or  a 
tassel  of  black  wool,  is  a  rather  uncommon  design.     For 
directions  see  Tilton's  Art-Needlework. 


FOR    THE  LIBRARY.  73 

7.  SHELL  PEN-WIPERS.  —  Pen-wipers  can  be  made  with 
bivalve  shells  which  have  been  first  well  cleaned  in  sulphuric 
acid  and  water.     Make  a  bunch  of  several  skeins  of  sewing 
silk,  by  twisting  them  several  times  round  the   fingers  ; 
fasten  them  tightly  together  with  a  bit  of   thread,  then 
cover  the  inside  of  the  shell  with  glue,  and  stuff  the  tied 
end  of  the  bunch  of  silk  into  it ;  the  silk  ought  to  project 
about  two  inches.     When  the  glue  is  quite  dry,  cut  the 
ends  of  the  silk  even.     These  shells  look  beautiful  covered 
with  gold  leaf,  or  painted 

first  with  vermilion  oil- 
color,  and  then  with  Bes- 
semer's  gold. 

8.  PEN-WIPER.  —  This 
pen-wiper   is    made  of   a 
strip  of  black  cloth  which 
is   made   into  a  roll,   and 

covered  with  a  strip  of  red  velvet  embroidered  with  old 
gold.     The  handles  are  made  of  leather  as  in  Fig.  28. 

9.  LEAF  PEN-WIPER.  —  Work  a  leaf  in  green  cloth,  with 
the  veins  all  marked  in  lighter  silk,  and  black  pieces  under- 
neath.    Any  shaped  leaf  can  be  taken  ;  a  fern  will  do  even, 
as  the  pinnules  can  be  worked  on  it  to  imitate  the  shape 
tolerably. 

10.  SHAWL  STRAP  PEN-WIPER.  —  Imitate  railway  wraps 
with  a  piece  of  cloth  five  inches  long,  three  inches  broad, 
rolled  round  wool  or  other  pieces  of  cloth  for  wiping  the 
pens  upon,  and  fastened  with  a  shawl  strap. 

11.  FLAT  PEN-WIPER.  —  Cut  five  pieces  of  felting  the 
size  of  a  playing  card,  of  different  colors,  black,  yellow,  red, 


74  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

blue,  and  white.  The  upper  one  should  be  white.  On  this 
put  seven  hearts  cut  out  of  red  felt,  to  imitate  a  playing 
card,  the  seven  of  hearts,  or  any  other  number  desired. 
Fasten  the  lower  pieces  together  with  wire,  and  gum  on 
the  upper  piece. 

SUGGESTIONS  FOR  OTHER  PEN-WIPERS.  —  Velvet  butter- 
flies embroidered  in  silk.  Flags,  the  red,  white,  and  blue 
parts  worked  in  knitted  stripes.  Umbrellas,  made  of 
merino  lined  with  black  silk,  arranged  in  shape  round  a 
straight  twig  ;  paint  a  little  brown  piece  at  the  end  of  the 
stick.  One  resembling  a  gentleman's  stick  can  easily  be 
formed. 

PAPER-WEIGHTS.  —  Choose  a  good-shaped  stone  (one  off 
the  beach  is  the  best),  and  wash  it  quite  clean.  Ordinary 
water  colors  can  be  used,  but  a  good  deal  of  Chinese  white 
must  be  mixed  with  them,  as  it  is  necessary  to  give  the 
whole  effect  at  once,  and  not  with  several  washes.  Begin 
by  covering  one  side  thickly,  with  Chinese  white ;  then 
sketch  your  design,  and  paint  it,  after  which  it  requires 
varnishing.  Let  the  painting  be  thoroughly  dry,  and  first 
varnish  the  back,  then  when  dry  the  right  side.  Copal 
varnish  is  the  best  to  use. 

ANOTHER  PAPER-WEIGHT.  —  Paper  weights  are  also 
sometimes  made  of  a  common  brick  tile  covered  with 
plush  or  satin,  painted  or  embroidered,  with  a  bow  of  the 
ribbon  placed  at  one  corner.  Or,  instead  of  any  other 
decoration,  some  choice  little  porcelain  figure  or  one  of  the 
many  grotesque  Japanese  images  can  be  fastened  to  the 
centre.  An  inkstand  used  for  the  centre  ornament  also 
makes  a  convenient  combination. 


CHAPTER   VII. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

LAMP  SHADES. —  These  can  be  made  in  great  variety, 
and  are  a  pretty  ornament  for  a  parlor  or  dining-room. 
Large  ones,  resembling  parasols,  composed  of  frayed  ruch- 
ings  of  one  or  several  colored  silks,  edged  with  a  fall  of 
rather  wide  lace,  are  very  handsome.  The  Japanese  paper 
parasols,  with  a  hole  cut  round  the  top  of  the  framework 
of  sticks,  occasionally  form  the  foundation,  but  more  usu- 
ally a  wire  frame  is  worked  upon.  Red  silk  is  most  popu- 
lar, but  pink  is  nearly  as  much  so,  and  both  throw  a  soft, 
becoming  shade  on  surrounding  objects.  Feather  butter- 
flies, or  humming  birds  mounted  on  quivering  wire,  can  be 
used  for  decoration.  The  frames  can  be  purchased  at 
some  of  the  best  lamp  shops.  They  are  to  be  had  round, 
five-sided,  or  parasol-shaped.  Sometimes  they  are  covered 
with  soft  silk  cut  on  the  cross,  frayed  at  each  edge,  and 
ruched  closely  together.  Sometimes  the  silk  is  plaited 
top  and  bottom,  bordered  with  lace  and  tied  round  with 
ribbon.  A  length  of  red  ribbon,  tolerably  broad,  tied  in  a 
large  bow,  with  the  ends  spread  out  butterfly  fashion 
towards  the  room,  forms  a  pleasant  shade,  and  has  a  good 
effect.  This  bow  is  tied  round  the  neck  of  the  white 
opaque  glass  shades.  The  lace  covers  of  parasols,  long 

75 


?  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

laid  by  as  being  too  small  for  present  day  use,  are  now 
converted  into  lamp  shades  over  colored  silk  or  paper,  with 
silk  ball  pompons  looping  up  the  divisions.  Even  a  lace 
berthe  can  be  utilized  in  this  manner  by  being  laid  round 
a  silk  covered  shade,  with  a  full  ruche  round  the  top  and 
round  the  edge,  a  bow  on  one  side  joining  the  ends. 
Etchings  on  oiled  paper  make  pretty  lamp  shades,  as  well 
as  dried  ferns,  grasses,  and  bright  leaves,  put  between  two 
thicknesses  of  oiled  paper. 

SUN-FLOWER  LAMP  SHADE.  —  A  shade  in  imitation  of 
a  sun-flower  is  especially  pretty.  To  make  this,  you  will 
require  one  sheet  of  tissue  paper  of  a  darker  and  one  of  a 
lighter  shade  of  yellow,  and  one  of  dark  brown.  Out  of 
the  yellow,  cut  four  circles,  alternating  the  two  shades  of 
yellow,  beginning  with  the  darkest.  Cut  this  one,  eight 
inches  in  diameter,  and  each  of  the  others  one  inch  smaller 
than  the  last.  The  edges  of  all  four,  must  then  be  cut 
into  pointed  scallops  one  inch  deep.  Each  one  of  these 
scallops  must  be  folded  lengthwise  through  the  middle 
and  crimped  on  the  edges  with  a  knife.  Lay  these  circles 
one  over  the  other  according  to  their  sizes,  and  tack  to- 
gether in  the  middle.  You  now  have  made  the  petals  of 
your  flower.  For  the  centre,  cut  a  thin  card  into  a  circle 
three  inches  in  diameter.  Cut  from  the  brown  tissue 
paper,  long  strips  one  inch  wide,  and  double  them  through 
the  middle.  Cut  these  folded  strips  into  a  fringe,  begin- 
ning at  the  doubled  edge  and  cutting  to  within  one  quarter 
of  an  inch  of  the  other  edge,  and  sew  them  in  rows,  round 
and  round,  on  the  cardboard,  until  it  is  completely  cov- 
ered. Secure  this  firmly  in  the  centre  of  the  petals.  To 


MISCELLANEO  US. 


77 


hang  the  sun-flower  on  a  lamp  or  gas  shade,  cover  a  bonnet 
wire  six  or  eight  inches  long,  with  tissue  paper.     Fasten 


it  to  the  sun-flower  at  one  end,  and  at  the  other  bend  it  into 
a  hook,  with  which  to  hook  it  to  the  side  of  the  shade. 

LAMP  SHADE  OF    SILK   AND    LACE. — The  lampshade 
shown  in  the  illustration  Fig.  29,  is  made  of  red  silk  and 


78  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

white  lace  over  a  wire  frame.  This  will  require  of  the 
silk,  a  piece  one  yard  long  and  nine  inches  deep,  to  be  scol- 
loped on  each  edge.  The  lace  should  be  of  the  same 
length,  and  eight  inches  deep.  Put  on  as  in  illustration, 
with  loops  of  ribbon.  The  second  ruffle  around  the  top  is 
made  of  plain  tulle. 

PHOTOGRAPH  FAN.  —  Cut  out  the  shape  of  each  section 
of  a  fan  in  moderately  thick  cardboard  ;  there  are  twenty- 
four,  therefore  forty-eight  must  be  cut  out,  as,  when  each 
side  is  done,  the  blank  sections  must  be  gummed  together. 
Select  the  larger  photographs  for  the  top,  and  the  smaller 
ones  to  go  on  as  it  gets  narrower.  Col  forte,  a  preparation 
sold  by  most  stationers,  is  a  very  good  solution  to  use,  as 
it  puts  them  on  without  wrinkles.  They  ought  to  be 
taken  off  the  cards.  Varnish  each  slip,  and  string  them 
together  as  a  real  fan  is  done.  Remember,  in  arranging 
the  photographs,  that  a  space  must  be  left  for  the  cut : 
and  let  the  cut  (where  the  ribbon  passes  through)  be  in 
some  portion  of  the  dress  or  furniture,  and  not  in  any  part 
of  the  face  or  figure,  which  would  spoil  the  general  effect. 

PALM  LEAF  FANS.  —  The  palm  leaf  fans  that  are  painted 
on  one  side  and  have  a  natural  spray  of  flowers  on  the 
other,  have  now  a  small  pocket  placed  near  the  handle, 
behind  the  bow,  for  holding  the  lace  handkerchief. 

TOILET  Box. — Take,  with  the  lid  on,  a  cigar  box  twelve 
inches  long  and  six  inches  wide.  Cover  the  inside  neatly 
with  watered  paper  of  some  delicate  color.  Around  the 
outside  of  the  box  put  a  strip  of  cambric  or  silk  of  the 
same  color,  but  of  a  darker  shade.  Over  this  gather  on  a 
frill  of  white  dotted  muslin  hemmed,  or  trimmed  on  the 


MISCELLANEOUS.  79 

lower  edge  with  a  narrow  lace.  Make  a  pin-cushion  on  a 
piece  of  cardboard  cut  to  fit  the  lid  of  the  box.  This  can 
be  stuffed  either  with  wool  wadding,  or  with  bits  of  flannel 
cut  into  very  fine  chips.  Cover  this  first  with  the  cambric 
or  silk,  and  then  with  the  dotted  muslin,  and  glue  firmly 
to  the  top  of  the  lid.  Finish  around  the  edge  with  a  nar- 
row frill  of  the  muslin,  trimmed  with  lace  on  both  edges 
and  gathered  through  the  middle.  Put  a  loop  of  narrow 
ribbon  on  the  centre  of  the  front  edge  of  the  lid  to  lift  it 
by,  and  straps  at  the  sides,  fastened  to  both  the  box  and 
the  lid,  to  prevent  the  latter  from  opening  too  far. 

BRUSH  AND  COMB  BASKET  No.  I.  — A  convenient  recep- 
tacle for  toilet  apparatus  can  be  made  from  a  basket,  meas- 
uring twelve  inches  in  length  and  six  and  one  half  inches 
in  width,  with  wicker  work  pockets  at  each  end.  The 
body  of  the  basket  holds  the  brushes  and  combs,  and  the 
pockets  hold  hair-pins,  scissors,  and  all  the  small  articles. 
A  napkin  to  fit  the  bottom  of  the  basket  should  be  made 
of  linen,  fringed  on  all  four  sides,  and  ornamented  with 
herring-bone  in  red  cotton.  A  monogram  can  be  worked 
in  the  centre.  A  larger  napkin  of  the  same  material  and 
style  of  decoration  should  be  made  to-  throw  over  the 
basket  when  not  in  use.  A  pretty  design  for  this  would 
be  a  brush  and  comb  worked  in  outline. 

BRUSH  AND  COMB  BASKET  No.  2.  —  Or,  if  you  prefer, 
you  can  use  a  knife  basket,  first  removing  the  partition  in 
the  middle.  Line  with  Turkey  red.  Or,  work  a  napkin 
as  in  No.  I,  and  tie  into  the  bottom  with  ribbons  passed 
through  the  interstices  of  the  basket.  In  this  case  the 
napkin  should  be  large  enough  to  cover  the  sides  of  the 


8O  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

basket  as  well  as  the  bottom,  and  be  made  to  fit  by  laying 
it  in  folds.  After  once  giving  a  basket  of  this  description 
to  a  friend,  you  can  make  a  series  of  presents,  as  occasion 
offers,  by  working  new  napkins  of  different  designs  and 
fas-hions. 

HAIR-PIN  CUSHION.  —  A  pretty  cushion  for  hair-pins 
can  be  made  out  of  a  doll's  straw  chair.  The  seat  is  cush- 
ioned with  wool  wadding,  which  is  covered  with  a  piece  of 
bright  colored  worsted  loop  knitting,  as  described  in  Til- 
ton's  Knitting.  Ornament  the  back  of  the  chair  with  a 

small  ribbon  bow. 
The  hair-pins  are 
run  into  the  cush- 
ion horizontally. 

ANOTHER  HAIR- 
PIN CUSHION.  — 
Take  an  oval  box 
about  two  inches 

FIG.  30. 

high  ;  fill  it  with  a 

stuffing  of  hair,  or  wool  put  in  very  lightly,  so  that  the  hair- 
pins will  run  into  it  easily.  Cover  this  with  a  piece  of 
plain,  loose  knitting,  as  in  Fig.  30.  Around  the  side  put 
a  ruffle  of  plaited  ribbon  two  and  one  quarter  inches  wide. 
Over  this  put  a  row  of  scallops  in  mignardise,  made  with 
crochet  needle  without  thread,  as  described  in  Tilton's 
Crochet,  and  finish  with  a  ruching  of  satin  ribbon  one  inch 
wide. 

CLOTHES-BRUSH  CASE.  —  This  case  requires  a  piece  of 
stiff  pasteboard  twelve  inches  high  and  eight  inches  wide, 
and  shaped  as  in  Fig.  31.  Cover  on  the  outside  with  Java 


MISCELLANEOUS.  O I 

canvas,  decorated  as  you  choose.  Line  the  back  with 
cambric.  For  the  pockets,  cut  from  the  Java  canvas  a 
piece  six  inches  high  and  thirteen  inches  wide.  Line  with 
cambric  and  lay  in  plaits  at  the  bottom  and  sew  firmly. 
Divide  this  pocket  in  the  middle  by  sewing  to  the  back. 
Finish,  as  in  the  illustration,  with  a  ruche  of  plaited  rib- 
bon and  bows,  and  fasten 
a  loop  to  the  back  to  hang 
it  up  by. 

BATH  BLANKETS. — 
These  are  used  to  put  un- 
der a  sitz  bath-tub,  or  by 
the  side  of  a  set  bath-tub, 
and  will  be  found  useful 
and  comfortable.  A  fine 
blanket,  either  gray  or 
white,  is  the  best  material 
for  these,  button-holed  at 
the  edge,  and  worked  with 
a  large  monogram  or  crest 
in  one  corner,  a  bunch  of 
flowers  in  the  others.  The 
newest  idea  is  to  work  one  edge  only  as  though  the  flowers 
were  growing  there,  and  this  portion  is  placed  immediately 
in  front  of  the  bath.  Sometimes  they  are  bound  with  braid. 
Cross-stich  patterns  in  red,  as  a  border  all  round,  are  good 
for  the  purpose.  Use  coarse  double  crewels  or  petticoat 
yarn  ;  tack  on  the  canvas,  of  which  pull  the  threads  away 
when  the  work  is  accomplished.  Brown  blankets  look  well 
with  an  applique  of  various  colored  cloths  made  to  resem- 


82  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

ble  an  oriental  pattern  as  much  as  possible.  Bulrushes, 
with  a  few  outlined  leaves  and  grass,  make  a  particularly 
pretty  design,  and  it  is  also  an  easy  one  to  work.  Pieces 
of  old  blankets  can  be  made  useful  and  ornamental,  worked 
in  any  tasteful  designs. 

CARRIAGE  BLANKETS.  —  A  heavy  blanket  should  be 
made  of  broadcloth  or  thick  flannel  or  felting,  and  lined 
with  eider-down  cloth.  The  dimensions  are  one  and  one 
half  yards  by  two  yards.  A  plain  brown  or  dark  green,  with 
a  monogram  worked  in  the  centre,  would  be  handsome 
and  in  good  taste.  Line  with  a  plain,  bright  color,  or  gay 
stripe,  and  bind  the  edges  of  the  outside  and  lining  to- 
gether, with  worsted  braid  the  color  of  the  outside.  A 
pretty  border  can  be  made  by  putting  around  the  four  sides 
a  strip  of  woollen  material  of  the  same  color  as  the 
blanket,  but  two  or  three  shades  lighter.  This  strip 
should  be  three  inches  wide,  and  cut  into  points.  Fasten 
these  down  to  the  outside  by  a  row  of  chain-stitching,  or 
herring-bone,  in  silk  of  the  same  color  as  the  monogram. 
For  a  light  summer  rug,  a  striped  linen  should  be  used, 
and  ornamented  at  intervals  between  the  stripes,  with 
sprays  worked  in  outline  in  crewels. 

BABY -CARRIAGE  BLANKETS.  —  Baby-carriage  blankets 
made  of  old  gold  sateen,  with  a  border  worked  in  large  cross- 
stitch  in  black  silk,  and  a  good-sized  monogram  in  the  left- 
hand  lower  corner,  look  well ;  also  in  brown  holland,  for 
everyday  summer  use,  with  a  running  pattern  of  ivy  leaves 
and  berries  embroidered  in  crewel  stitch  in  navy  blue  or 
red  ingrained  thread. 

PAINTED  BASSINETTE  COVERS  are  fashionable  now.     In 


MISCELLANEOUS.  «3 

white  satin,  with  ecru  lace  flouncing,  and  a  large  spray  of 
yellow  jessamine  and  leaves,  wild  roses,  and  butterflies,  or 
almond  blossom,  nothing  could  be  lovelier ;  also  in  pale 
gray,  with  a  border  of 
daisies,  and  the  mono- 
gram or  baby's  name  in 
small  single  daisies  close 
together.  Quilted  satin, 
with  a  single  daisy  or  a 
pearl  in  each  quilt,  where 
the  button  usually  is,  is 
novel.  The  lining  is 
sarsenet. 

No.  7.  FRENCH  PURSE. 
—  There  are  some  occa- 
sions in  life  when  a  very 
elegant  purse  is  required, 
and  in  France  there  are 
purses  made  specially  for 
weddings,  collections  at 
church,  fetes,  etc.  The 
one  here  illustrated  in 
Fig.  32  is  an  example. 
It  is  made  entirely  of 
opaque  white  beads,  and 

is  lined  with  white  satin.  The  purse  can  be  made  of 
fine  canvas  covered  with  the  beads,  and  a  clasp  obtained 
at  any  of  the  fancy  goods  stores,  or  an  old  purse  could  be 
used  for  the  foundation. 

CROCHETED  PURSE. — Fig.  33  is  made  of   red  knitting 


84  THREE   HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

silk,  and   done   in   open-work  crochet.     Make  a  chain  of 

ninety-six  stitches,  and  join  with  one  s.  c.  Continue  with 
rows  of  one  1.  c.,  one  chain,  round 
and  round,  bringing  the  1.  c.  stitches 
of  each  row  alternate  with  those  of 
the  last.  Work  round  and  round 
for  twenty-six  rows,  but  decrease  in 
the  last  ten  rows  passing  over  two 
1.  c.'s  always  instead  of  one,  until 
only  eight  stitches  are  left.  Draw 
these  together  and  finish  with  an 
acorn  or  a  tassel.  Finish  off  the  top 
by  working  three  rows  back  and  for- 
ward on  each  side  in  half  of  the 
foundation  stitches,  taking  up  the 
upper  chain  of  each  stitch,  each 
time,  and  in  the  last  row  work  over 

the  rods,  as  described  in  Tilton's  Crochet,  in  the  following 

way :  *  seven  chain,  passing  over 

two  long  stitches  ;  placing  the 

rod  at  the  back,  carry  the  chain 

over  the  rod  ;  make  one  s.  c.,  to 

the    next    chain,    seven    chain, 

pass  over  the  rod  from  the  front, 

passing  over  two  long  stitches, 

one  s.  c.     Repeat  from  *. 

LEATHER    PURSE.  —  This    is 

made  of    soft  brown   Marseilles 

leather,    bound    with   a   lighter 

color,  and  embroidered   at  one  Fi(;  34 


MISCELLANEOUS.  85 

end,  with  a  monogram.  Finish  with  bronze  rings,  with 
bronze  balls,  or  charms  in  the  shape  of  pigs  at  the  ends, 
as  in  Fig.  34. 

BALLS.  —  Useful  for  using  up  skeins  of  wool  left  from 
single  Berlin  work  and  made  either  with  knitting  or  upon 
card.  In  knitting  use  three,  six,  or  nine  colors,  as  eighteen 
sections  make  up  the  ball,  and  the  colors  are  repeated. 
Cast  on  thirty-nine  stitches  and  work  in  the  broiche  stitch  ; 
knit  one  row,  and  for  the  second  row  knit  all  but  three 
stitches,  leaving  these  on  the  needle  and  putting  in  a  white 
thread  where  left  as  a  marker.  Turn  the  work  and  knit 
back  until  the  three  end  stitches  on  that  row  are  reached; 
leave  these  unknit  and  mark  as  in  second  row  ;  continue  to 
knit  leaving  each  row  with  three  stitches  unknit  on  the 
needle,  and  carrying  the  marking  thread  along  until  the 
two  threads  come  within  three  stitches  of  each  other  in 
the  centre,  and  seven  distinct  ridges  appear  on  each  nee- 
dle. Turn  and  knit  all  the  stitches  up,  putting  in  a  new 
color  for  last  stitch ;  continue  until  the  eighteen  sections 
are  made,  then  cast  off,  draw  up  one  end  of  the  ball  and 
sew  up  side  ;  stuff  with  shreds  of  wool,  and  sew  up  the  last 
end.  Larger  balls  may  be  made  by  increasing  the  number 
of  stitches  cast  on,  taking  care  that  they  divide  by  three ; 
or  smaller  ones  by  decreasing. 

When  made  of  skeins  of  wool,  cut  two  circles  of  card- 
board with  a  hole  in  the  centre.  For  a  ball  four  inches  in 
diameter  the  cardboard  should  be  six  inches  round,  and 
centre  hole  one  and  one  half  inches  ;  for  a  three  inch 
ball,  the  cardboard  should  be  five  inches  round  and  the 
hole  in  the  centre  one  and  one  quarter  inches.  Place  the 


86  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

two  cardboards  together,  and  wind  your  wool  tightly  round 
them  until  the  centre  hole  is  filled  up ;  then  cut  the  wool 
at  the  outer  edge  with  sharp  and  large  scissors,  and  pass  a 
piece  of  fine  but  strong  twine  between  the  two  cardboards, 
knotting  it  strongly;  then  cut  the  cardboard  away  and 
snip  the  wool  with  scissors  until  it  is  fluffy  and  the  ball 
quite  circular  in  shape. 

CHILD'S  CROCHET  BALL.  —  Take  a  large  ball  of  yarn  or 
a  very  thin  rubber  one.  Begin  the  cover  of  worsted  by 
making  a  chain  of  four  stitches  joined  to  a  circle,  and 
work  in  double  stitches,  as  in  Fig.  35, 
increasing  at  regular  intervals  till  the 
work  is  large  enough  to  cover  one 
half  the  ball ;  then  work  a  few  rows 
without  increase.  Draw  the  cover 
over  the  ball,  letting  the  wrong  side 
of  the  work  be  outside,  and  work  the 
other  half  to  correspond  with  the  first 

half,  decreasing  at  regular  intervals,  and  putting  the  needle 
in  from  the  inside.  A  pattern  of  bright  flowers  worked 
with  worsted  round  the  centre  adds  greatly  to  the  ball's 
attractions  to  a  child. 

SCRAP-BOOKS. — These  make  a  very  nice  present  for 
young  children,  and.  the  pictures  are  readily  collected  from 
illustrated  papers  and  magazines  and  advertisements. 
Colored  pictures  from  the  outside  of  vegetable  cans  are 
easily  removed  by  soaking  in  tepid  water,  and  when  neatly 
cut  out  are  a  valuable  addition  to  one's  collection.  One 
can  often  get  really  beautiful  colored  pictures  from  whole 
pieces  of  cotton  or  linen.  Any  merchant  who  knows  you 


MISCELLANEOUS.  8/ 

will  be  glad  to  save  them  for  you.  These  books  are  gen- 
erally made  of  holland  or  linen  ;  if  the  latter,  generally  of 
several  colored  linens,  forty-six  inches  long,  folded  in  the 
centre.  Eight  or  twelve  pages  are  required,  and  they  look 
best  bound  either  with  braid  or  with  cross-cut  pieces  of 
linen  of  a  different  color  to  the  page,  which  makes  them 
very  strong.  Starch,  very  little  boiled,  is  the  best  paste 
for  sticking  on  the  pictures.  As  soon  as  they  are  pasted, 
lay  a  piece  of  paper  over  them,  and  iron  with  a  moderately 
warm  iron  on  both  sides.  The  cover  should  be  of  double 
holland  ornamented  with  borderings.  If  the  book  is  for 
a  very  young  child,  who  sits  on  the  floor  with  its  play- 
things, you  will  find  it  well  to  put  your  pictures  on  a  strip 
of  linen  bound  with  colored  braid,  rolled  up  and  tied  round 
with  the  same.  These  rolled  books  are  capital,  as  they 
can  be  put  down  on  the  floor,  unrolled,  for  a  child  to  crawl 
about  looking  at  the  pictures.  They  can  be  of  various 
lengths,  but  not  wider  than  nine  or  ten  inches.  The  pic- 
tures can  be  on  one  side,  or  on  both  ;  if  on  both,  it  is  best 
to  make  a  cover,  just  attaching  it  ^o  one  end,  and  cutting 
out  the  edges  in  small  points. 

FELT  TABLE-MATS. — A  set  of  simple  mats  can  be 
made  of  pieces  of  felting  of  different  colors.  Cut  them 
either  round,  oval,  or  hexagon  ;  each  one,  in  a  set  of  three 
or  five,  an  inch  smaller  than  the  last ;  and  pink  the  edge 
with  a  pinking  iron. 

PERFORATED  PAPER  MATS.  —  The  following  directions 
contain  a  valuable  suggestion  for  occupation  for  very  young 
children.  The  picking  out  of  the  patterns  will  be  found 
very  entertaining.  Paper  mats  with  perforated  edges  are 


88  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

a  good  substitute  for  the  ordinary  damask  cloth.  These 
will  be  found  serviceable  for  carving  napkins,  as  well  as 
for  fish  napkins,  and  the  design  can  be  suited  to  the  use 
for  which  it  is  intended.  For  a  fish  napkin,  cut  ouc  an 
oval  piece  of  thick  cartridge  paper  the  size  required ;  draw 
all  round  it,  at  equal  distances,  dolphins,  or  any  other  sea 
fish ;  now  place  the  mat  on  a  cushion,  and  carefully  prick 
out  all  the  pencil  lines  with  a  large  pin ;  then  with  a  small 
needle  prick  out  the  scales,  fins,  gills,  etc.,  using  a  very 
large  needle  for  the  eye.  An  easier  way  to  draw  the  de- 
sign round  the  edge  is  to  cut  out  a  paper  pattern  of  the 
fish,  and  lay  it  on  the  mat  to  trace  by.  The  right  side 
of  the  fish  mat  is  that  on  which  you  have  not  drawn  your 
pattern.  Papers  for  dessert  dishes  can  be  made  in  the 
same  way,  drawing  on  them  and  pricking  out  flowers, 
fruit,  or  conventional  patterns  instead  of  fish. 

MELON  SEED  NECKLACE.  —  Dried  melon  seeds,  threaded 
through  with  a  needle  and  stout  thread,  two  and  two,  with 
small  gold  beads  every  now  and  then,  make  pretty  neck- 
laces, in  one  or  two  rows.  The  amusement  of  threading 
and  collecting  is  great  to  a  child,  boy  or  girl  alike. 

DOLLS.  —  There  are  few  presents  so  attractive  to  young 
girls,  and,  indeed,  sometimes  to  small  boys,  as  a  well-dressed 
doll.  It  will  hardly  be  necessary  for  us  to  make  sugges- 
tions with  regard  to  the  ordinary  costumes  for  dolls. 
Every  one  is  familiar  with  dolls  dressed  as  babies  in  long 
clothes,  or  as  girls  and  boys,  or  as  papas  and  mammas. 
But  a  few  hints  for  fancy  costumes  may  not  come  amiss. 

i.  A  full  dress  society  lady,  in  a  cream  muslin  skirt 
covered  by  three  rows  of  cream  lace  as  flounces  ;  panniers 


MISCELLANEOUS.  09 

and  low  bodice  of  pale  blue  or  rich  red  satin  ;  string  of 
pearls  round  the  throat  and  wrists,  pearls  twisted  in  the 
curled  scalpette,  or  a  rosette  of  red  narrow  ribbon  on  one 
side  ;  a  fan  on  the  arm,  suspended  by  a  ribbon. 

2.  Little  Red  Riding  Hood,  in  a  blue  print  frock,  white 
pinafore,  red  cloak,  with   the  hood  over  her  head,  and  a 
basket  on  her  arm. 

3.  A  sailor  boy  or  girl,  in  dark  blue  serge  and  white 
braid. 

4.  A  charity  girl ;  a  dark  blue  stuff  dress,  short  sleeves 
turned  up  with  a  band  of  white  linen  ;  apron,  kerchief  of 
white  muslin  ;  a  high  cap,  with  blue  ribbon  tied  round. 
The  long    mittens,  of  pale  yellow  or  white,  can  be  made 
from  a  stocking. 

5.  A  Red  Cross  nurse;  black  merino  gown,  white  bibbed 
apron,  cuffs,  collar,  and  neat  cap  :  the  red  cross  on  one 
arm. 

6.  An  Alsatian  nurse.     She  wears  a  full  red  skirt,  large 
black  apron,  black  velvet  bodice,  and  white  chemisette, 
black  velvet  cap,  with  large  silk  bow  in  front. 

7.  A  lady  in   Pompadour  costume.     This  would  be  a 
low  bodice,  elbow  sleeves,  train,  and  distinct  front  breadth, 
trimmed  with  lace,  in  silk  or  satin  of  two  colors. 

8.  Old  women  seated  in  chairs,  their  cloaks  and  laps 
being  made  receptacles  for  spools  of  thread,  thimbles,  and 
scissors. 

9.  BABY  DOLLS,  dressed  so  that  the  robe  will  form  a  bag, 
are  pretty,  and  useful  to  hold  needlework  or  handkerchief. 
Take  a  doll  six  inches  long,  sew  a  dress  bodice  and  sleeves 
to  it  of  white  cambric,  trimming  it  with  a  little  lace  and 


go  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

narrow  ribbon.  Put  knickerbockers  and  one  petticoat  on, 
sewing  them  round  the  waist.  Cut  a  piece  of  colored 
cambric  twenty-four  inches  long  and  eight  inches  wide  ; 
cover  it  with  white  muslin,  double  it  together,  and  stitch 
up  each  side,  making  a  bag  twelve  inches  long ;  put  a  nar- 
row hem  round  the  top,  and  run  in  two  strings  of  strong 
bobbin,  bringing  them  out  on  each  side  of  the  seams. 
Turn  it  muslin  outside,  and  trim  with  some  lace  and 
ribbon  to  match  the  body,  and  to  imitate  a  baby's  long 
robe.  Now  pull  the  strings  tight  enough,  so  that  the 
opening  of  the  bag  will  just  fit  round  the  doll's  waist,  the 
feet  and  legs  inside  it.  Fasten  with  a  strong  needle  and 
thread  the  front  half  of  the  bag  to  the  doll,  stitching  close 
to  the  hem,  but  not  through  it,  so  as  to  avoid  interfering 
with  the  drawing  of  the  strings.  A  cap  made  of  lace, 
either  fastened  on  with  needle  and  thread  or  gum,  is  a 
great  improvement.  Any  sized  doll,  of  course,  can  be 
used,  making  the  robe  in  proportion  to  the  size. 

BABY  HOUSE. — With  ingenuity  and  taste  a  charming 
baby  house  can  be  made,  without  expense,  of  four  small 
wooden  packing-boxes.  Remove  the  covers  and  nail  the 
boxes  together  so  as  to  make  a  house  of  four  rooms, —  a 
parlor  and  dining-room  on  the  lower  floor,  and  two  bed- 
rooms above.  Paper  them  on  the  outside  with  wall  paper 
grained  in  imitation  of  oak.  Paper  and  carpet  each 
room  in  keeping  with  the  use  for  which  it  is  intended,  and 
then  put  in  the  necessary  furniture.  Very  pretty  parlor, 
dining-room,  and  chamber  sets  in  boxes,  can  be  bought 
reasonably  at  the  toy  shops.  If  the  house  is  to  be  inhab- 
ited by  paper  dolls,  paper  furniture  would  be  substantial 


MISCELLANEOUS.  9 1 

enough  for  their  use.     This  costs  almost  nothing  excepting 
the  time  it  takes  to  put  it  together. 

CHILDREN'S  PLAY  REINS.  —  For  children's  play  reins, 
cast  on  a  pair  of  bone  knitting  needles,  twenty  stitches  in 
double  zephyr,  and  knit  in  plain  knitting  a  stripe  ten 
inches  in  length,  always  slipping  the  first  stitch  of  every 
row  ;  cast  off.  To  each  end  of  these  stripes  is  attached  a 
circle  for  the  arms,  made  thus  :  Take  a  piece  of  cord,  such 
as  one  hangs  pictures  with,  make  a  circle  the  size  of  the 
upper  part  of  the  child's  arm,  and  tightly  sew  the  ends,  let- 
ting them  lap  over  to  firmly  secure  them.  Now  cover  the 
cord  with  wadding,  or,  better  still,  any  list  you  may  have 
off  the  flannel,  so  that  they  may  not  cut  the  child ;  then  cover 
them  with  a  stripe  of  knitting,  casting  on  eight  stitches  and 
knitting  the  length  required,  plain  every  row ;  sew  it  on, 
overcast  on  the  inner  side. 

Before  attaching  the  stripe  first  knitted  to  the  armholes, 
there  ought  to  be  sewed  upon  it  some  name,  such  as  Her- 
cules, Fairy,  etc.,  and  to  the  under  edge  should  be  fastened 
three  or  four  little  bells  ;  and  when  fastening  the  shape 
for  the  chest  to  the  armholes  do  not  let  the  sewing  be 
seen,  but  overcast  on  the  inner  side  to  the  overcasting  on 
the  armholes. 

Cast  on  eight  stitches  and  knit  in  plain  knitting  a  rein 
the  length  required  — about  two  and  one  half  yards  will  be 
sufficient,  as  it  stretches  when  used.  Attach  the  ends  to 
the  armholes  at  the  back,  sewing  to  the  overcasting ;  then 
finish  by  knitting  a  stripe  twenty  stitches  in  breadth  and 
ten  inches  in  length,  the  ends  of  which  sew  to  the  armholes 
at  the  back  at  the  same  place  on  the  reins. 


92  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

Music  PORTFOLIO.  —  This  portfolio,  intended  to  carry 
unbound  sheets  of  music,  is  made  of  navy  blue  cloth  em- 
broidered in  colored  silks.  The  embroidery  is  repeated 
on  the  other  side,  see  Fig.  36.  The  dimensions  of  the 
portfolio  are  fifteen  inches  by  twelve  inches,  and  it  should 
be  lined  with  farmer's  satin  or  some  other  firm  material. 
The  handles  and  straps  can  be  made  of  leather  and  sewed 
on,  as  in  the  illustration,  or  a  delicate  shawl-strap  can  be 
used  instead. 


FIG.  36. 

POT-POURRI.  —  Spread  the  rose-leaves  thinly  on  paper 
to  dry;  turn  them  every  day;  and,  when  nearly  dry,  put 
them  into  a  tasteful  jar  with  bay-salt  and  a  packet  of  spices, 
which  can  be  procured  for  the  purpose  from  any  good 
chemist.  Moss  and  cabbage  roses  are  the  most  suitable  for 
pot-pourri,  and  they  ought  to  be  gathered  on  a  dry  and 
sunny  summer's  day,  as  in  Fig.  37. 

ANOTHER  POT-POURRI.  —  When  the  roses  fade,  spread 
the  leaves  to  dry,  taking  away  those  which  are  decayed  or 


MISCELLANEO  US. 


93 


discolored  ;  then,  in  a  jar,  place  alternate  layers  of  rose 
leaves,  lavender,  scented  marjoram,  lemon  plant,  or  any 
perfumed  plant,  sprinkling  each  layer  with  crushed  bay- 
salt,  and  pressing  down  very  tightly.  In  the  autumn,  when 
there  is  nothing  more  to  add,  strain  away  any  moisture, 
turn  all  out,  and  mix  well ;  keep  in  a  wide-mouthed  jar 
with  a  lid,  and  during  the  winter  sprinkle  occasionally  with 
eau  de  Cologne  or  other  perfume  ;  and  when  wishing  to 
scent  the  room,  take 
off  the  lid. 

Or  one  pound  of 
bay-salt,  two  ounces 
of  saltpetre,  both  in 
the  finest  powder, 
a  handful  of  sweet 
bay -leaves  cut  as 
small  as  possible ; 
the  same  of  myrtle 
leaves,  rosemary, 
lavender  leaves,  and 
lemon  thyme  in 
flower,  the  rinds  of 

four  lemons  cut  as  fine  as  possible,  half  an  ounce  of  cinna- 
mon, half  an  ounce  cloves,  half  an  ounce  allspice,  a  large 
nutmeg  in  the  finest  powder,  one  ounce  of  storax,  one 
ounce  of  bergamot,  one  ounce  spirit  of  lavender,  one  ounce 
essence  of  lemon,  one  drachm  of  musk,  six  ounces  pow- 
dered orris  root.  Put  all  these  ingredients  into  a  jar  with 
a  lid  that  shuts  very  close,  then  add  the  following  flowers 
as  you  gather  them  :  Three  handfuls  of  orange  flowers, 


94  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

three  of  clove-pinks,  two  of  rosemary,  two  of  lavender 
flowers,  two  of  jessamine,  six  of  rose-leaves,  and  leaves  of 
aloysia  citriodora.  Stir  it  each  time  fresh  flowers  are  add- 
ed. Gather  four  rosebuds  early  in  the  morning,  and  put 
them  at  once  into  your  jar.  Do  not  leave  any  two  leaves 
sticking  together,  and  pick  out  every  piece  of  green.  Syr- 
inga  flowers  are  a  good  substitute  for  orange  flowers.  If 
the  pot-pourri  becomes  too  moist,  add  orris-root  powder 
and  spices  ;  if  too  dry,  add  bay-salt  and  saltpetre,  only  let 
every  powder  be  as  fine  as  possible,  and  well  mixed.  It 
cannot  be  too  much  stirred  at  first,  and,  if  well  made,  will 
keep  its  perfume  for  many  years. 

EASTER  EGGS. —  Mix  saffron  or  ultramarine  with  gum- 
water,  and  after  boiling  the  egg  for  ten  minutes  roll  it  in 
the  mixture. 

ANOTHER  WAY.  —  Put  the  color  into  a  saucepan  with 
some  cold  water,  and  directly  the  lump  has  dissolved,  while 
the  water  is  a  little  more  than  lukewarm,  put  in  the  eggs, 
and  boil  for  ten  or  fifteen  minutes. 

ANOTHER.  —  Sew  a  piece  of  white  rag  or  tape  an  inch 
wide  very  tightly  from  top  to  bottom,  and  another  piece 
round  it :  let  it  boil  in  the  preparation  as  above.  When 
done  take  off  the  tape.  Saffron  makes  yellow  ;  cochineal- 
red  ;  logwood,  violet ;  ultramarine,  blue. 

Still  another  way  is  to  sew  the  eggs  up  in  a  piece  of 
calico,  the  colors  of  which  are  not  fast,  being  careful  to 
allow  no  wrinkles.  Boil  for  twenty  minutes.  When  the 
calico  is  removed  the  impression  of  the  design  will  be 
found  transferred  to  the  egg. 

NEST  FOR  EASTER  EGGS.  —  Knit  with  green  fleecy  wool 


MISCELLANEOUS.  95 

on  coarse  needles.  Six  stitches  will  be  about  the  right 
width.  Knit  the  first  row  plain,  then  do  loop  knitting 
(see  Tilton's  Knitting,  Art-Needlework),  and  cut  the 
threads  afterwards.  The  nests  are  also  pretty  made  of 
real  moss. 

DECORATED  CHESS-BOARD.  —  Mark  out  on  a  piece  of 
Bristol  board  the  squares  correctly.  Fill  those  intended 
to  be  black  with  fine  drawings  in  ink  of  landscapes,  or 
buildings,  or  figures.  Around  the  border  paint  in  water- 
colors  a  vine  or  groups  of  flowers.  The  board  is  still  more 
valuable  if  made  of  light-colored  wood. 

A  CASE  FOR  CABINET  PHOTOGRAPHS.  —  For  this  you 
will  want  two  pieces  of  stiff  cardboard,  seven  and  one 
quarter  inches  long  and  five  inches  wide.  Use  brown 
satin  for  the  outside,  and  old-gold  colored  sateen  for  the 
lining.  Cut  a  piece  of  brown  satin  twenty-three  inches 
long  and  nine  and  one  half  inches  wide.  Of  the  sateen 
cut  a  piece  twenty-one  inches  long  and  seven  and  one  half 
inches  wide.  Baste  the  sateen  smoothly  to  the  satin, 
leaving  an  equal  amount  of  the  satin  projecting  on  each 
side.  At  one  end  of  this  piece,  and  five  inches  from  the 
edge  of  the  lining,  stitch  on  the  machine  a  straight  line 
across  the  width  of  the  satin.  Repeat  this  at  the  other 
end  of  the  piece.  Five  inches  from  these  lines  towards  the 
centre  stitch  another  line,  leaving  a  space  in  the  middle,  of 
one  inch  between  these  last  two  rows  of  stitching.  Into 
the  spaces  made  by  these  last  rows  of  stitching,  slip  the 
cardboards.  Turn  the  satin  over  to  the  edge  of  the  lining 
and  hem  down,  being  careful  that  none  of  the  stitches 
come  through  to  the  satin.  Fold  the  extra  length  of 


96 


THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 


material  over  the  cardboards  towards  the  centre  to  form 
the  pockets.  Put  in  side  pieces  of  satin  lined  with  sateen. 
When  made,  these  side  pieces  should  measure  one  inch  in 
width,  and  should  be  just  the  length  of  the  pocket.  A 
pretty  decoration  for  the  outside  of  this  case  is  a  palm 
branch  worked  in  gold  thread,  with  the  word  Photographs 
thrown  across  it. 


FIG.  38. 

MEMORANDUM-BOOK  FOR  WHIST  PLAYERS. — This  mem- 
orandum book  can  be  made  either  of  bronze  kid  or  brown 
plush,  and  lined  with  blue  silk.  The  outside  is  cut  in  one 
piece,  ten  and  one  half  inches  long,  and  three  and  one  half 
inches  wide.  Bind  this  all  round  with  ribbon.  For  one 
side  of  the  cover,  get  an  erasable  leaf  tablet,  cut  it  to  the 
right  size,  and  glue  it  firmly  to  the  inside  as  shown  in  the 
illustration.  The  one  half  inch  strip  which  forms  the  back 
of  the  book,  however,  must  first  be  lined.  Cover  a  thin 


MISCELLANEOUS.  97 

cardboard  of  the  same  size  as  the  tablet  with  silk,  making 
the  corner  pieces  for  the  counters,  as  shown  in  Fig.  38. 
Sew  this  to  the  outside.  Put  on  straps  of  elastic  to 
hold  the  pencil.  The  outside  can  be  decorated  as  shown 
in  Fig.  39. 

PRETTY  WINDOW  ORNAMENT.  — Get  a  piece  of  sponge, 
the  coarse,  cheap  kind  is  the  best,  and  after  wetting  it 
thoroughly  with  warm  water, 
squeeze  it  gently  so  as  to  wring 
out  most  of  the  water,  but  not 
all.  Have  ready  some  seeds  of 
rice,  oats,  millet,  barley,  grass, 
and  red  clover,  and  push  them 
into  the  damp  holes  of  the 
sponge.  Now  hang  it  up  in  a 
window  where  it  will  get  the 
sun  during  part  of  the  day,  tak- 
ing care  to  sprinkle  it  with  a 
little  water  every  day  for  a 
week,  so  that  it  may  be  kept 
slightly  moist.  Soon  the  little  FlG-  39' 

spear-like  leaves  will  begin  to  shoot  from  every  part 
of  the  sponge,  and,  as  they  increase  in  length,  a  beautiful 
green  fringe  will  be  seen  falling  down  over  this  rustic 
basket,  and  covering  it  on  every  side.  It  will  remain 
green  and  refreshing  to  the  eye  for  a  long  time.  If  care- 
fully tended  and  sprinkled,  the  clover  will  bloom  a  little 
later  in  the  season. 

OUTLINING    FLOWERS    AND    LEAVES.  — An    excellent 
method  of  getting  the  outline  of  flowers  and  leaves,  and 


9°  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

one  as  simple  as  it  is  inexpensive,  is  the  following  :  Make 
a  solution  of  one  half  ounce  of  citrate  of  iron  and  ammo- 
nia, one  half'  ounce  of  red  prussiate  of  potash,  ten  parts 
water.  Pour  this  into  a  large  flat  dish.  Into  this  solution 
put  the  paper  required  to  be  printed  upon,  and  keep  it 
there  about  three  or  four  minutes ;  at  the  end  of  that 
time  take  it  out,  drain  the  solution  off,  and  then  hang  the 
immersed  paper  up  by  two  of  the  corners  in  a  light,  tight 
closet  until  it  dries.  As  red  prussiate  of  potash  is  of  a 
poisonous  nature,  it  would  be  as  well  to  use  a  large  flat 
brush  to  push  it  beneath  the  solution,  one  corner  of  the 
paper  being  held  by  a  small  pair  of  whalebone  "  tongs," 
such  as  can  easily  be  procured  of  any  photographic  chem- 
ists. The  paper,  when  dry,  becomes  sensitive  to  the  action 
of  the  light.  Procure  next  a  photographic  printing  frame 
(two  pieces  of  glass  held  together  by  the  spring  clothes- 
pin would  do  as  well,  but  the  printing  frame  is  very  cheap, 
and  will  save  trouble),  put  a  glass  into  the  printing  frame, 
and  upon  it  lay  any  thin  leaves  or  flowers  (fresh  gathered) ; 
the  thinner  the  leaves  and  flowers  the  sharper  will  be  the 
outline.  Lay  them  artistically  upon  the  glass,  and  cover 
them  with  the  dry  sensitive  paper ;  press  down  the  back 
of  the  printing  frame,  and  stand  then  out  in  the  light. 
The  amount  of  exposure  now  becomes  the  question,  and 
this  can  be  ascertained  by  opening  one  end  of  the  printing 
frame,  keeping  the  other  firmly  pressed  down,  so  that  the 
paper  does  not  shift  upon  the  leaves  or  flowers.  When 
the  design  is  sufficiently  impressed  by  the  light,  take 
it  out  of  the  frame,  and  put  it  in  a  dish  of  water,  at  about 
the  temperature  of  80°  or  90°,  to  clear  off  some  of  the 


MISCELLANEOUS.  99 

yellow  tinge.  When  sufficiently  cleansed,  put  it  in  a 
dish  of  cold  water,  and  the  outline  is  then  permanently 
impressed.  This  will  be  found  a  good  method  of  making 
designs  to  paint  upon.  Should  any  of  the  prussiate  get 
into  a  cut  in  the  finger  or  hand,  an  immediate  application 
of  soap  and  water  will  be  the  remedy. 

FERNS,  ETC.,  USED  AS  ORNAMENTATION.  —  Many  useful 
articles  can  be  ornamented  with  real  ferns,  mosses,  and 
flowers.  Cut  out  in  white  cardboard  a  set  of  toilet  mats, 
draw  a  scallop  round  them,  taking  half  the  circumference 
of  a  spool  of  thread  as  a  guide.  Cut  the  scallops  out  with 
a  sharp  pair  of  scissors,  and  punch  a  hole  in  the  centre  of 
each  with  a  shoemaker's  punch,  a  quarter  of  an  inch 
across.  The  ferns,  mosses,  small  flowers,  etc.,  must  now 
be  prepared  by  pressing  them  with  a  hot  iron,  first  cover- 
ing them  with  one  or  two  sheets  of  blotting  paper. 
Now  with  a  small  brush  cover  all  the  under  side  of  each 
leaf  or  flower  with  hot  gelatine  and  water  (half  an 
ounce  of  gelatine  to  half  a  pint  of  water  will  be  about  the 
proportion),  and  lay  it  on  the  mat  very  carefully  in  the  po- 
sition you  wish  it  to  be,  pressing  firmly  with  a  soft  cloth  on 
and  off  for  a  few  minutes,  till  it  is  firmly  fixed.  Brush  over 
both  sides  and  the  edges  with  the  gelatine.  It  is  better 
to  give  it  two  coats  before  varnishing.  These  mats  will 
wash  with  a  little  soap  and  water  if  they  have  been  thor- 
oughly gelatined  and  varnished. 

BULBS  IN  GLASSES  OR  POTS.  —  For  a  small  sum  of 
money  you  can  buy  at  any  florist's  some  crocus  or  hyacinth 
bulbs.  At  a  china  store  you  can  buy  glasses  for  them  to 
grow  in.  Blue  i«  the  best  color.  Into  each  glass  drop  a 


IOO  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

piece  of  charcoal  as  large  as  an  English  walnut.  Fill  the 
glass  to  the  top  with  water,  and  place  the  bulb  in  the 
glass  so  that  the  root  side  will  just  touch  the  water.  Shut 
the  bulbs  in  the  glasses  into  a  dark  closet  which  is  tolera- 
bly warm.  Let  them  stay  for  three  weeks,  at  the  end  of 
which  time  you  will  find  the  roots  well  grown  and  the 
green  leaf  bud  sprouted.  Change  the  water  for  fresh, 
hike-warm  water  and  set  them  in  the  sun,  and  they  will 
soon  make  a  rapid  growth.  If  you  do  not  want  the  ex- 
pense of  glasses,  plant  the  bulbs  in  deep  flower-pots,  in 
light,  rich  soil,  very  near  the  surface,  shutting  them  away 
in  the  dark  as  directed  above.  Before  giving  them  away, 
you  can,  if  you  choose,  decorate  the  glasses  or  pots  with  a 
bright-colored  ribbon  tied  around  them  in  a  handsome  bow. 
There  are  various  other  ways  of  making  flower-pots  orna- 
mental. For  instance,  a  flower-pot  cover  may  be  made  of 
four  pieces  of  cardboard,  a  little  higher  and  wider  than  the 
pot  it  is  intended  to  cover.  Having  cut  four  sides,  lace 
them  together  with  gold  or  silver  cord,  tying  it  at  the  top 
in  a  bow  ;  make  a  tassel  for  the  end  ;  then  these  four  sides 
can  be  covered  with  scraps,  seaweed,  etchings,  paintings, 
dried  autumn  leaves,  etc.,  as  fancy  may  dictate.  Or,  you 
can  paint  the  cover  black,  and  cut  out  flowers,  figures, 
birds,  etc.,  from  colored  scraps  ;  or  ornament  with  butter- 
flies, cut  out  of  thin  cretonne,  and  glued  on  ;  or  decorate 
with  the  artistic  tinted  cheap  soft  silk  handkerchiefs.  Cut 
them  across  the  centre  and  tie  them  round  the  pots,  mak- 
ing the  ends  into  a  bow. 

ALUM  BASKET. — Take  a  wire  basket,  and  twist  white 
wool  round  it.     Put  a  quart  of  water  in  a  deep  pan  with  a 


MISCELLANEOUS.  IOI 

pound  of  alum  in  it,  until  the  alum  is  melted.  Strain,  and 
suspend  the  basket  in  the  liquid  for  twenty-four  hours. 
Take  it  out,  and  allow  it  to  dry  slowly,  but  do  not  put  it 
near  a  fire  for  that  purpose. 

VASES  MADE  OF  BOTTLES.  —  Common  porter  bottles 
are  made  into  odd-looking  vases  of  flowers,  by  washing 
and  covering  them  with  scrap  pictures,  adding  narrow 
strips  of  gold  paper  round  the  top  and  base,  the  whole 
covered  with  a  coat  of  varnish.  Ivy,  drooping  ferns,  or 
grasses  are  then  planted  in  them,  so  that  the  pictures 
form  the  background  to  the  greenery. 

From  salad-oil  bottles  remove  the  straw  work  and  then 
cover  with  two  coats  of  black  paint,  on  which  paste  scrap 
picture-s  of  roses  and  butterflies ;  varnish  well,  and  tie 
bows  of  ribbon  round  the  neck. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

PERSONAL. 

FOOT-MUFF.  —  This  would  be  an  invaluable  present  to 
a  person  living  in  the  suburbs  of  a  city,  and  making  fre- 
quent use  of  the  horse-cars  in  winter,  or  to  any  one  about 
to  take  a  winter  journey  or  sea-voyage.  The  outside 
should  be  made  of  dark  morocco,  and  the  lining  of  fur.  A 
lining  of  chamois  skin  covered  with  flannel  would  also  be 
light  and  warm.  Cut  of  the  morocco,  a  piece  thirteen 
inches  long  and  twelve  inches  wide.  Shape  this  for  the 
bottom  of  the  muff,  by  rounding  off  the  corners  at  one  end, 
leaving  a  straight  edge  of  four  inches  in  the  middle  to  re- 
ceive the  toes.  Slant  the  sides  enough  to  make  the  meas- 
urement at  the  heel  eleven  inches.  Cut  a  strip  of  the 
morocco  long  enough  to  go  all  around  the  muff,  and  four 
inches  in  width.  Sew  this  to  the  bottom  to  form  the  sides 
of  the  muff.  For  the  top,  cut  a  piece  of  morocco  nine 
inches  long  and  eleven  inches  wide.  Shape  this  piece  at 
the  toe  to  correspond  with  the  bottom.  Curve  the  edge 
nearest  the  heel  enough  to  take  out  two  inches  at  the 
centre.  Sew  this  to  the  side  piece  and  the  outside  of  the 
muff  is  made.  Cut  the  lining  of  fur  large  enough  to  turn 
over  the  edge  one  and  one  half  inches  for  a  trimming.  If 
any  other  material  is  used  for  the  lining,  trim  the  muff 


PERSONAL.  103 

around  the  opening  with  a  strip  of  fur,  or  with  a  niching 
of  plaited  braid. 

ANOTHER  FOOT-MUFF. — This  is  done  with  Smyrna 
wool,  the  upper  part  knit,  the  under  part  in  crochet,  with 
a  knit  lining  of  olive-colored  wool  as  in  Fig.  40.  For  the 
knitting  of  the  upper  part,  knit  as  for  Smyrna  rug.  Prepare 
ends  of  wool  two  and  one  quarter  inches  long.  Knit  back 
and  forwards  in  dark  worsted  on  large  steel  needles.  Cast  on 


forty-four  stitches.  The  ends  of  the  wool  must  be  doubled, 
and  knit  into  the  work  ;  one  end  laid  in  front  on  the  side 
next  you,  the  first  after  knitting  the  first  stitch  ;  the  other 
end  passed  to  the  front  after  the  next  stitch,  working  the 
pattern  in  different  colors.  The  two  ends  and  two  stitches 
are  required  to  make  one  stitch  of  color  in  the  pattern. 
Knit  the  last  stitch,  and  knit  back  plain.  Decrease  for  the 
last  twenty  rows,  knitting  together  two  stitches  at  the  be- 
ginning and  end  of  the  first  and  each  fourth  following  row. 
Fig.  41  gives  a  simple  pattern  for  the  knit  upper  part,  the 


IO4 


THREE   HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 


border  in  two  shades  of  terra-cotta,  the  ground  dark  blue, 
the  inner  border  yellow,  the  centre  triangular  figures,  two 
dark  red,  two  light  blue,  the  connecting  figures  olive.  For 
the  under  part  crochet  back  and  forward,  beginning  with  a 
chain  of  twenty-six  stitches,  and  introducing  a  pattern  in 
color,  as  is  taught  in  Tilton's  Crochet  Instructions.  Such 


a  simple  pattern  as  Fig.  42  should  be  selected,  the  ground 
dark  blue,  border  of  pattern,  yellow,  filled  in  with  red  and 
olive ;  decrease  in  the  same  proportion  as  for  the  upper 
part.  The  connecting  strips  are  knit  in  three  pieces 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  top.  For  the  two  side 
pieces,  cast  on  eight  stitches  ;  the  six  middle  stitches 
should  form  stripes  of  color,  the  first  and  last  of 
blue,  the  two  middle  stitches  of  terra-cotta.  Decrease  for 
the  width  as  the  narrower  part  of  the  top  is  reached,  knit- 


PERSONAL. 


105 


ting  two  together  on  either  end  of  the  strip.     For  the  front 

connecting  strip,  cast  on  the  same  number  of  stitches  as  the 

upper  part  is  finished  off  with, 

and  knit  twelve  rows,  the  first, 

third,    ninth,    and    eleventh    of 

dark    blue   ends,  the    fifth    and 

seventh    of   terra-cotta   ends  of 

wool,  and  slope  the  ends  to  match 

the    side    strips.       Sew    these 

strips  together  and  attach  them 

to  the  upper   and    under    part. 

A  lining  should  be  knit  of  finer  FIG.  42. 

wool  in  separate  pieces  to  correspond  with  the  outside, 

all  done  in  plain  back 
and  forward  knitting. 
Sew  in  the  lining,  and 
attach  two  handles  of 
silk  cord. 

VELVET  MUFF.  — 
Make  first  a  plain  muff 
of  any  material  you  like, 
wadded  with  cotton. 
Line  with  red  satin. 
Cut  your  material 
twelve  inches  long, 
eight  inches  wide.  Sew 
together  the  shortest 
sides.  Trim  the  ends 

FlG-  43-  HPfe.  >          with    black     lace,    and 

draw  up  to  the  requi- 


106  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

site  size  with  elastic  ribbon.  Next  take  a  piece  of  black 
velvet,  figured  or  plain,  eighteen  inches  long,  thirteen 
inches  wide.  Plait  this  to  the  front  of  the  muff  in  plaits 
about  an  inch  deep.  Arrange  as  in  the  illustration,  Fig. 
43.  Cover  the  back  with  a  piece  of  the  same  put  on 
plain.  Finish  with  bows  of  black  satin  ribbon,  and  a  silk 
cord  to  pass  around  the  neck. 

NIGHTINGALE.  —  This  very  comfortable  wrap  for  invalids 
requires  two  and  one  half  yards  of  colored  flannel.  Fold 
it  exactly  in  half,  and  cut  to  the  depth  of  nine  inches. 
Turn  back  each  side  of  the  cut  into  a  half  square ;  then 
run  together  diagonally  to  form  a  sort  of  hood.  Turn 
back  the  angles  at  each  extreme  corner  for  cuffs.  With 
white  wool,  work  round  the  entire  wrap  in  feather-stitch, 
remembering  to  work  the  hood  and  cuffs  to  show  on  the 
right  side ;  tack  each  angle  of  the  hood  into  its  place,  sew 
ribbon  strings  at  the  neck,  and  the  "  Nightingale  "  is  fin- 
ished. If  speed  be  an  object,  binding  with  ribbon  does 
just  as  well  as  feather-stitch. 

A  DRESSING  TOWEL. — This  is  a  convenient  article  to 
throw  over  the  shoulders  when  one  has  occasion  to  arrange 
the  hair  without  taking  off  the  dress,  or  to  take  the  place 
of  a  dressing  sack  for  ordinary  toilette  use.  It  is  made 
of  one  yard  of  cross-barred  muslin,  hemmed  all  round. 
In  the  middle  of  one  side,  cut  a  slit  seven  inches  long. 
Be  careful  to  reverse  the  hem  down  the  sides  of  the  slit, 
and  for  seven  inches  from  it  on  the  side  of  the  square  in 
which  the  slit  is  cut.  Trim  all  around  with  lace.  Turn 
back  the  slit  its  entire  length  to  form  right-angled  revers, 
and  fasten  them  at  the  corners.  This  is  to  form  the  neck 


PERSONAL. 


107 


of  the  garment.  The  length  of  the  towel  falls  over  the 
back  and  shoulders,  and  is  fastened  at  the  throat  with  a 
button  and  button-hole. 

INFANT'S  SHOES.  —  Procure  from  your  shoemaker  a 
pattern  of  the  shape  and  size  you  want.  Cut  each  piece 
out  of  silk  or  merino  and  line  with  wadded  silk.  Bind 
each  piece  with  narrow  ribbon,  and  over-seam  them  to- 
gether. Make  eyelets  worked  with  silk  for  the  strings. 

SPECTACLE  CLEANERS. — These  are  made  of  two  pieces 
of  kid,  two  and  one  quarter  inches  long  and  one  and  three 
quarters  wide,  lined 
with  chamois  skin,  and 
bound  with  ribbon.  To 
get  the  shape,  fold  one 
of  the  pieces  of  chamois 
skin  through  the  mid- 
dle, lengthwise.  Begin 
to  cut  one  half  inch 
from  the  folded  edge, 
and  form  into  an  oval. 
The  straight  edge  thus  left  makes  the  top  of  the  piece ; 
and  when  made,  the  pieces  are  to  be  joined  together  at 
that  point  by  sewing-silk  loops. 

HANDKERCHIEF  Bow.  — This  bow  is  made  of  a  pocket- 
handkerchief  so  arranged  that  three  corners  of  the  hand- 
kerchief form  the  ends,  while  the  fourth  makes  the  knot 
in  the  middle,  as  in  Fig.  44. 

DECORATED  PARASOLS.  —  Parasols  covered  in  red  Tur- 
key twill  are  much  improved  by  being  painted  in  neutral 
tints  with  a  flight  of  swallows.  The  parasols  are  moderate 


FIG.  44- 


108  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

in  price  ;  but  the  painting  on  them  considerably  raises 
their  value.  Parasols  covered  in  pongee  can  be  decorated 
with  equally  good  effect.  Sprays  of  leaves,  butterflies,  or 
large  bunches  of  azalias,  nasturtiums,  or  daisies  are  pretty. 
The  decoration  should  be  put  only  on  one  or  two  gores  of 
the  parasol. 

CARD-CASE.  —  This  card-case  has  the  recommendation 
of  being  large  enough  to  carry  not  only  visiting-cards  but 
concert  or  other  tickets,  and  even  a  folded  pocket-hand- 
kerchief. Cut  from  embossed  satin  or  velvet  a  piece  fifteen 
inches  long  and  six  inches  wide.  Line  this  with  a  bright 
colored  satin.  At  each  end  turn  up  three  and  three  quar- 
ters inches,  and  fasten  at  the  sides  by  over-seaming.  If  the 
upper  edges  of  these  flaps  are  rounded  slightly,  cutting  out 
one  half  inch  at  the  centre,  the  convenience  of  getting 
the  cards  out  will  be  increased.  A  Card-case  can  also  be 
made  after  the  directions  given  under  the  title  of  Cigar- 
case. 

TOBACCO-POUCHES.  —  Soft  kid  or  chamois  skin  cut  in 
a  circle  and  bound  with  ribbon,  embroidered  in  colored 
silks  with  a  floral  design  and  monogram,  silk  cords  draw- 
ing it  up,  makes  a  pretty  pouch.  They  are  often  made  of 
Panama  or  Russian  canvas,  lined  with  India-rubber  cloth  ; 
indeed,  it  is  best  to  buy  one  of  the  inexpensive  kind  of 
India-rubber  pouches  and  cover  it  with  embroidered  silk,  or 
with  striped  silk.  Sometimes,  in  lieu  of  striped  silk,  silk 
ot  two  colors  is  chosen  and  arranged  side  by  side,  melon 
shape. 

Oriental  materials  and  colorings  are  best.  Some  of  the 
plain-colored  damask  designs  look  well  outlined  in  silk  em- 


PERSONAL. 


109 


FIG.  45- 


HO  THREE   HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 

broidery,  especially  soft  damasse  silk  of  one  color,  using  it 
as  a  covering  to  India  rubber  or  kid,  which  keeps  the  to- 
bacco best. 

TOBACCO-POUCH  (Fig.  45).  —  This  design  represents  the 
fourth  part  of  a  tobacco  pouch.  It  is  made  in  cashmere, 
and  ornamented  with  embroidery  in  point  Russe  and  au 
passJ,  executed  with  silks  of  various  colors.  When  the 
four  sides  are  terminated,  they  are  joined  together,  and 
the  seams  are  concealed  with  a  fine  silk  cord.  The  end 
terminates  with  a  tassel,  and  the  top  is  drawn  with  cord. 
The  lining  is  kid. 

CROCHET  TOBACCO-POUCHES  should  be  done  in  Oriental 
colors  in  silk,  putting  in  the  colors,  as  described  in  Tilton's 
Crochet,  in  long  crochet  open  work.  Begin  with  a  black 
star  on  green  ground,  and  continue  to  increase  till  the  bag 
measures  nine  inches  round.  Work  on  in  close  long  cro- 
chet till  it  is  six  inches  high,  bringing  in  rows  of  gold  color, 
scarlet,  and  black,  on  a  ground  of  green.  Introduce  a 
close  border  for  a  pattern  on  black,  with  stripes  of  red, 
edging  the  pattern  with  gold.  Crochet  a  shell  pattern  to 
finish  off  at  the  top,  line  with  white  kid,  run  a  string  into 
the  upper  open  stitches,  and  finish  with  a  tassel  at  the 
bottom. 

CIGAR-CASE  MADE  OF  A  HANDKERCHIEF.  —  A  simple  and 
pretty  cigar-case  can  be  made  in  the  following  way :  For 
the  back,  cut  a  piece  of  cardboard  six  and  three  quar- 
ters inches  long,  and  three  and  one  quarter  inches  wide. 
One  and  three  quarters  inches  from  the  top  cut  this  partly 
through  across  the  width,  so  that  the  cardboard  will  easily 
fold  over  for  the  flap.  This  flap  must  be  cut  into  a  point 


PERSONAL.  1 1 1 

in  an  exact  right  angle.  Begin  to  slant  one  quarter  inch 
above  the  fold. 

For  the  front,  cut  a  second  piece  of  cardboard,  five  inches 
long  and  three  and  one  quarter  inches  wide.  At  the  top 
cut  out  a  V,  which  must  also  be  a  right  angle,  but  a  little 
shorter  on  the  sides  than  the  one  which  makes  the  point, 
so  that  the  flap  will  fold  a  little  way  beyond  it.  Line  the 
point  and  half  way  down  the  back  with  satin. 

Take  a  silk  handkerchief  thirteen  and  one  half  inches 
square,  with  a  colored  border.  Fold  it  crosswise,  and 
cut  in  halves  through  the  bias.  Lay  the  point  of  the 
cardboard  back  on  the  point  of  the  handkerchief,  and  glue 
them  together.  Next,  lay  the  cardboard  front  on  the  back, 
and  fasten  them  together  by  sewing  across  the  bottom. 
Then  from  the  two  remaining  corners  of  the  handkerchief 
cut  off  four  inches,  measuring  along  the  bias,  which  will 
leave  a  straight  edge  measuring  four  inches,  and  running 
parallel  with  the  cardboard  back.  Turn  the  handkerchief 
up  from  the  bottom,  over  the  cardboard  front.  From  the 
bottom  corners  fold  the  handkerchief  again,  so  as  to  bring 
the  bias  edge  close  to  the  sides  of  the  cardboard  case,  and 
then  fold  what  remains  across  the  front,  and  secure  the 
whole  with  glue. 

CARD-CASES.  —  This  is  a  very  good  way  to  make  card- 
cases  for  either  ladies  or  gentlemen.  The  material  and 
decoration  can  be  as  handsome  as  you  choose. 

A  SMALL  CARD-CASE  can  be  made  as  described  on 
page  108,  of  silk  or  velvet,  decorated  with  Lustra  painting. 
Or  the  sides  can  be  made  of  kid,  or  of  wood,  cut  of  the 
right  size  and  shape  and  painted  in  the  same  way. 


112  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

THIS  SMOKING  CAP  should  be  worked  in  gold  cord  or 
gold-colored  silk  couched  on,  that  is,  caught  down  at  regu- 
lar intervals,  on  some  dark  material. 

The  crown  of  this  cap  should  be 
seven  inches  in  diameter.  The 
straight  rim  should  be  twenty-nine 
and  one  half  inches  long  and  three 
inches  high.  Line,  and  ornament 
FIG-  46.  as  in  the  illustration.  If  preferred, 

a  soft  cap  can  be  bought  for  fifty  cents,  to  be  embroidered 
in  any  manner. 

SMOKING  COAT.  — Velvet  with  narrow  stripes  worked 
between,  with  rows  of  gold  braid,  makes  a  most  excellent 
trimming  for  a  smoking  coat ;  so  also  does  largely  quilted 
silk,  with  a  flower  in  the  centre  of  each  quilting.  Cash- 
mere patterned  cottons,  the  design  outlined  in  gold,  have  a 
good  Oriental  effect  for  the  same  purpose. 

GENTLEMEN'S  BRACES. — A  pair  of  braces  is  always 
acceptable  to  a  gentleman,  and  they  are  easy  to  make.  A 
strip  of  white  satin  jean,  cut  the  required  breadth  and 
length  (a  pattern  brace  should  be  got  to  cut  from),  will  do 
for  the  foundation  of  each  brace  ;  on  this  may  be  stitched 
with  a  machine,  or,  what  is  more  effective,  worked  on  in 
feather-stitch  with  coarse  buttonhole  silk,  strips  of  col- 
ored braid  ;  red  wears  best.  This  braid  may  be  put  on  in 
straight  lines,  a  broad  line  in  the  centre,  and  a  narrow  at 
each  side,  or  a  pattern  might  be  traced  on  the  jean,  and 
then  worked  over  with  the  narrow  braid  ;  but  it  must  be 
borne  in  mind  that  strength  and  durability  are  the  great 
requisites  for  these  articles,  and  that  a  raised  pattern 


PERSONAL.  I  1 3 

would  probably  be  uncomfortable.  When  the  outside 
strips  are  finished,  they  should  be  lined  with  another  piece 
of  jean,  same  breadth  and  length,  and  the  two  (lining  and 
outside)  be  bound  together  by  braid.  A  lining  of  flannel, 
to  match  the  braid  in  color,  is  most  effective,  but  it  gets 
rubbed  into  holes  after  a  few  weeks  wear,  and  makes  the 
whole  look  ragged  and  untidy.  Proper  fittings  for  these 
braces  can  be  bought  very  cheaply,  and  give  more  satisfac- 
tion Fhan  button-holes  worked  at  each  end. 

COMFORTERS  FOR  GENTLEMEN. — Those  knit  in  brioche 
stitch  in  single  Berlin  wool  are  the  softest  and  most  com- 
fortable, besides  being  easy  to  knit,  every  row  being  the 
same.  The  rule  is  *over,  slip  one  as  if  about  to  purl,  knit 
two  together,  repeat  from  *.  The  next  row  is  the  same, 
*over,  slip  one,  knit  two  together,  repeat  from  *,  but  the 
slipped  stitch  is  the  one  made  by  "  knit  two  together  "  in 
the  last  row,  and  the  over  and  the  slipped  stitch  of  the  last 
row  are  knitted  together.  It  takes  two  rows  to  make  a 
complete  stitch,  one  each  side  of  the  work.  Seventy-two 
stitches  would  be  a  good  width  for  a  gentleman's  com- 
forter, of  any  color  preferred.  Add  a  fringe  at  each  end 
made  as  described  in  Tilton's  Crochet. 

HAT-MARKERS.  —  These  are  easily  made,  and  are  a 
pretty  and  useful  present  for  a  gentleman.  Work  on  rib- 
bon the  initials  of  your  friend,  in  colored  silks,  either  in 
outline  or  solid  embroidery.  It  is  intended  to  be  sewed 
to  the  lining  of  the  hat,  and  will  often  save  a  good  deal  of 
anxious  uncertainty,  or  some  of  the  awkward  mistakes 
that  are  so  apt  to  occur  at  a  party,  in  the  gentleman's 
dressing-room. 


I  14  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

SERMON-CASE. — An  acceptable  present  to  a  clergyman 
is  a  sermon-cover  of  satin  or  silk,  quilted,  edged  round 
with  a  silk  cord,  and  his  monogram  worked  on  the  outside. 
A  few  pieces  of  elastic  should  be  sewn  inside,  to  hold  the 
leaves  or  sermons. 

SHAVING  CLOTHS.  —  A  set  of  embroidered  shaving 
cloths  are  made  in  the  following  way :  get  one  yard  and 
a  half  of  checked  or  striped  Oxford  shirting,  cut  out 
twelve  or  fourteen  pieces  eight  or  nine  inches  square  : 
either  hem  them  or  unravel  for  half  an  inch  all  round  to 
form  a  fringe.  Now  work  a  border,  or  some  pretty  pat- 
tern in  each  corner,  in  washing  silks  or  cottons.  A  name, 
initial,  or  crest  in  one  corner,  and  a  pattern  in  the  other 
three  also  look  very  well. 

DOG'S  COAT. — This  should  be  cut  out  to  fit  the  dog, 
being  large  enough  to  cover  the  back  and  sides  well. 
Fine  cloth  is  the  best  material.  It  should  be  bound  with 
narrow  silk  braid,  a  line  of  Russian  braid  "above  it,  and  the 
monogram  and  crest  in  one  corner,  worked  in  silks,  a  strap 
beneath  the  dog  keeping  it  in  its  place.  It  is  sometimes 
made  in  two  pieces,  joined  down  the  back,  and  often  lined, 
black  with  scarlet,  chocolate  with  blue,  etc. 


FIG.   47- 

CHAPTER    IX. 

SACHETS. 

HANDKERCHIEF  SACHETS.  CHECKER-BOARD  SACHET. 
—  This  sachet  is  made  of  one  piece  folded  in  the  middle. 
It  must  be  twenty  inches  long  and  twelve  inches  wide. 
The  upper  part  of  the  outside  is  covered  with  strips  of 
folded  satin,  braided  together  as  in  the  illustration,  and 
edged  with  a  piece  of  satin.  For  the  braided  portion,  as 
in  Fig.  47,  cut  seven  strips  of  blue  satin  three  and  one 
quarter-  inches  long,  one  and  one  half  inches  wide ;  nine 
strips  of  brown  satin,  five  and  one  quarter  inches  long  and 
one  and  one  half  inches  wide  ;  fold  the  edges  of  these 
strips  under  to  make  a  width  of  one  half  inch  each.  Cut 
crosswise  out  of  brown  satin,  long  strips  three  inches 
wide,  and  put  around  the  edge  in  reversed  plaits,  as  in  the 
illustration.  Line  the  whole  with  quilted  white  silk,  and 
finish  with  a  cord  around  the  edges.  Close  with  tassels. 


Il6  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

OTHER  HANDKERCHIEF  SACHETS.  —  The  newest  fashion 
is  to  make  them  almost  square,  with  one  corner  turned 
back  and  split  up  the  centre.  The  two  pieces  are  fastened 
back,  and  one  is  of  quilted  satin,  or  sateen,  secured  by  a 
fancy-headed  pin,  while  the  other  is  plain,  and  has  a  mono- 
gram or  a  device  embroidered  on.  The  lining  of  the  case 
is  wadded  and  quilted,  and  sometimes  scented,  and  the 
whole  is  edged  with  gathered  lace,  hemmed  muslin,  or 
frayed  silk.  The  handkerchief  case  opens  in  half,  and  on 
each  side  are  two  places  for  handkerchiefs  to  slip  in,  from 
the  middle  —  plain  ones,  fancy  ones,  evening,  and  colored. 
Another  favorite  shape  is  a  square,  bordered  fully  with 
lace,  with  the  four  corners  tied  together  with  a  bow,  and 
the  name  or  monogram  worked  on  one.  Black  satin  lined 
with  quilted  yellow  sarsenet,  brown  lined  with  pink,  and 
pale  blue  with  coral,  are  fashionable,  trimmed  with  tinted 
lace.  The  brush  case  is  also  made  to  match,  the  brushes 
and  combs  being  thrust  through  at  the  corner.  The  small, 
cheap,  colored  silk  handkerchiefs  are  now,  as  little  novel- 
ties, being  quilted  inside,  with  strong  sachet  powder  in  the 
lining,  edged  with  coffee-colored  lace,  and  fastened  together 
in  the  centre  by  the  corners  with  a  bow  of  satin  ribbon. 
Another  style  of  pocket-handkerchief  sachet,  intended  to 
hold  handkerchiefs  in  a  drawer,  is  of  plain  colored  cotton- 
backed  satin,  with  two  pockets.  On  one  side  (the  top 
when  folded),  a  white  handkerchief  with  fancy  border  is 
folded  and  fixed  on  by  four  pearl-headed  pins,  and  stitches 
in  the  centre. 

GLOVE  SACHETS.  —  Glove  sachets,  made  a  trifle  longer 
and  wider  than  gloves,  composed  of  satin  or  velvet,  braided 


SACHETS. 


117 


or  embroidered,  edged  round  with  a  ruche  of  satin,  and  lined 
with  quilted  satin  or  Persian  silk,  form  a  useful  present. 

SACHETS  FOR  NOTE  PAPER.  —  These  are  also  much 
used.  They  can  be  made  of  any  of  the  materials  indicated 
above,  and  should  be  cut  just  the  size  of  the  paper  for 
which  they  are  intended,  and  highly  scented. 

MOTH  SACHET.  —  Buy  Russian  shavings  from  a  bookseller 
and  cut  them  up  into  little  pieces ;  then  prepare  a  case 
four  inches  square  of 
white  Victoria  lawn  ; 
sew  up  two  of  the 
sides ;  then  turn  the 
bag  right  side  out- 
wards, fill  it  with 
chips,  and  close  the 
opening  by  running 
the  two  turned  edges 
together. 

CAMPHOR  BAGS.  — 
These  may  be  made 
so  as  to  be  ornamen- 
tal as  well  as  serviceable.  Besides  being  useful  to  lay 
among  furs  to  prevent  moths  from  attacking  them,  they 
are  a  valuable  preventive  of  a  cold  in  the  head  if  smelled 
of  constantly  when  the  very  first  symptoms  show  them- 
selves. Take  a  piece  of  heavily  brocaded  ribbon  two 
inches  wide  and  five  inches  long.  Double  it  together  to 
form  the  bag.  Around  the  top  put  a  heading  of  plain  silk 
of  contrasting  color  to  make  the  frill.  This  should  be 
lined  with  the  same.  Make  runnings  for  the  strings  where 


FIG.  48. 


I  1 8  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

the  two  colors  join.  The  strings  should  be  of  silk  cord 
and  long  enough  to  tie  around  the  neck  of  the  bag  when 
drawn  up  in  a  bow  and  ends,  and  should  be  finished  with  a 
small  tassel. 


FIG.  49. 

FOR  ORNAMENTING  SACHETS,  the  small  designs  repre- 
sented in  Fig.  48  are  exceedingly  pretty.  They  should  be 
done  in  chain  stitch  if  worked  as  in  the  illustration.  The 
tiny  sprays  of  leaves  are  worked  in  chain  stitch  caught 
down  with  a  small  stitch  taken  through.  Such  a  design  is 
very  effective  done  in  any  delicate  color  on  white  or  gray 
satin,  and  edged  round  in  gold  thread.  They  can  also  be 
worked  in  stem  stitch. 


SACHETS.  119 

A  PERFUME  SACHET,  worked  in  the  pattern  given  in 
Fig.  48,  can  be  made  prettily  in  a  purse  form.  Take 
some  delicate  silk  about  ten  inches  long,  thirteen  inches 
wide.  Double  it  together,  and  put  it  over  a  lining  filled 
loosely  with  perfumed  powder.  Draw  the  sachet  together 
in  the  middle  with  ribbon  and  a  large  bow. 

A  JAPANESE  SQUARE  makes  a  pretty  cover,  or  any  choice 
silk. 


FIG.  50. 


SACHET  FOR  FANCY  WORK.  —  This  pocket,  Fig.  49,  may 
be  made  in  either  satin  or  plush,  claret,  blue,  bronze,  or 
green,  and  can  be  cut  to  any  size.  The  embroideries  that 
ornament  it  are  executed  in  silks  the  colors  of  the  natural 
flowers  and  leaves,  and  the  flap  of  the  envelope  is  worked 
inside  as  well  as  outside.  The  sachet  rests  on  a  support 
at  the  back  like  a  photograph  frame. 

LACE  SACHET.  —  This  pretty  sachet,  Fig.  50,  is  intended 
for  holding  lengths  of  valuable  lace.  It  is  made  of  plush 


I2O  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

which  is  ornamented  with  Lustra  painting,  the  design  being 
fruit  and  flowers.  The  lining  is  quilted  satin,  the  wadding 
being  perfumed. 

Lustra  painting  on  silk  is  described  in  Tilton's  Self- 
Instructive  Lessons. 

NIGHTDRESS  SACHETS.  —  The  dimensions  of  these 
sachets  vary  much,  according  to  individual  taste.  The 
largest,  which  are.  usually  of  chine  silk,  edged  with  rather 
deep  lace  gathered  on  very  full,  measure  half  a  yard  by 
three  quarters,  and  are  laid  on  the  centre  of  the  bed  cover- 
lid. They  are  made  with  a  flap,  like  an  envelope,  finished 
off  with  a  bow  or  an  artificial  flower.  But  these  are  not 
very  commonly  seen.  The  most  usual  measure  about  half 
a  yard  long  and  thirteen  inches  wide.  They  are  quilted 
and  lined  with  pale-colored  satin.  The  outside  is  of  plain 
silk  or  satin,  with  a  painted  spray  of  flowers,  embroidered 
monogram,  or  appliqued  design,  and  edged  with  a  silken 
cord;  cretonne  and  sateen  are  also  used.  One  end  is  left 
open,  and  also  seven  inches  down  the  side.  This  corner  is 
turned  back  and  secured,  and  sometimes  the  design  or 
monogram  is  on  the  flap.  The  nightdress  slips  in  down- 
wards without  difficulty.  If  the  material  and  color  are  very 
delicate,  a  muslin  cover  is  made,  and  the  sachet  is  slipped 
into  it.  The  newest  nightdress  sachets  are  made  the  full 
length  of  a  pillow,  and,  if  made  with  taste,  are  a  great 
ornament  to  a  room.  A  piece  of  sateen,  the  square  of  the 
width  of  the  material,  is  required.  This  is  trimmed  round 
entirely  with  lace,  and  is  folded  over  so  that  the  two  edges 
cover  each  other  four  or  five  inches.  A  button  is 
placed  on  the  under  part  at  each  side,  and  a  buttonhole 


SACHETS.  121 

made  in  the  part  above.  This  is  covered  with  a  bow  of 
ribbon  made  to  match  the  material.  These  are  extremely 
useful  and  nice,  as  the  dress  is  not.  crushed  as  they  usually 
are  in  placing  in  the  bag  shape. 

CRACKER  SACHETS  FOR  NIGHTGOWNS  receive  their 
name  from  the  cracker  bonbons  and  are  like  the  plush 
bolster  pillows  represented  by  Fig.  19.  The  cracker 


FIG.  51. 

sachet  resembles  its  namesake,  and  the  opening  is  down 
the  side,  buttoning  over,  and  the  fastening  hidden  by  a 
cascade  of  lace,  or  not  hidden  at  all,  but  neatly  finished  off. 
It  measures  about  twenty-three  inches  round,  and  is  often 
of  two  colors  joined  together.  It  is  nearly  a  yard  long,  is 
edged  with  lace,  with  a  drawstring  about  six  inches  from 
each  end,  hidden  by  a.  ribbon  and  bow.  The  dress  is  folded 
and  laid  on  the  case  open,  the  ends  are  drawn  up,  then 


122  THREE   HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

wide  ribbon  is  tied  round  outside  at  each  end,  by  which  you 
have  a  good  resemblance  of  the  bonbon  cracker. 

NIGHTGOWN  SACHET  OF  PIQUE.  —  Fig.  5 1  should  be 
made  of  white  pique,  ornamented  with  white  embroidery 
cotton  in  Kensington  stitch,  and  trimmed  with  crochet 
Mignardise  edging,  for  instruction  in  which  see  Tilton's 
Art-Needlework.  Cut  a  piece  fourteen  inches  wide,  and 
thirty-one  inches  long.  Make  the  satchel  thirteen  inches 
long,  back  and  front,  leaving  five  inches  to  turn  over  for 
the  flap. 

SACHET  FOR  GENTLEMAN'S  TIES,  No.  i.  —  The  best 
kind  is  a  strip  of  embroidered  satin  twelve  inches  long  by 
eight  inches,  the  lining  quilted,  and  the  edges  bordered  with 
cord.  It  must  be  folded  lengthwise  in  half,  and  have  on 
either  side  of  the  inside,  loops  through  which  the  neckties 
are  slipped  and  kept  in  their  place. 

No.  2. — Very  useful,  and  always  acceptable,  gentlemen's 
tie-cases  are  made  thus  :  Cut  a  length  of  black,  brown, 
dark  red,  or  some  other  colored  satin,  seventeen  inches 
long  and  four  and  one  half  inches  broad  ;  paint  a  design 
on  it,  then  line  with  pale-colored  quikx>d  sarsenet ;  edge 
with  narrow  cord,  fold  it  in  half,  and  sHjr  an  elastic  across 
for  the  ties  to  pass  over.  These  dimension's  allow  of  a 
white  evening  tie  being  folded  in' 'half,  and  then  folded 
again  over  the  elastic  which  crosses  the  case.  If  made 
across  the  satin,  half  a  yard  is  sufficient  to  make  three  tie- 
cases.  These  cases  hold  a  good  many  ties. 


CHAPTER   X. 

TRAVELLING  .CONVENIENCES. 

A  SIMPLE  SHAWL-CASE  for  keeping  shawls  from  the 
dust,  can  be  made  to  be  used  with  a  common  shawl-strap. 
Cut  a  strip  of  burlap  bagging,  a  yard  long  and  twenty-one 
inches  wide.  Across  the  middle  lay  a  strip  of  the  same 
material  and  width,  sixteen  inches  long,  and  attach  it 
firmly  at  the  sides.  This  makes  a  pocket  open  at  each  end, 
convenient  to  hold  a  few  flat  articles.  Such  a  case  will 
hold  one  large  shawl,  or  a  smaller  one  with  some  small 
wraps.  A  strip  of  dark-colored  felt  or  some  serviceable 
material  should  be  put  on  at  each  end,  with  herring-bone 
or  some  ornamental  stitches. 

TRAVELLING  TOILET-CASE.  — Cut  out  of  enamelled  cloth 
or  drilling  a  piece  twenty-eight  and  one  half  inches  long 
and  eleven  and  one  half  inches  wide,  with  a  lining  of  oiled 
silk  of  the  same  dimensions.  One  end  should  be  curved 
as  in  the  illustration,  Fig.  52.  At  the  straight  end  put  on 
a  pocket  of  oiled  silk  the  width  of  the  outside,  and  four 
inches  deep.  Bind  the  upper  side  of  this  piece  with 
worsted  braid.  The  pockets  next  to  this  should  each  be 
cut  six  and  one  half  inches  long  and  four  and  one  half 
inches  wide,  and  bound  with  the  braid  all  around,  excepting 
on  the  outer  edge,  which,  in  one  of  the  pockets,  is  to  be 
123 


I24 


THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 


laid  in  one  large  plait,  and  attached  to  the  lining.     The 
other  pocket  is  to  be  folded  in  two  plaits,  and  fastened  to 

the  lining  in  her- 
ring-bone stitch 
between  the  two 
plaits. 

For  the  flap  to 
cover  the  three 
pockets  thus 
formed,  cut  a  piece 
five  inches  long 
and  four  inches 
wide,  the  corners 
of  which  should  be 
rounded.  Bind 
with  the  braid,  and 
fasten  in  the  mid- 
dle to  the  lining 
with  herring-bone. 
Fasten  with  but- 
tons and  loops  of 
elastic  cord.  Quilt 
a  piece  of  silk  ten 
and  one  half  inches 
long  and  eight 
inches  wide  ;  bind 
it,  and  attach  it  to 
the  lining  at  three 
sides,  for  a  case 
for  the  mirror, 


TRA  VELLING   CONVENIENCES. 


125 


which  can  be  held  in  its  place  by  ribbons  or  a  strap  as 
in  the  illustration.  For  the  rounded  end  of  the  dressing- 
case,  cut  a  piece  of  the  oiled  silk  fourteen  inches  long 
and  four  and  one  half  inches  wide.  Shape  and  gather  the 
lower  edge  to  fit  the  outside,  and  gather  the  upper  edge 
into  a  binding  of  braid  twelve  inches  long.  Cut  the  flap 
ten  and  one  half  inches  long  and  two  inches  wide.  Curve 


FIG.  53. 

and  bind  as  in  the  illustration,  and  sew  it  to  the  lining. 
Fill  the  remaining  space  with  two  envelope -shaped 
pockets  for  wash-cloth  and  soap,  and  a  pocket  divided  in 
the  centre  for  tooth  and  nail  brushes,  as  in  Fig.  52. 
When  finished,  fold  over  the  mirror,  and  fasten  on  the 
outside  with  a  delicate  leather  strap  of  the  right  length, 
with  a  handle  between  the  straps. 

BRUSH   AND    COMB    CASE. — A   simple    travelling    case 


126  THREE  HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 

can  be  made  as  in  Fig.  53.  Cut  from  firm  drilling,  for  the 
case,  a  piece  fifteen  inches  long  and  eleven  inches  wide. 
Cut  also,  for  the  pocket,  a  piece  thirteen  inches  long  and 
five  inches  wide.  Bind  this  with  a  piece  of  braid  eleven 
inches  long  across  one  of  the  long  sides,  gathering  the 
pocket  to  fit  the  length  of  the  braid.  Gather  the  re  nain- 


FIG.  54. 

ing  long  side,  and  baste  the  pocket  to  one  end  of  the 
case,  and  bind  the  two  together  with  the  braid,  which  is 
to  be  carried  all  around  the  case.  Put  on  straps  for  the 
necessary  toilet  implements,  as  in  Fig.  55.  These  are  to 
be  made  of  the  drilling  and  bound  with  the  braid.  Fold 
over  three  times  and  fasten  with  a  piece  of  braid  to  tie 
around  the  whole. 

TRAVELLING  WoRK-Box.  —  This  box  as  in  Fig.  54, 
should  be  made  of  book-binder's  pasteboard,  cut  by  him 
into  pieces  of  the  following  dimensions  :  one  piece  ten 
inches  long  by  seven  and  one  half  inches  wide  ;  one  piece 


TKA  VELL1XG    CONVENIENCES. 


127 


nine  and  three  quarters  inches  long  by  seven  and  one  quar- 
ter inches  wide  ;  two  pieces  ten  inches  long  by  three  and 
one  half  inches  wide  ;  two  pieces  seven  and  one  half  inches 
long  by  three  and  one  half  inches  wide.  The  box  is  cov- 
ered with  brown  kid,  and  lined  with  silk  of  any  color  you 
prefer.  Cut  the  silk  for  your  lining  the  shape  of  the  dif- 


FIG.  55. 

ferent  pieces  of  pasteboard,  allowing  three  quarters  inch 
on  every  side  for  turning  over  the  edges.  These  pieces  of 
silk  should  be  fitted  smoothly  over  the  pasteboards,  either 
by  pasting  down  the  edges,  or  by  passing  threads  across 
the  back,  as  in  covering  a  pin  ball.  Fasten  the  pieces  to 
the  bottom  by  over-seaming.  Lay  the  piece  thus  formed 
by  joining  the  five  pieces,  out  flat  on  your  kid.  Secure 
firmly  with  a  weight  so  it  shall  not  slip,  and  mark  the  out- 
line with  a  pencil.  Cut  out  the  kid  by  this  line,  and  bind 
all  around  with  galloon.  Attach  the  kid  to  the  pasteboard 


128  THREE   HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 

by  sewing  them  together  at  the  edges.  Cut  four  squares 
of  the  silk  three  and  one  half  inches  in  size,  double  them 
crosswise,  and  sew  into  the  sides  as  seen  in  Fig.  55.  Next, 
cover  with  the  silk  the  remaining  piece  of  pasteboard, 
which  forms  the  false  bottom,  having  first  fastened  to 
the  upper  side  straps  of  ribbon  or  silk,  as  shown  in  the 
illustration,  divided  into  spaces  suitable  to  hold  the  sewing- 
implements.  Attach  this  to  the  bottom  .of  the  box  at  the 
back  by  three  loops  of  sewing  silk,  and  put  a  loop  or  rib- 
bon on  the  front  side,  with  which  to  raise  it.  Make  the 
quilted  cover  and  lay  over  the  top.  The  corners  are  to  be 
fastened  on  the  outside  with  buttons  and  loops,  as  well  as 
the  handle,  which  is  to  be  made  of  the  kid  lined  with  silk, 
and  shaped  as  in  Fig.  55. 

TRAVELLING  PILLOW. — Make  a  round  pillow  fifteen 
inches  in  diameter,  and  fill  with  feathers,  down,  or  hair. 
Make  a  cover  of  gray  linen  ;  at  the  back  put  on  a  pocket 
ten  inches  high,  with  a  hem  wide  enough  to  admit  of  but- 
tonholes. Sew  on  the  buttons  and  add  a  handle  of  the 
same  material,  as  in  Fig.  55.  Decorate  with  a  monogram, 
or  in  any  way  you  fancy. 

THE  SPANISH  ALFORCA  is  used  by  the  Spaniards  in 
travelling,  and  makes  a  most  picturesque  travelling  case. 
It  can  be  made  in  various  sizes,  and  can  be  used  as  a  re- 
ceptacle for  work,  in  the  drawing-room,  as  well  as  for  trav- 
elling. Some  heavy  woollen  material  is  needed  of  gay 
colors.  It  is  difficult  to  find  anything  absolutely  Spanish, 
but  the  woollen  materials  used  for  portieres  and  curtains 
can  be  made  useful.  For  the  largest  size,  take  some  such 
material  eighty-two  inches  long  and  fifteen  inches  wide. 


TRA  YELLING   CONVENIENCES. 


I29 


At  each  end  turn  over  the  material  for  a  pocket  fifteen 
inches  deep.  Baste  the  sides  of  these  pockets  together. 
Take  another  strip  fifteen  inches  wide  and  forty-four  inches 
long ;  put  this  strip  over  the  other,  bringing  the  middle  of 
e^ch  t^  "^  the  pnric  Of  the  upper  strip  will  lap 


over  the  openings  of  the  pockets.  Bind  the  two  long 
sides  of  the  bag  with  woollen  braid,  leaving  out  the"  ends 
of  the  upper  strip  for  flaps  to  cover  the  pockets.  The 
Spanish  Alforca  is  held  together  on  its  outside  edges  by  a 
braided  seam  of  different  colored  worsteds.  These  are 
sewed  over  and  over  the  two  edges,  in  lengths  of  about 


I3O  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

four  inches  of  one  color,  scarlet,  for  instance,  then  the 
same  length  of  green,  next  of  the  blue,  orange,  etc.  The 
stitch  forms  a  sort  of  cord  done  in  coarse  crewels,  in  one 
of  the  braided  stitches  described  in  Tilton's  Canvas-work. 
These  cases  can  be  made  much  smaller,  and  are  very  con- 
venient to  hang  over  the  back  of  a  chair  to  hold  knitting 
or  other  work,  or  a  duster,  and  can  be  made  very  orna- 
mental. They  are  also  useful  to  carry  over  the  arm  in 
travelling.  The  ends  of  the  upper  flaps,  and  each  end  of 
the  Alforca  should  be  finished  off  with  tassels  in  the  colors 
of  the  materials.  Cut  ends  of  worsteds  the  length  de- 
sired, and  draw  them  through  the  edge  of  the  material. 
Bring  the  ends  of  the  worsteds  together,  and  wind  some 
worsted  near  the  top  firmly,  to  form  the  tassel. 

LARUN.  —  These  hoods  which  are  worn  by  both  ladies 
and  peasants  in  the  Pyrenees,  are  very  easily  made,  and 
are  most  warm  and  comfortable  for  wearing  at  night,  or 
when  travelling.  Take  a  piece  of  fine  scarlet  flannel,  one 
and  three  quarters  yards  long,  and  seven  eighths  yard  wide. 
Bind  it  all  round  with  black  velvet  about  one  and  one  half 
inches  wide.  Then  double  it  in  half,  so  as  to  make  a 
square,  and  sew  the  two  top  edges  of  the  velvet  together 
on  the  wrong  side.  For  the  front,  turn  back  about  three 
inches  of  the  flannel  the  whole  way,  and  fasten  under  the 
chin  with  a  hook  and  eye,  or  bow  of  black  velvet.  They 
are  very  pretty  made  in  the  same  manner  with  pale  blue 
or  white  flannel,  with  a  broad  black  velvet  binding. 

BASHLIK.  —  This  is  a  pretty  head-dress  or  travelling 
wrap.  The  German  ladies  wear  them  for  skating,  and 
they  look  extremely  warm  and  picturesque,  of  black  or 


TRA  VELLING   CONVENIENCES. 


scarlet  cloth,  or  any  colored  flannel.  Fig.  57  shows  one 
half  ;  the  bashlik  is  cut  in  two  pieces  and  joined  along 
the  side  b,  as  far  as  a;  a  is 
seventeen  inches  long;  b  is 
fourteen  inches  long ;  the  en- 
tire length  of  the  bashlik  forty 
inches.  Add  a  bow  and  a 
tassel  at  point  d.  Embroider 
all  round  the  bashlik "  with 
white  wool  in  feather-stitch 
if  you  do  not  care  to  em- 
ploy a  long  time  on  it.  They 
can  be  braided  or  scalloped  ; 
the  former  is  the  usual  way. 
These  are  light  enough  to 
wear  over  a  bonnet  or  hat, 
for  a  cold  day  or  evening. 

CROCHETED  HEAD  WRAPS. 
Make  a  chain  one  half  yard 
long.  Into  this  with  a  very 
large  needle,  crochet  loosely 
twenty-six  shells  of  two  1.  c. 
Make  twenty  rows  and  then 
divide  your  stitches.  Take 
one  half  of  them  and  con- 
tinue to  crochet  as  before  until  your  piece  measures 
one  yard.  Then  return  to  the  other  half  of  the  stitches 
and  crochet  as  before  until  this  piece  is  the  same  length 
as  the  other.  You  have  now  made  the  foundation  of  your 
wrap,  and  it  should  be  very  loose  and  open.  To  make  the 


Fig.  57- 


I32  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

fringe  of  loops  with  which  the  wrap  is  covered,  put  a 
stitch  into  the  centre  of  each  of  the  shells  in  the  founda- 
tion connecting  them  by  loops,  formed  by  chains  of  eight 
stitches  each.  When  finished  gather  up  the  piece  across 
the  whole  end  for  the  head,  and  put  on  a  satin  bow,  and 
tie  a  bow  of  ribbon  six  inches  from  the  bottom  of  the  two 
ends.  Split  zephyr  is  the  softest  and  most  desirable  mate- 
rial to  make  this  wrap  of. 

KNIT  HEAD  WRAP.  — To  make  this  pretty  head  wrap, 
medium-sized  bone  needles  are  to  be  used,  and  white 
and  pink  Shetland  floss.  The  two  colors  are  wound  in 
separate  balls,  but  are  used  together  in  knitting.  This 
gives  a  pleasing  mottled  effect  when  done.  Cast  on  sixty 
stitches  and  knit  thirteen  turns.  When  this  is  done  take 
off  one  half  the  stitches  on  a  thread,  or  third  needle,  and 
continue  to  knit  back  and  forth  on  the  other  half  until  you 
have  made  fifty  turns.  Then  take  up  the  other  stitches  and 
knit  to  the  same  length.  Draw  the  strip  together  across 
the  whole  end  for  the  head  to  go  into,  and  cover  the  gath- 
ering with  a  bow.  The  long  ends  are  to  wrap  around  the 
throat  or  the  head  as  one  pleases. 

CASE  FOR  TRAVELLING  WRAPS.  —  A  thick  striped  linen, 
such  as  is  used  for  shades,  made  as  a  bolster  roll,  with  a 
strap  a  few  inches  from  either  end,  and  a  leather  handle, 
will  be  found  most  serviceable.  If  a  larger  one  is  required 
we  advise  very  strong  painted  canvas  —  this  makes  it 
waterproof — bound  with  leather,  a  yard  and  a  half  long, 
with  a  pocket  at  one  end,  which  is  rolled  and  then  strapped, 
and  should  have  a  leather  handle.  It  is  strong  and  secure 
enough  to  go  in  the  baggage-car  if  required. 


TRAVELLING   CONVENIENCES.  133 

POCKET  WRITING-CASE.  —  This  case,  when  folded,  is  not 
very  much  larger  than  a  pack .  of  postal  cards,  and  will 
hold  postal  cards,  scratch-block,  envelopes  and  note  paper, 
memorandum  book,  tickets,  postage  stamps,  and  stylo- 
graphic  pen.  To  make  it,  cut  out  of  kid  a  piece  sixteen 
inches  long  and  five  and  one  half  inches  wide.  Line  this 
with  brown  silk,  and  bind  all  around  with  galloon  of  the 
same  color.  At  each  end  fold  back  two  inches,  and  sew  at 
the  edges  to  form  the  pockets  for  postal  cards,  etc.  If 
you  prefer,  folded  sides  can  be  inserted  at  one  end  to 
better  accommodate  memorandum  books,  tickets,  etc. 
Exactly  in  the  middle  of  the  space  left  between  the  pockets 
at  each  end  of  the  case,  put  a  scratch-block  five  and  one 
half  inches  long  and  three  and  one  half  inches  wide. 
Fasten  this  in,  by  passing  underneath  it  elastic  ribbon 
three  quarters  inch  wide.  You  will  need  for  this  purpose 
two  pieces  eleven  inches  long.  Fasten  these  to  the  lining 
and  put  a  buckle  on  each  bit  of  elastic.  When  buckled 
over  the  scratch-block,  these  straps  should  each  come  one 
and  one  half  inches  from  the  upper  and  lower  sides  of  the 
block.  The  end  to  which  the  buckle  is  sewed  will  want 
to  measure  two  inches  in  length  from  the  point  where  it 
is  fastened  to  the  lining,  and  four  inches  from  the  same 
point  on  the  other  side  of  the  block.  Make  a  small  pocket 
for  postage  stamps  out  of  a  piece  of  kid  one  and  one  quar- 
ter inches  long,  and  one  and  one  eighth  inches  wide.  Line 
with  silk  and  bind  all  around  with  galloon,  and  sew  on  the 
pocket  for  postal  cards.  In  some  convenient  space,  put 
elastic  bands  to  hold  the  stylographic  pen.  Put  envelopes, 
and  note  paper  folded  to  fit  them,  on  top  of  the  scratch- 


134  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

block  and  buckle  the  straps  securely  over  them.  Fold  the 
case  together,  and  secure  by  an  elastic  strap  on  the  out- 
side. 

UMBRELLA  CASE  FOR  TRAVELLING.  —  This  case  should 
be  made  of  gray  drilling.  Cut  a  piece  thirty-one  inches 
long  and  twenty-nine  inches  wide  at  the 
top.  Double  and  slope  both  sides  down 
to  eighteen  inches  at  the  bottom.  Stitch 
the  divisions  for  umbrellas  and  canes,  as 
in  Fig.  58.  These  will  want  to  be  about 
three  inches  wide.  Attach  ribbons  or 
tapes  to  the  back  to  tie  the  case  firmly 
together  when  rolled. 

TRAVELLING  CASE.  —  The  material  of 
which  this  very  convenient  travelling 
case  is  made  is  gray  burlap  or  drilling, 
lined  with  the  same.  It  can  be  bound 
with  leather  or  braid,  and  decorated  with 
braid,  as  in  the  illustration,  Fig. 59.  Cut 
the  material  one  yard  and  ten  inches 
long,  and  twenty  -  three  inches  wide. 
Round  it  at  the  corners,  as  in  Fig.  60. 
The  pocket  on  the  outside  (see  Fig.  59) 
is  made  of  the  same  material  as  the 
case,  and  is  fastened  to  the  outside  be- 
FIG.  58.  fore  the  lining  is  put  in.  The  pocket  on 

the  inside  is  twenty-three  inches  wide  and  thirteen  inches 
deep,  rounded  at  two  corners  to  correspond  with  the  back. 
This  is  to  be  bound  across  the  top  before  fastening  it  to 
the  back,  which  is  done  with  the  binding  that  goes  around 


TRA  VELLING   CONVENIENCES. 


135 


the  case.     The  strip  for  the  umbrella  case  is  twenty-three 
inches  long  and  six  and  one  half  inches  wide  at  one  end, 


FIG.  59. 

sloping  down  to  five  inches  at  the  other.  This  is  divided 
into  two  compartments  by  a  row  of  herring-bone  through 
the  middle.  The  flaps-  (see  Fig.  60)  are  made  of  two  pieces 
of  the  material,  lined,  fifteen  inches  long  and  fourteen  and 
one  half  inches  wide.  These  are  fastened  together  with 


136  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

buttons  and  loops  of  elastic  ribbon.  A  small  bar  of  wood 
must  be  put  between  the  outside  and  lining  at  one  end 
of  the  case  and  stitched  in,  and  a  strong  handle,  either  of 
leather  or  of  the  material,  added.  Fasten  the  whole  v/ith 
leather  straps. 

THE  RIDDLE  FAN.  —  This  is  a  very  pretty  present  for 
any  one  to  arrange  who  has  plenty  of  wit  and  remembers 
the  wit  of  others.  Take  a  pretty  Japanese  fan  that  opens 
and  shuts,  which  has  one  side  in  color  or  figured  and  the 
other  of  a  plain  white.  Common  five-cent  fans  would 
answer  the  purpose,  of  plain  brown,  or  else  of  some  attrac- 
tive pattern  on  one  side,  and  on  the  other  you  are  to  write 
out  as  great  a  number  of  riddles  in  the  shape  of  charades, 
anagrams,  and  conundrums  as  you  can  find.  Begin  by 
marking  over  your  fan  in  little  compartments,  each  of 
which  shall  contain  one  of  these  riddles  ;  these  divisions 
are  to  be  scattered  on,  much  as  with  the  separate  pieces 
of  crazy  patchwork.  Some  should  be  the  shape  of  a  narrow- 
visiting  card,  others  in  triangles  or  squares,  put  on  slanting 
across  the  fan,  lapping  over  each  other  occasionally,  one  half 
covering  the  other.  A  good  way  to  arrange  it  would  be 
to  cut  out  in  paper  the  separate  pieces  and  lay  them  over 
the  fan  to  see  how  you  will  fit  them  ;  on  these  you  can 
experiment  to  see  if  you  have  room  enough  to  write  or 
print  your  riddle  on  it ;  the  outline  should  be  marked  out 
in  colors,  and  the  riddles  written  in  so  as  to  be  plainly  read. 
If  you  have  skill  enough,  you  can  paint  in  little  designs  to 
fit  in  the  corners.  You  will  need  some  time  for  prepara- 
tion, collecting  your  riddles  from  original  sources  when 
you  can.  Riddle  books  sold  at  fairs  often  contain  very 


TRAVELLING   CONVENIENCES.  1 37 

choice  specimens  never  before  printed,  that  you  will  find 
useful. 

A  riddle  fan  is  a  very  nice  present  to  give  a  friend  who 
is  going  to  travel,  as  it  is  a  very  entertaining  occupation  to 
puzzle  over  riddles,  charades,  or  conundrums  on  a  long 
journey  or  voyage.  If  you  wish  to  add  the  answers,  you 
can  put  them  on  the  back  of  the  fan  in  the  same  way, 
helter-skelter,  without  any  reference  to  the  riddles  them- 
selves, as  this  will  make  a  fresh  puzzle  to  find  the  right 
answers. 

We  give  a  French  puzzle,  "  the  history  of  Helen,"  to 
show  how  this  can  be  arranged.  This  should  be  printed 
as  though  on  the  cover  of  a  small  quarto  book  about  an 
inch  square. 

HISTOIRE  D  L.  N. 
LNEDPY 
LNETME 
LAVQ 
LADCD 

CONUNDRUM  CARDS. — A  pack  of  cards  made  up  in  the 
same  way  is  a  very  entertaining  companion  for  a  traveller, 
easily  carried  in  the  pocket.  Each  card  should  contain 
some  riddle,  conundrum,  rebus,  or  pictorial  puzzle. 


CHAPTER   XL 

WALL-POCKETS,    ETC. 

WALL-POCKET.  —  This  is  to  be  made  of  plush  over  card- 
board. For  the  front,  take  a  piece  of  cardboard  twelve 
inches  wide  and  five  inches  high  at  the  sides,  rounded  up 
to  seven  inches  in  the  middle.  This  is  to  be  covered  with 
olive-colored  plush,  which  must  be  twelve  inches  wide  and 
seven  inches  high,  allowing,  in  addition,  enough  for  the 
turning.  The  upper  edge  of  this  plush  is  left  straight,  to 
be  drawn  down  in  plaits  at  the  side,  as  in  Fig.  61.  This 
front  is  to  be  lined  with  plain  silk  of  old  gold  color.  For 
the  back,  cut  a  piece  of  cardboard  twelve  inches  wide  and 
five  inches  high  at  the  sides,  rounded  up  to  thirteen  inches 
at  the  middle.  This  is  to  be  covered  with  the  old  gold 
silk  laid  in  plaits,  as  in  the  illustration.  For  the  side 
pieces,  cut  two  pieces  of  cardboard  five  inches  high  on  the 
sides,  rounded  up  to  five  and  one  half  inches  at  the  middle, 
and  two  and  one  half  inches  wide  at  the  top,  sloping  down 
to  a  point  at  the  bottom.  The  outside  of  these  pieces  is 
to  be  covered  with  the  plush,  and  the  inside  with  the  silk. 
Put  front  and  back  together ;  put  in  the  side  pieces,  and 
cover  the  seams  with  a  large  silk  cord,  which  should  be 
made  into  loops  at  the  top  and  side,  and  ornamented  with 
silk  balls,  as  in  the  illustration.  Embroider  the  front  be- 


WALL-POCKETS,   ETC. 


139 


fore  putting  it  over  the  cardboard,  in  gold  thread,  in  any 
design  you  fancy.  The  back  must  be  lined  with  cambric. 
TOILET  WALL-POCKET.  —  Take  a  half  square  of  the 
material,  measuring  twenty-five  inches  on  each  straight 
side,  and  fold  across  the  diagonal  so  as  to  make  a  crease 
from  the  top  to  the  bottom  of  your  cloth.  From  this 


FIG.  61. 

crease  measure  four  and  one  quarter  inches  on  each  side, 
and  fold  your  material  on  one  side,  first  towards  the  centre 
and  then  back,  and  then  again  towards  the  centre.  Do 
the  same  on  the  other  side.  Stitch  together  the  two 
longest  folds  where  they  meet  in  the  centre  of  the  bag, 
and  stitch  the  next  longest  folds  to  the  outer  edges  of  the 
bag.  Unite  the  two  remaining  small  diagonals  at  the 


HO  THREE   HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 

centre.  Put  a  lining  on  the  back  and  bind  across  the  bot- 
tom. You  will  thus  have  five  pockets  which  can  be  used 
for  vide-poche,  brush  and  combs,  and  hair-pins.  This  can 
be  made  of  drilling,  and  embroidered  around  the  edge 
with  herring-bone.  A  monogram  may  be  worked  in  the 
corner.  If  chintz  is  used,  the  edge  can  be  bound  to  match 
the  bottom.  If  more  ornament  is  desired,  a  bow  can  be 
added  where  the  folds  meet  at  the  bottom,  to  match  one 
at  the  top. 

SPLASHER  WITH  POCKETS  FOR  WASHSTANDS.  —  This 
should  be  made  of  enamelled  cloth,  decorated  with  red 
flannel,  pinked,  as  in  the  illustration,  Fig.  62. 

FAN  WALL-POCKET.  —  A  palm-leaf  fan,  handle  upper- 
most, with  a  satin  or  cretonne  bag  sewn  to  it,  to  hold 
lamp-lighters,  letters,  or  a  little  dusting  brush,  makes  a 
pretty  wall-pocket.  The  cretonne  or  satin  is  sewn  on  full 
to  the  edge  of  the  fan,  but  left  open  at  the  top  just  below 
the  handle,  with  an  elastic  run  in,  and  a  ruche  or  frill  of 
lace  to  hide  it. 

A  LETTER-POCKET  can  be  made  of  two  wooden  plates. 
One  plate  is  used  for  the  back,  and  the  other  is  cut  in 
half  and  one  of  the  pieces  is  used  for  the  front.  Bore 
holes  at  equal  distances  all  around  the  whole  and  the  half 
plate,  and  join  these  by  interlacing  ribbon  through  the 
holes.  The  ribbon  is  also  carried  in  the  same  way  around 
the  remainder  of  the  back.  Put  bows  at  the  corners  of 
the  front. 

ORNAMENTAL  BELLOWS.  —  These  bellows  are  used  for 
dusting  china.  The  designs  are  worked  on  satin  or  plush 
in  outline  with  Japanese  gold  thread  or  colored  silk.  A 


WALL-POCKETS,  ETC. 


141 


good  effect  is  produced  by  carrying  out  the  leaves  and 
flowers  in  silk  or  filoselle,  and  by  outlining  or  touching 
up  the  same  with  fine  Japanese  gold.  The  bellows  are 


made  of  light  wood  or  strong  cardboard,  with  sides  of  soft 
leather  of  a  suitable  color,  and  the  embroidery  applied  to 
them  by  means  of  tiny  brass  or  nickel-headed  nails. 


I42  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

LETTER  Box.. — This  box,  as  shown  in  Fig.  63,  is  in- 
tended for  a  letter  receiver.  Answered  letters  are  to  be 
dropped  into  the  bag  below,  while  unanswered  ones  are 
kept  in  the  box  itself. 

Take  a  cigar  box  six  or  seven  inches  long,  four  or  five 
inches  wide,  and  two  and  one  half  inches  deep.     Cut  a  slit 
in  the  bottom  of  this  box  four 
and  one   half  inches    long  and 
one  half  an  inch  wide.     Line  or 
paint  the  inside  of  this  box,  and 
ornament  the  outside  with  paint- 
ing, or  cover  with  crochet  work 
or  lace.     Attach  to  the  bottom 
IL  I^WMXWS^S^S&W''*"''    a  ^aS  netted  of  macrame  twine 

<*  any  color  yo»  des^  Thisis 

to  be  done  according  to  the  rules 
for  round  and  round  netting,  giv- 
en in  Tilton's  Art-Needlework. 
Cast  on  in  Fisherman's  knot,  as 
there  described,  fifty  or  sixty 
stitches,  according  to  the  size  of 
your  box.  Continue  in  plain  net- 
ting forty-two  rows,  over  a  mesh 
one  and  one  quarter  inches  in 

circumference.  Draw  the  bag  up  at  the  bottom,  and 
finish  with  tassel  or  balls.  The  bag  can  be  attached  to 
the  box  by  making  holes  in  the  bottom  of  it,  which  can  be 
bored  either  with  a  small  gimlet  or  burned  with  a  red- 
hot  knitting-needle. 

A  pretty  cover  for  the  top  of  the  box  can  be  made  of  a 


WALL-POCKETS,  ETC.  143 

small  napkin  embroidered,  and  the  sides  can  be  decorated 
in  the  same  way.  Screw-eyes  should  be  screwed  to  the 
back  of  the  box  to  attach  it  to  the  wall. 

FOR  VISITING  MEMORANDA.  —  Make  a  case  to  hang 
against  the  wall.  For  this  take  a  piece  of  stiff  cardboard 
about  eight  inches  broad  and  five  and  one  half  inches  deep. 
Line  this  with  silk  or  brocade,  and  make  the  front  of  gilt 
canvas  eight  inches  square.  Turn  up  the  lower  edge  two 
and  one  half  inches.  Stitch  this  down  for  a  place  for  a 
pack  of  visiting-cards,  and  one  for  a  small  scratch-block 
for  memoranda.  Put  a  small  thermometer  in  the  middle 
above,  a  calendar  on  one  side  and  a  bow  of  ribbon  on  the 
other.  Finish  with  a  gold  cord  all  round,  and  attach  the 
top  to  a  gilt  rod,  to  hang  against  the  wall  by  a  chain,  to 
which  a  pencil  should  be  fastened  by  a  ribbon  or  chain. 

HANGING  SHELVES.  — •  Let  your  carpenter  make  a  small 
wooden  shelf  with  two  holes  in  each  end  for  the  cord  to 
hang  it  by..  Cover  the  shelf  with  any  material  you  like. 
Work  a  valance  of  the  same  material  in  crewels ;  finish 
the  bottom  either  in  points  or  with  a  fringe,  and  fasten  the 
valance  around  the  shelf  with  brass-headed  nails.  Pass 
the  cords  through  the  holes,  bring  them  together  at  the 
top  at  the  required  length,  and  tie  firmly.  Cover  the  knot 
with  a  bow  of  ribbon.  A  deep  macrame  fringe  makes  a 
handsome  valance.  Two  or  three  shelves  made  in  this 
way  and  strung  together  can  easily  be  packed  in  a  trunk, 
and  make  a  convenient  set  of  book  shelves  at  a  summer 
boarding-place. 

BURNT  MATCH  RECEIVERS. — These  can  be  made  of 
tin  spice  or  baking  powder  boxes.  The  tin  should  be  con- 


144 


THREE  HUArDRED   PRESENTS. 


cealed  by  a  cover  made  to  fit,  of  perforated  cardboard, 
either  silvered  or  plain.  Work  around  the  edges  some 
pretty  pattern  in  colored  silks  or  crewels.  Finish  the  top 
and  bottom  with  a  ruching  of  quilted  ribbon,  and  put  on  a 
ribbon  handle  to  hang  it  up  by. 

MATCH  SCRATCHERS.  —  Cut  a  piece  of  tinted  cardboard 
into  a  square  four  inches  on   the  sides.     Bind  this  with 

narrow  ribbon.  Cut  a 
circle  of  sand-paper  three 
inches  in  diameter,  and 
on  this  paint  some  device 
or  legend,  such  as  "  Merry 
Christmas,"  with  the  date 
of  the  year.  Paste  this 
firmly  on  the  cardboard, 
being  sure  to  have  it  ex- 
actly in  the  middle.  Punch 
two  holes  over  a  corner  of 
the  square,  and  put  in  a 
ribbon  to  hang  it  up  by. 

WATCH  AND  RING 
CASE.  —  The  watch  and 
ring  case  shown  in  the  illustration,  Fig.  64,  is  made  of  velvet, 
lined  with  silk.  The  dimensions  are,  for  the  back,  six  inches 
high  and  four  and  one  half  inches  wide.  Cut  the  back  out 
of  cardboard,  and  shape  as  in  Fig.  64.  Cover  with  velvet, 
and  line  the  back  with  silk.  For  the  pocket  at  the  bottom, 
to  hold  rings  or  other  trinkets,  cut  a  piece  of  velvet  six 
inches  wide  and  two  and  one  half  inches  high.  Line  this 
with  silk.  The  gores  at  the  side  are  made  of  velvet,  lined 


FIG.  64. 


WALL-POCKETS,  ETC.  1 45 

with  silk,  and  must  be  one  and  one  half  inches  wide  at  the 
top.  The  large  hook,  to  hang  the  watch  upon,  can  be  pro- 
cured at  any  of  the  variety  shops.  Sew  a  brass  ring  at  the 
back  to  hang  the  watch-case  up  by. 

OTHER  WATCH  CASES.  —  Other  watch  cases  are  made 
of  cardboard  covered  with  satin,  edged  round  with  a  thick 
silk  cord,  then  a  pretty  tatting  or  point  lace  design  made 
to  cover  the  satin. 

Another  style  is  of  quilted  satin,  pointed  at  top  and 
rounded  at  the  bottom,  edged  round  with  narrow  fringes, 
which  droop  over  the  top  very  prettily.  Sew  on  a  hook 
to  hang  the  watch  upon.  Crash  embroidered  with  silks 
or  wools  would  be  a  novel  and  effective  material  to  use. 

BOOT  CASE.  —  Cut  a  piece  of  stout  material  eighteen 
inches  long,  twelve  inches  deep ;  cut  another  piece  forty 
inches  by  twelve  inches  ;  form  this  latter  into  four  single 
box  plaits  two  and  one  half  inches  wide,  two  inches  apart, 
leaving  one  inch  of  material  at  either  end  ;  this  will  make 
it  eighteen  inches  long.  Tack  this  to  the  first  piece  down 
the  sides  and  bottom  :  the  plaits  form  four  receptacles  for 
boots  ;  stitch  strongly  down  between  eaqh.  Now  cut  out 
another  piece  eighteen  inches  long ;  form  it  into  four  shal- 
low scallops  ;  sew  this  on  the  top  to  make  flaps  ;  put  an 
eye  on  each  and  a  hook  on  the  stuff  below,  to  cover  the 
boots  from  dust.  Bind  all  with  braid,  put  a  ring  at  each 
corner  to  hang  up  on  the  wall. 


CHAPTER   XII. 

FOR    THE    WORK-TABLE. 

PEACH  BASKET  WORK-STAND.  —  For  this  you  will  need 
two  round,  wooden  peach-baskets  ;  also  a  block  of  wood  of 
any  size  or  thickness  needed  to  add  the  height  desired  for 
the  table.  To  this  block  nail  the  bottom  of  one  peach- 
basket  ;  then  turn  it  upside  down  and  nail  the  other  one 
to  the  other  side  of  the  block.  Your  table  is  now  ready 
for  the  cover.  The  cover  may  be  made  of  any  material 
you  choose.  One  of  the  baskets  must  be  lined.  It  would 
be  best  to  do  this  before  it  is  nailed  to  the  block.  If  cre- 
tonne or  chintz  is  used  for  the  cover,  Turkey  red  will  make 
a  suitable  lining.  Cover  the  outside  of  the  table  with  a 
piece  of  your  material,  enough  longer  than  the  table  is  high 
to  allow  for  tying  it  in  at  the  middle.  If  put  on  in  plaits, 
you  must  allow,  in  width,  for  three  times  the  circumfer- 
ence of  the  table.  If  it  is  only  slightly  fulled  on,  one  and 
one  half  will  be  sufficient.  Finish  around  the  top  with  a 
frill,  and  tie  at  the  middle  a  wide  ribbon  with  a  bow,  or 
a  silk  cord  and  tassel. 

BASKETS  AND  OTHER  ARTICLES  MADE  OF  HATS.  — Cheap 
straw  hats  can  be  decorated  prettily  and  made  to  serve 
various  uses.  One  way  is  to  make  them  up  into  work-bags 
by  lining  them  with  quilted  Turkey  twill,  with  a  ruche  of 
ecru  lace  at  the  edge,  and  points  of  the  Turkey  twill  but- 
146 


FOR    THE    WORK-TABLE.  147 

tonholed  with  coarse  red  thread,  turned  over,  and  fastened 
to  the  outside  of  the  hat.  At  each  point  put  some  orna- 
ment, either  a  hanging  cherry  made  of  red  worsted,  a  star 
of  ecru  thread,  a  single  artificial  daisy,  a  large  bead,  or  a 
tassel  of  wool.  Push  in  the  crown  to  enable  the  hat  basket 
to  stand,  and  finish  off  with  a  ruche  of  the  same  ecru  lace 
or  red  twill  round  it.  The  handles  are  of  rope,  covered 
with  the  Turkey  twill,  tightly  rolled  round  in  a  long  strip, 
or  merely  of  broad  red  braid. 

FOR  FLOWERS.  —  Another  way,  is  to  run  a  tolerably  stout 
wire  round  the  edge  of  the  hat,  and  sew  on  a  full  frill 
of  red,  blue,  ecru,  or  coffee-colored  lace,  to  fall  over,  lining 
the  inside  with  any  material.  Bend  the  wired  edges,  first 
into  a  square,  and  then  round  the  corners,  and  indent  the 
sides.  Fix  four  little  common  glass  tumblers  into  the  cor- 
ners with  wire  or  network  of  coarse  cotton  stitches  passed 
backward  and  forward,  and  add  a  round  finger-glass  or 
some  other  shaped  glass  in  the  centre,  filling  up  the  entire 
basket  with  hay  or  wadding,  or  hiding  the  glass  with  a 
layer  of  artificial  green  moss.  The  stuffing  must  be 
pushed  in  tolerably  tight  to  keep  the  glasses  in  their  places. 
The  crossed  handles,  tied  at  the  top  with  a  large  bow,  must 
come  from  the  four  sides,  and  be  of  wire  covered  with 
some  color,  finished  off  at  their  ends  with  four  little  bows. 
This  flower  receptacle  looks  extremely  pretty  on  a  table. 

TOILET  PINCUSHION.  —  A  toilet  pincushion  may  be  made 
out  of  the  same  shaped  hat  by  being  prettily  trimmed  with 
any  color  desired,  and  cream  lace,  a  glass  for  flowers  being 
in  one  corner,  a  case  containing  scissors  and  button-hook 
in  another,  a  smelling  bottle  in  a  third,  and  a  pocket  for 


14  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

rings,  etc.,  in  the  fourth.  In  the  centre  a  large  round  pin- 
cushion trimmed  to  match.  No  handles,  but  bows  at  the 
indented  sides. 

Other  hats  have  a  bag  with  a  drawstring  fixed  to  the 
edges,  which  holds  all  sorts  of  things,  and  are  ornamented 
outside  with  applique  leaves  and  flowers  in  cloth  or 
worsted. 

FELT  HATS.  —  The  soft  felt  tennis  hats,  recently  so 
fashionable,  can  be  transformed  into  tasteful  work-bags 
by  being  lined  with  velveteen  or  satin,  the  edges  turned 
over  the  sides  in  points,  finished  off  with  feather-stitching, 
and  a  silk  cord  forming  the  handles,  as  well  as  bordering 
the  edges  all  round. 

CHIMNEY-POT  HATS.  —  The  old  chimney-pot  hat  may  be 
converted  into  a  smart  work-basket  by  being  lined  with 
drawn  satin,  covered  outside  with  drawn  plush,  and  fin- 
ished off  with  a  full  flounce  of  rather  deep  coffee-colored 
lace.  A  broad  ribbon  tied  in  the  centre  in  a  bow  forms 
the  handle,  and  a  thick  ruche  is  fastened  to  the  inside  of 
the  brim.  The  plain  circular  piece  of  plush  covering  the  top 
of  the  hat  is  put  on  first,  and  then  the  full  piece  sewn  to  it. 
A  bag  can  be  sewn  round  the  inside  of  the  hat,  drawing 
with  a  string,  but  this  is  not  necessary.  Discarded  straw 
sailor  hats  can  be  decorated  in  the  same  way. 

HOUSEWIFE.  —  Cut  from  kid  or  enamelled  cloth  a  strip 
twelve  inches  long  and  three  and  one  half  inches  wide, 
and  the  same  of  flannel  for  the  lining.  Stitch  these  to- 
gether on  the  machine,  in  as  ornamental  a  way  as  possible, 
and  pink  the  edges.  Take  the  cover  of  a  square  paste- 
board box  three  inches  long  on  each  side,  and  three  quar- 


FOR    THE    WORK-TABLE. 


ters  inch  high.  Cover  the  sides 
smoothly  with  a  strip  of  flannel 
one  quarter  inch  in  width,  but 
long  enough  to  allow  of  plaits  in 
the  corner,  as  in  the  illustration, 
Fig.  65.  This  must  be  cut  into 
points  at  the  top  and  bottom. 
Make  a  cover  to  fit,  of  paste- 
board, to  which  a  cushion  is 
attached  made  of  layers  of  flan- 
nel the  shape  of  the  cover,  each 
one  being  cut  a  trifle  smaller 
than  the  last,  to  give  a  rounded 
form  to  the  cushion.  Make  a 
depression  in  the  centre  to  re- 
ceive the  thimble.  Cover  this 
cushion  with  flannel,  cut  large 
enough  to  allow  of  being  notched 
on  the  edges.  Attach  it  to  the 
cushion  with  French  knots  of 
embroidery  silk.  Fasten  to  the 
back  of  the  box,  with  sewing- 
silk  loops  or  narrow  ribbon. 
When  completed,  the  box  must 
be  placed  in  the  middle  of  the 
outside  case,  and  fastened  to  it 
by  sewing  the  points  cut  in  the 
flannel  strip  put  around  the 
sides,  to  the  lining,  by  a  French 
knot,  worked  in  every  point. 
149 


FIG.  65. 


ISO  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

Cover  one  end  of  the  case  with  a  piece  of  flannel  three 
inches  square,  notched  and  worked,  as  in  Fig.  65.  Fasten 
this  to  the  lining  on  three  sides,  leaving  the  fourth  open  to 
receive  the  papers  of  needles,  for  which  pockets  are  made 
as  in  the  illustration.  On  the  remaining  portion  of  this 
flannel,  put  on  bands  of  flannel,  divided  by  seams  of  her- 
ring-bone into  spaces  to  hold  the  scissors  and  other  neces- 
sary implements. 

For  leaves  for  needles,  at  the  other  end  of  the  case,  cut 
two  pieces  of  flannel  six  inches  long  and  three  inches  wide. 
Put  these  together  and  fold  across  the  middle.  Cut  the 
leaves  so  that  each  shall  be  smaller  than  the  last.  Chain- 
stitch  them  firmly  together  on  the  folded  side.  Notch  and 
ornament  them  with  herring-bone.  To  fasten  them  to  the 
housewife,  take  a  ribbon  one  half  inch  wide  and  one  half 
yard  long.  Attach  this  to  the  lining  with  herring-bone  at 
the  middle  and  one  half  inch  from  each  edge.  Make  an 
eyelet  through  the  uncut  side  of  the  leaves,  one  quarter 
inch  from  each  edge.  Pass  the  ribbon  through  and  tie 
with  a  bow.  When  finished  fasten  the  housewife  together 
with  an  elastic  band. 

BELLOWS  NEEDLE-BOOK.  —  Cut  out  of  cardboard  two 
pieces  three  and  one  half  inches  long  and  two  and  one 
quarter  inches  wide.  Shape  these  into  the  form  of  a  pair 
of  bellows,  and  cover  with  sage-green  velvet.  Line  these 
pieces  with  red  satin  drawn  smoothly  over  stiff  paper,  as 
in  making  a  pin-ball.  Over-seam  the  outside  and  lining 
together.  Make  leaves  of  fine  white  flannel  or  kersymere, 
and  buttonhole  them  around  the  edge.  Fasten  the  two 
sides  of  the  bellows  together  at  the  bottom  by  over-seaming, 


FOR    THE    WORK-TABLE.  151 

leaving,  however,  in  the  centre  an  open  space  one  eighth 
inch  wide  for  a  bodkin  to  go  through,  which  will  make  the 
nose  of  the  bellows.  Cut  out  of  red  leather  or  silk  a  wafer 
to  paste  on  the  back  side,  to  simulate  the  air-trap.  Tie  rib- 
bon around  the  handles  and  the  bottom,  in  imitation  of  the 
leather  on  a  pair  of  real  bellows.  Fill  the  sides  with  pins. 
NEEDLE-BOOK.  —  This  needle-book  can  be  made  either 
of  silver  canvas  or  perforated  cardboard,  ornamented  with 
point  Russe  stitches  of  black, 
red,  and  gold  filling  silk.  It  is 
to  be  lined  with  siljc  of  one  of 
these  colors.  Cut  two  pieces 
of  canvas,  which  should  be  two 
and  three  quarters  inches  long 
in  the  middle,  three  inches  wide 
at  the  bottom,  sloping  to  two 
inches  wide  at  the  top.  The 
lower  part  must  be  curved  as  in 
illustration,  Fig.  66.  Cut  the 
lining  for  these  two  sides  in  one 
piece,  a  little  larger  than  the 
canvas  to  allow  for  turning  in 

MG.   66. 

on  the  edges  all  the  way  round. 

Be  careful  however  not  to  cut  the  silk  open  at  the  top,  as 
the  additional  material  thus  allowed  forms  a  back  like  that 
of  a  book  into  which  should  be  sewed  leaves  of  white 
flannel  for  needles. 

A  SMALL  NEEDLE-CASE  for  holding  materials  needed 
for  mending  and  repairing,  can  be  made  very  convenient  for 
travelling,  as  in  Fig.  67.  Cut  of  Panama  canvas,  or  per- 


152 


THREE  HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 


forated  cardboard,  eight  pieces  from  three  to  four  inches 
long  and  two  and  one  half  inches  wide.  Embroider  in  cross- 
stitch  two  of  the  pieces  to  serve  for  the  upper  and  lower 
sides  of  the  case,  and  trim  all  the  pieces  with  plain  brown 
silk.  Turn  in  the  edges  of  the  silk,  and  attach  them  to  the 
canvas  or  cardboard  in  deep  buttonhole  stitches  taken  at 
regular  distances.  The  pieces  are  then  attached  to  each 
other  on  the  long  sides,  as  in  illustration,  by  sewing  them 


FIG.  67. 

together  at  the  buttonhole  stitches,  which  should  be  taken 
so  regularly  as  to  meet  where  the  different  pieces  are  joined. 
Sew  to  one  of  the  middle  pieces,  a  piece  of  flannel  notched 
round  the  edge.  Across  the  other  pieees  put  on  two  rows  of 
silk  galloon,  embroidered  in  herring-bone.  These  bands  are 
to  be  caught  down  to  hold  rows  of  pins,  cards  of  shirt  and 
other  buttons,  a  paper  of  needles,  and  card  of  linen  threads, 
as  in  the  illustration.  One  or  two  needles  should  be 
threaded  with  linen  thread  or  cotton  ready  for  use.  It 
would  be  well  to  have  a  darning-needle  among  the  needles, 


FOR    THE    WORK-TABLE.  153 

and  a  flat  card  of  darning-cotton  of  some  serviceable  color. 
The  case  should  be  tied  together  with  ribbon,  as  in  Fig.  68, 
and  can  be  made  larger  or  smaller  as  is  needed,  but  should 
be  very  compact.  It  is  a  pretty  case  for  children  to 
make,  varying  the  materials  to  suit  the  emergencies  for 
which  they  are  needed. 

A  FRIEND  IN  NEED.  —  This  is  a  work-case  made  of  a 
number  of  pockets,  folded  into  book  shape  as  follows.  Cut 
out  of  strong  drilling  a  strip  forty  inches  long  and  thirteen 
inches  wide.  Turn  up  one  of  the  long  sides  of  this  strip 
four  and  three  quarters  inches,  and  divide  into  spaces  five 
inches  wide,  to 
make  eight  pock- 
ets. Stitch  these 
divisions  with  red 
silk.  Turn  down 
the  other  side  three 
and  one-eighth  of 
an  inch  and  cut  into 
scallops  five  inches  wide,  to  make  the  flaps  to  the  pockets. 
Bind  these  scallops  and  the  sides  with  red  tape.  In  the 
middle  of  each  scallop  make  a  buttonhole,  and  sew  a 
button  to  correspond  on  the  pocket.  Mark  with  indelible 
ink,  or  in  cross-stitch  with  red  cotton,  on  each  flap,  one  of 
the  following  names, — Needles,  Thread,  Pins,  Buttons, 
Sewing-silk  and  Twist,  Tape,  Cotton,  Elastic.  For  the 
back  of  the  book  cut  two  pieces  four  and  one  half  inches 
long,  two  and  five  eighths  inches  wide.  Round  off  the 
corners,  bind  each  piece  with  red  tape.  On  one  fasten  near 
the  outer  edges  the  first  and  last  dividing  seams  in  the 


154 


THREE   HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 


row  of  pockets,  and  also  the  third  and  fifth  dividing  seams 
three  quarters  inch  from  these  outer  ones.  Cover  the 
stitches  thus  made  on  the  back  with  the  second  piece,  cut 
for  the  back,  by  over-seaming  it  to  the  first  one.  Leave  a 
space  open,  however,  at  the  top  and  you  will  have  a  pocket 
for  scissors  and  knife.  On  the  back  mark  in  ink  or  cotton 
the  title,  A  Friend  in  Need.  A  mono- 
gram or  appropriate  device  can  be 
drawn  or  worked  on  the  covers.  Close 
your  book  and  fasten  with  strings  of 
red  tape  sewed  to  either  edge. 

SCISSORS  CASE.  —  Cut  a  piece  of 
gray  drilling  fourteen  inches  long,  and 
one  and  a  half  inches  at  the  bottom, 
sloping  up  to  seven  and  one  quarter 
inches  at  the  top,  from  which  place  the 
material  should  slope  down  again  to  a 
point  for  the  cover.  Embroider  this 
cover  with  the  design  in  the  illustra- 
tion, Fig.  69.  Line  with  brown  silk, 
putting  in,  as  far  as  where  the  cover 
begins,  an  interlining  of  some  stiff  ma- 
terial. The  pocket  pieces  are  to  be  bound  with  brown 
satin  ribbon,  and  placed  as  shown  in  illustration,  Fig.  70. 
Cut  the  side  pieces  seven  inches  long  and  one  inch  wide, 
and  shape  as  in  illustration.  These  are  to  be  bound  with 
satin  ribbon,  and  fastened  on  the  sides  of  the  pockets. 
Finish  with  a  bow  of  brown  satin  ribbon,  as  in  Fig.  69. 

CASE  FOR  CREWELS  —  Crewel   cases  can    be    made   of 
crash,  embroidered  with  a  monogram  and  flower  design. 


FIG.  69. 


FOR    THE    WORK-TABLE. 


155 


A  narrow  slip  of  crash  must  be  put  on  the  inside,  forming 
divisions  for  the  wools,  which  can  be  easily  drawn  into 
these  with  a  long  flat  needle  which  comes  for  the  purpose, 
or  a  large  crochet  needle.  Leaves  of  flannel  are  tacked  to 
the  sides  for  crewel  needles.  Black  satin,  feather-stitched 
between  the  runners,  with  a  mono- 
gram  worked  in  old  gold,  makes  a 
handsome  one. 

SLIPPER  WORK-CASE.  —  A  work- 
case  can  be  made  in  the  shape  of 
a  dressing-slipper  by  cutting  out  two 
thin  pieces  of  cardboard  for  the  soles, 
and  covering  one  with  brown  holland 
and  the  other  with  white  silk  or  cash- 
mere, and  sewing  them  together  with 
white  silk;  this  forms  a  pincushion. 
The  front  part  of  the  slipper  is  also 
of  cardboard,  covered  with  velvet  or 
satin,  and  embroidered  with  colored 
silks  or  beads.  Sew  this  to  the  sole, 
and  stitch  round  the  open  part  a  piece  of  silk  large  enough 
to  draw  up  into  a  bag,  which  will  hold  the  work.  Now 
fasten  some  bands  of  white  elastic  across  the  heel  part  of 
the  sole  to  hold  the  thimble,  packets  of  needles,  scissors, 
etc. 

SUNFLOWER  PINCUSHIONS.  —  Pretty  round  pincushions 
can  be  made  in  semblance  of  a  sunflower.  Make  the 
petals  of  yellow  cloth,  each  one  curled  and  fastened 
together  like  a  grocer's  miniature  paper  bag,  with  the  top 
open  and  pointed,  and  arranged  round  a  stuffed  circular 


1 56  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

cushion  of  brown  velvet  or  velveteen,  with  a  frayed  row  of 
gold-colored  silk  sewn  on  round  the  centre,  which  is 
studded  with  pins.  The  whole  is  the  size  of  a  large  real 
sunflower. 

BOLSTER  PINCUSHION.  —  A  tiny  bolster-pillow,  like  illus- 
tration No.  71,  is  an  ornamental  form  of  pincushion  which 
can  hang  by  its  cord  to  a  looking-glass  frame.  For  direc- 
tions how  to  make  this  cushion,  see  Bolster-Pillows.  This 

small  cushion  should 
measure  about  six  inches 
from  end  to  end. 

EMERY  CUSHIONS.  — 
The  old  strawberry  pat- 
tern is  a  very  good  one. 
Make  the  shape  first 
with  calico,  and  stuff 

FIG.  71.  .   ,  , 

with    emery    powder. 

Cover  this  with  red  merino ;  the  seeds  in  yellow  silk,  or 
tiny  yellow  beads.  The  calyx  must  be  green  merino,  and 
the  stalk  must  be  done  over  wire.  They  are  often  worked 
in  single  crochet,  with  red  and  green  shaded  wool,  having 
first  threaded  the  yellow  beads  on  the  red  wool,  and  in- 
troducing them  as  seen  in  a  real  strawberry. 

SHELL  PINCUSHIONS,  ETC.  —  Pairs  of  cockles,  mussels, 
and  what  are  commonly  called  "sailor's  tobacco  boxes," 
can  be  made  into  needle-books,  penwipers,  or  pincushions. 
Two  holes  must  be  drilled  in  each  shell  with  a  large  needle, 
or  the  point  of  a  penknife,  to  put  a  ribbon  through  for  a 
hinge.  Penwipers  will  require  either  some  leaves  of  cloth 
or  a  bunch  of  silk  to  be  fastened  between  the  shells.  Pin- 


FOR    THE    WORK-TABLE.  157 

cushions  must  have  a  cushion  to  fit  the  pair  of  shells, 
made  in  the  following  manner  :  Cut  two  pieces  of  strong 
cotton  the  same  shape  as  the  shells  but  a  little  larger ; 
sew  the  two  pieces  together,  leaving  a  small  opening  ; 
turn  the  bag  and  stuff  it  with  ends  of  silk,  cotton,  or  wool ; 
finish  sewing  it  up,  and  cover  with  a  piece  of  silk  or  velvet. 
Tie  the  pair  of  shells  together,  glue  the  insides,  and  put 
the  little  cushion  between  them ;  press  them  together,  and 
bind  with  a  piece  of  string  till  dry.  Needle-books  will  re- 
quire leaves  of  flannel  or  cashmere  overcast  with  silk,  or 
nicked  all  round,  to  be  inserted  between  the  shells. 

ENGLISH  WALNUT  SHELL  PINCUSHIONS.  —  Dainty  little 
pincushions  can  be  made  out  of  walnut-shells  thus  : 
Scrape  the  inside  of  the  shell  till  quite  smooth,  then  stuff 
a  little  bag  of  some  bright-colored  material  with  wadding, 
making  it,  as  nearly  as  possible,  the  shape  of  the  shell ; 
sew  to  this  a  handle,  —  a  bit  of  narrow  cap  wire,  covered, 
answers  the  purpose,  —  then  drop  a  little  liquid  gum  into 
the  bottom  of  the  shell,  and  press  the  cushion,  which 
should  look  like  a  small  basket,  into  it. 

BUTTERFLY  PINCUSHION.  —  A  pretty  parlor  pincush- 
ion to  pin  to  the  curtains  can  be  made  to  simulate  a  but- 
terfly, the  body  forming  the  cushion.  Velvet  is  the  best 
material  for  this.  The  spots  on  the  insect's  wings  must 
be  imitated  on  the  velvet  in  silks  of  the  right  colors,  and 
rings  of  silk  fastened  around  the  body.  Beads  are  good 
for  the  eyes,  and  the  antennas  are  made  of  long  bristles. 

POCKET  PINCUSHIONS.  —  Cut  two  circles  two  inches  in 
diameter  out  of  cardboard.  Cut  a  piece  of  flannel  of  the 
same  size.  Cover  the  cardboards  with  silk  or  satin.  This 


IS8  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

is  best  done  by  cutting  out  your  cover  one  half  inch  larger 
than  the  cardboard,  and  running  a  thread  around  the  edge 
with  which  to  draw  it  tightly  over  the  cardboard.  Fasten 
this  firmly  and  smoothly  in  place  by  passing  threads  back 
and  forth  across  the  back  from  different  points.  Place  the 
flannel  between  the  two  cards  and  over-seam  them  together. 
The  outside  can  be  decorated  with  embroidery  or  painting. 
(For  directions  for  painting  on  silk  see  Tilton's  Self-In- 
structive Lessons).  Two  pins  with  colored  glass  heads 
crossed  is  an  appropriate  design  ;  souvenir  is  good  ;  also 
flowers,  a  little  landscape,  or  a  ship  on  the  sea. 

BRAIDS  OF  SEWING-SILK.  —  Select  a  dozen  skeins  of 
Italian  sewing-silk  of  the  colors  most  useful  for  mending 
gloves  and  dresses.  Braid  these  together.  Cut  the  skeins 
open  at  each  end  and  tie  firmly  with  strong  linen  thread 
two  and  one  half  inches  from  the  ends.  Cover  the  thread 
with  ribbons  tied  in  bows.  The  skeins  will  probably 
need  folding  together  once  before  braiding  them,  as  when 
done  the  braid  should  not  be  over  twelve  or  fourteen 
inches  long. 

FOR  USING  UP  ODDS  AND  ENDS  OF  VELVETS,  ETC. — 
For  using  up  odds  and  ends  of  velvet,  plush,  cloth,  and 
colored  filoselle  and  other  silk,  we  would  mention  a  kind 
of  fancy  work  which  can  easily  be  done,  and  is  particularly 
suited  to  elderly  ladies,  or  any  others  whose  eyesight  is  not' 
very  strong.  Rough,  colored  serge  of  some  good  color 
forms  the  foundation,  and  on  it  there  are  designs  of  large 
acorns,  bursting  chestnut-pods,  oranges,  pomegranates,  and 
many  other  things,  raised  by  means  of  padding,  edged  with 
gold  cord  or  silk  stitching,  and  composed  of  scraps  which 


FOR    THE    WORK-TABLE.  159 

are  usually  thrown  away  as  too  small  to  use.  The  leaves 
are  of  scraps  of  diagonal  cloth,  serge,  etc.,  and  the  fruit 
usually  of  the  velvet.  The  padding  can  be  made  from  the 
tiniest  scraps,  cut  into  the  minutest  of  pieces.  Dyed  blan- 
kets can  be  utilized  in  this  style,  and  form  curtains,  cou- 
vre-pieds,  carriage-rugs,  chair-backs,  bags  for  scraps,  table 
cloths,  and  other  things.  A  little  taste  and  skill  in  arrang- 
ing a  design  are  required,  but  the  work  is  extremely  easy. 
A  perambulator  cover  of  dark  green  or  blue,  with  oranges 
or  cherries,  would  look  well,  or  a  cot  quilt  of  pale  blue. 

MILK  PAILS.  —  These  are  used  as  receptacles  for  needle- 
work in  the  drawing-room,  and  are  wider  at  the  base  than 
at  the  top,  and  provided  on  each  side  with  two  handles  or 
ears,  the  apertures  of  which  allow  the  fingers  to  pass 
through  and  easily  carry  the  pails  about.  For  drawing- 
room  use,  however,  thick  cord  in  bright  contrasting  color 
is  passed  double  through  the  holes  and  knotted  in  the  cen- 
tre, being  finished  off  with  knobs  or  tassels,  as  the  case 
may  be,  and  thus  forming  a  sling  handle  by  which  the 
pail  can  be  held  in  the  centre.  The  inside  of  the  recepta- 
cle has  a  slightly  wadded  lining  of  cashmere,  silk,  or  satin 
in  bright  hue,  arranged,  as  taste  prefers,  in  plaits  or  honey- 
combing. But  it  is  on  the  outside  that  the  skill  of  the 
amateur  artist  is  expended.  It  can  be  washed  over,  wood 
and  hoops  indiscriminately,  with  any  of  the  popular  wood 
stains,  and  on  this  colored  ground  may  be  thrown  some 
bold  design,  the  floral  ones  being  most  appropriate,  either 
placed  circularly  within  the  belts  as  wreaths,  or,  still  better 
in  style,  starting  from  the  very  base  and  branching  up- 
wards over  hoops  and  wood  unbrokenly.  Thus,  an  ebon- 


160  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

ized  pail  is  ornamented  with  some  effective  bloom,  as  lilies, 
sunflowers,  irises,  etc.,  a  mahogany  one  with  blush  roses  or 
bunches  of  hawthorn. 

MILKING  STOOLS. — These  make  an  ornamental  little 
seat,  and  are  particularly  pretty  in  a  room  with  the  milk 
pails  described  above.  The  usual  plan  is  to  cover  them 
with  some  dark  paint, —  generally  black,  green,  or  red, — 
and  on  these  to  paint  daffodils,  or  sunflowers,  or  apple  blos- 
soms, or  flags  in  oil.  Procure  the  prepared  house  paints 
sold  in  half  pound  tins  ;  mix  any  tint  you  may  wish  for  the 
ground  ;  the  wood  should  not  be  very  coarse  in  the  grain  ; 
put  on  first  a  light  coat  of  thin  glue,  then  lay  on  your 
ground  evenly,  and  when  dry  paint  your  subject,  or  deco- 
rate them  with  scraps  or  with  oil  painting.  Floral  orna- 
ment is  almost  exclusively  used  for  this  purpose,  the  legs 
being  either  left  plain,  or  adorned  with  small  repeats  of 
the  blossoms,  sometimes  detached,  and  in  other  cases  ar- 
ranged in  tapering  trails. 

PAILS  FOR  WORK-BASKETS.  —  Ordinary-sized  wooden 
pails  can  be  converted  into  receptacles  for  work  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner  :  a  piece  of  satin  drawn  in  a  frill  round  the 
top,  and  fastened  with  small  tacks,  and  drawn  in  again 
with  a  drawstring  round  the  bottom,  and  again  secured  ; 
a  ruche  round  the  top  and  bottom,  and  satin  ribbon  twisted 
round  the  handle.  A  top  of  cardboard,  covered  neatly 
with  satin,  with  a  ruche  round  the  edge  and  a  fall  of  lace, 
is  attached  by  a  ribbon  on  one  side,  so  that  it  comes  off, 
and  hangs  down  when  the  receptacle  is  to  be  used.  It 
is  not  necessary  to  have  a  handle,  as  these  pails  are  gen- 
erally kept  in  one  place,  by  the  side  of  a  chair  or  in  the 


FOR    THE    WORK-TABLE.  l6l 

customary  place  of  the  lady  who  owns  it,  as  it  is  heavy  to 
move.  It  is  extremely  useful  for  keeping  wools  in,  or  a 
piece  of  work  that  is  only  occasionally  taken  up.  Black 
satin,  with  a  'ruche  of  gold  colored  satin  round  the  edge, 
with  a  fall  of  cream  colored  lace,  looks  well  and  suits  all 
furniture,  though  all  red  or  blue  is  very  pretty  and  bright 
looking. 

BASKET  PAILS  can  be  had  or  made  at  any  basket  shop, 
and  these  are  much  lighter  than  the  others,  and  can  be 
easily  carried  about  in  the  hand.  They  are  often  used 
now  for  carrying  lawn-tennis  balls  to  the  lawn.  A  piece 
of  embroidered  crash,  sheeting,  or  serge,  or  a  broad 
band  of  patchwork  can  be  utilized  for  covering,  or  pretty 
cretonne.  They  are  pretty  also  for  keeping  wood  in  by  a 
drawing-room  or  bed-room  fire.  It  is  much  the  fashion 
now  to  gild  them,  which  can  be  done  by  the  lady  herself 
with  Bessemer's  gold,  though  it  is  best  to  get  it  done  by 
.a  professional  'hand  if  possible. 


CHAPTER     XIII. 

FAIR    SUGGESTIONS. 

IN'  every  fair,  whatever  is  its  object,  the  effort  is  to 
offer  something  novel  and  entertaining,  so  as  to  interest 
the  visitors  of  the  fair,  and  lead  them  to  purchase  articles 
and  contribute  to  the  cause  almost  unconsciously,  so  that 
they  can  spontaneously  exclaim  that  the  entertainment  is 
indeed  "worth  the  price  of  admission." 

PRELIMINARY  ENTERTAINMENTS  are  very  frequent,  such 
as  amateur  concerts  and  theatricals,  private  sales  at  houses, 
in  order  to  raise  funds  for  the  fair  itself.  Among  these 
entertainments,  one  of  the  most  attractive  is 

THE  FAN  BRIGADE.  This  can  be  got  up  in  a  small  hall, 
with  little  or  no  expense  to  the  performers,  or  it  is  a 
pretty  performance  in  a  private  house  when  the  rooms  are 
large  enough.  The  programme  for  the  Fan  Brigade  is 
taken  from  a  paper  written  by  Addison  himself  for  The 
Spectator,  No.  102,  and  there  can  be  no  better  descrip- 
tion of  the  method  of  carrying  it  out  than  the  original 
paper,  which  is  an  entertainment  in  itself  in  the  charm  of 
its  style  and  wit.  The  costume  should  be  that  of  the  time 
of  Addison  (the  date  of  this  paper  is  June  27,  171 1),  giving 
occasion  for  very  picturesque  and  coquettish  dress.  It 
should  be  carefully  rehearsed  before  the  performance,  and 
the  drill  should  be  superintended  by  some  one  skilled  in 
162 


FAIR  SUGGESTIONS.  163 

the  art  of  drilling,  who  should  preface  the  performance 
with  the  very  words  of  the  article  in  The  Spectator,  going 
out  at  the  end,  and  coming  back  to  advertise  his  little 
treatise  the  "  Passions  of  the  Fan,"  and  his  "  Plain  Fans  " 
for  service,  closing  with  the  general  review,  for  which 
the  regiment  should  be  well  prepared. 

"  Women  are  armed  with  fans  as  men  with  swords,  and 
sometimes  do  more  execution  with  them.  To  the  end, 
therefore,  that  ladies  may  be  entire  mistresses  of  the 
weapon  which  they  bear,  I  have  erected  an  Academy  for 
the  training  of  young  women  in  the  EXERCISE  OF  THE  FAN, 
according  to  the  most  fashionable  airs  and  motions  that 
are  now  practised  at  court ;  the  ladies  who  carry  fans  under 
me  are  drawn  up  twice  a  day  in  my  great  hall,  where  they 
are  instructed  in  the  use  of  their  arms,  and  exercised  by 
the  following  words  of  command:  — 

Handle  your  Fans.  Ground  your  Fans. 

Unfurl  your  Fans.  Reverse  your  Fans. 

Discharge  your  Fans.  Flutter  your  Fans. 

"  By  the  right  observation  of  these  few  plain  words  of 
command,  a  woman  of  a  tolerable  genius  who  will  apply 
herself  diligently  to  her  exercise  for  the  space  of  but  one 
half  year,  shall  be  able  to  give  her  fan  all  the  graces  that 
can  possibly  enter  into  that  little  modish  machine.  But 
to  the  end  that  my  readers  may  form  to  themselves  a 
right  notion  of  this  exercise,  I  beg  leave  to  explain  it  to 
them  in  all  its  parts.  When  my  female  regiment  is  drawn 
up  in  array  with  every  one  her  weapon  in  her  hand,  upon 
my  giving  the  word  to  Handle  their  Fans,  each  of  them 


164  THREE   HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 

shakes  her  fan  at  me  with  a  smile,  then  gives  her  right- 
hand  woman  a  tap  upon  the  shoulder,  then  presses  her 
lips  with  the  extremity  of  her  fan,  then  lets  her  arms  fall 
in  an  easy  motion,  and  stands  in  a  readiness  to  receive  the 
next  word  of  command.  All  this  is  done  with  a  close  fan, 
and  is  generally  learned  in  the  first1  week. 

"The  next  motion  is  that  of  UNFURLING  THE  FAN,  in 
which  are  comprehended  several  little  flirts  and  vibrations, 
as  also  gradual  and  deliberate  openings,  with  many  volun- 
tary fallings  asunder  in  the  fan  itself,  that  are  seldom 
learned  under  a  month's  practice.  This  part  of  the  exer- 
cise pleases  the  spectators  more  than  any  other,  as  it  dis- 
covers on  a  sudden  an  infinite  number  of  Cupids,  garlands, 
altars,  birds,  beasts,  rainbows,  and  the  like  agreeable 
figures  that  display  themselves  to  view,  whilst  every  one 
in  the  regiment  holds  a  picture  in  her  hand. 

"  Upon  my  giving  the  word  to  DISCHARGE  THEIR  FANS, 
they  give  one  general  crack  that  may.  be  heard  at  a 
considerable  distance  when  the  wind  sits  fair.  This  is 
one  of  the  most  difficult  parts  of  the  exercise ;  but  I 
have  several  ladies  with  me,  who  at  their  first  entrance 
could  not  give  a  pop  loud  enough  to  be  heard  at  the  far- 
ther end  of  the  room,  who  can  now  Discharge  a  Fan 
in  such  a  manner  that  it  shall  make  a  report  like  a 
pocket-pistol.  I  have  likewise  taken  care  (in  order  to 
hinder  young  women  from  letting  off  their  fans  in  wrong 
places  or  unsuitable  occasions)  to  show  upon  what  sub- 
ject the  crack  of  a  fan  may  come  in  properly  ;  I  have 
likewise  invented  a  fan,  with  which  a  girl  of  sixteen, 
by  the  help  of  a  little  wind  which  is  inclosed  about  one  of 


FAIR  SUGGESTIONS.  165 

the  largest  sticks,  can  make  as  loud  a  crack  as  a  woman 
of  fifty  with  an  ordinary  fan. 

"When  the  fans  are  discharged,  the  word  of  command 
in  course  is  to 

"  GROUND  THEIR  FANS.  This  teaches  a  lady  to  quit  her 
fan  gracefully  when  she  throws  it  aside  to  take  up  a  pack 
of  cards,  adjust  a  curl  of  hair,  replace  a  falling  pin,  or  apply 
herself  to  any  other  matter  of  importance.  This  part  of 
the  exercise,  as  it  only  consists  in  tossing  a  fan  with  an  air 
upon  a  long  table  (which  stands  by  for  that  purpose),  may 
be  learned  in  two  days'  time  as  well  as  in  a  twelvemonth. 

"When  my  female  regiment  is  thus  disarmed,  I  generally 
let  them  walk  about  the  room  for  some  time,  when  on  a 
sudden  (like  ladies  that  look  upon  their  watches  after  a 
long  visit)  they  all  of  them  hasten  to  their  arms,  catch 
them  up  in  a  hurry,  and  place  themselves  in  their  proper 
stations  upon  my  calling  out  RECOVER  YOUR  FANS.  This 
part  of  the  exercise  is  not  difficult,  provided  a  woman 
applies  her  thoughts  to  it. 

"The  FLUTTERING  OF  THE  FANS  is  the  last,  and  indeed 
the  masterpiece,  of  the  whole  exercise  ;  but  if  a  lady  does 
not  misspend  her  time,  she  may  make  herself  mistress  of  it 
in  three  months.  I  generally  lay  aside  the  dog-days  and 
the  hot  time  of  the  summer  for  the  teaching  this  part  of 
the  exercise,  for  as  soon  as  ever  I  pronounce  FLUTTER 
YOUR  FANS,  the  place  is  filled  with  so  many  zephyrs  and 
gentle  breezes  as  are  very  refreshing  in  that  season  of  the 
year,  though  they  might  be  dangerous  to  ladies  of  a  tender 
constitution  in  any  other.  There  is  an  infinite  variety  of 
motions  to  be  made  use  of  in  the  Flutter  of  a  Fan.  There 


1 66 


THREE   HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 


is  the  Angry  Flutter,  the  Modest  Flutter,  the  Timorous 
Flutter,  the  Confused  Flutter,  the  Merry  Flutter,  and  the 
Amorous  Flutter.  Not  to  be  tedious,  there  is  scarce  any 
emotion  in  the  mind  which  does  not  produce  a  suitable 
agitation  in  the  fan,  in  so  much  that  if  I  only  see  the  fan 
of  a  disciplined  lady,  I  know  very  well  whether  she  laughs, 
frowns,  or  blushes.  I  have  seen  a  fan  so  very  angry  that 
it  would  have  been  dangerous  for  the  absent  lover  who 
provoked  it  to  have  come  within  the  wind  of  it ;  and  at  other 
times  so  very  languishing  that  I  have  been  glad  for  the 
lady's  sake  that  the  lover  was  at  a  sufficient  distance  from 
it.  I  need  not  add  that  a  fan  is  either  a  prude  or  coquette, 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  person  who  bears  it.  To 
conclude  my  letter  I  must  acquaint  you  that  I  have,  from 
my  own  observations,  compiled  a  little  treatise  for  the  use 
of  my  scholars,  entitled  THE  PASSIONS  OF  THE  FAN,  which 
I  will  communicate  to  you,  if  you  think  it  may  be  of 
use  to  the  public.  I  shall  have  a 

"GENERAL  REVIEW  on  Thursday  next,  to  which  you 
shall  be  very  welcome  if  you  will  honor  it  with  your 
presence. 

"  P.  S.  I  teach  young  gentlemen  the  whole  art  of  gal- 
lanting a  fan. 

"  N.  B.  I  have  several  little  plain  fans  made  for  this 
use,  to  avoid  expense." 

THE  BROOM  BRIGADE  is  another  of  those  pretty  perform- 
ances to  be  carried  out  after  a  careful  drill  as  for  the  Fan 
Brigade.  There  should  be  a  uniform  costume,  consisting 
of  sweeping-caps  and  white  aprons  and  short  dresses,  with 
low  shoes,  all  of  which  can  be  as  coquettish  as  you  please. 


FAIR  SUGGESTIONS.  1 67 

The  following  verses  should  be  sung  as  an  introduction 
to  the  exercise,  and  .should  have  been  carefully  practised 
beforehand.  The  best  singers  taking  solo  part,  and  all 
joining  in  the  chorus. 

SONG   OF   THE   BROOM   BRIGADE. 

Do  not  be  frightened,  O  brothers,  we  pray, 
As  we  stand  here  before  you  in  martial  array  ; 
For  we  do  not  come  here  with  murd'rous  intent, 
On  carnage  and  slaughter  ferociously  bent. 

CHORUS  :        Sweep,  sisters,  sweep,  your  brooms  with  ardor  plying, 
Sweep,  sisters,  sweep,  and  set  the  cobwebs  flying. 

Our  peace-loving  weapons  we  only  would  wield 
To  remove  all  encumbrances  far  from  the  field  ; 
So  that  even  the  falling  leaves,  rustling  and  sere, 
Should  be  cleared  from  the  pathway  of  every  one  here. 
CHORUS  :        Sweep,  sisters,  sweep,  etc. 

We  would  brush  away  suff'ring  and  sorrow  and  care, 
And  everthing  else  that  is  irksome  to  bear, 
As  cobwebs  are  brushed  from  the  dim  window-glass, 
To  let  the  bright  sunbeams  shine  in  as  they  pass. 
CHORUS  :        Sweep,  sisters,  sweep,  etc. 

We  would  brush  away  folly  and  envy  and  strife, 
And  everything  hurtful  that  darkens  your  life. 
Only  the  loving,  the  noble,  the  true, 
Should  shine  on  your  pathway  and  illumine  your  view. 
CHORUS  :        Sweep,  sisters,  sweep,  etc. 

The  exercise  should  be  closed  with  the  following  lines, 
suns:  to  the  tune  of  Yankee  Doodle  :  — 


1 68  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

LINES, 

SUNG  TO  THE  TUNE  OF  YANKEE  DOODLE. 

You've  seen  our  skill 

In  martial  drill, 
And  how  you'd  be  defended, 

Should  foe  invade 

Your  peaceful  glade, 
So  now  our  duty's  ended. 

Then  lay  your  heads 

Upon  your  beds, 
Without  a  fear  or  care  ; 

Should  danger  come 

Into  your  home, 
Be  sure  you'll  find  us  there. 

So  here,  O  friends, 

Our  duty  ends. 
May  slumbers  sweet  and  light 

Your  eyelids  close 

In  calm  repose  ; 
Good  night,  dear  friends,  good  night ! 

THE  FAIR  itself  is  in  danger  of  sinking  into  a  conven- 
tional performance,  each  one  being  very  much  like  another. 
But  in  these  days,  when  there  are  great  varieties  to  be 
introduced  in  the  way  of  decorations  and  draperies  and 
hanging  curtains,  there  is  no  excuse  for  its  being  monoto- 
nous, or  for  the  long  row  of  tables  covered  with  white 
cotton,  that  give  a  tedious  air  to  the  very  first  sight  of  the 
fair.  Nowadays  there  is  every  variety  of  color,  material, 
and  handiwork,  to  give  brilliancy  to  such  occasions,  and 


FAIR  SUGGESTIONS.  169 

there  are  many  inventions  to  lend  them  attraction,  if  there 
are  active  individuals  enough  interested,  with  ideas  to  sug- 
gest and  perseverance  to  carry  out  the  ideas.  One  of  the 
most  attractive  of  these  suggestions  is  the  presentation  of 

A  FOREIGN  MARKET-PLACE. —  For  this  all  the  articles  to 
be  sold  should  be  presented  in  booths  made  to  resemble 
those  seen  in  the  large  square  of  a  foreign  city. 

There  should  be  a  raised  stage  at  one  end  of  the  room 
to  display  the  more  conspicuous  and  picturesque  of  these 
booths,  while  down  the  sides  of  the  room  there  should  be 
a  succession  of  various  colored  awnings  of  different  shape 
and  size,  shading  the  different  tables. 

ARAB  SHOPS  can  be  arranged  along  the  back  of  this 
raised  stage,  with  rows  of  booths  all  hung  inside  with 
Oriental  rugs  and  shawls,  a  low  seat  coming  half  way 
across  the  entrance,  and  an  Arab,  cross-legged,  within. 

The  costumes  of  those  who  sell  the  articles  should  corre- 
spond with  the  decoration  of  the  booths.  An  Oriental 
costume  is  so  effective  that  there  should  be  a  large  num- 
ber of  Arab  youths  wandering  about  the  hall,  dressed  in 
close-fitting  red  or  white  cap,  white  shirt  with  loose  sleeves, 
loose  white  cotton  trousers  coming  to  the  knees,  leaving 
the  legs  bare,  stained  of  a  dark  color,  or  covered  with  long 
dark  stockings,  the  feet  in  loose  Arab  slippers.  Each  of 
these  young  Arabs  must  be  furnished  with  something  to 
sell,  with  a  rod  across  his  shoulders  and  something  hang- 
ing from  each  end  in  baskets  or  buckets  or  pails.  He 
can  sell  anything  you  please, —  Egyptian  dates,  or  Florida 
oranges,  or  even  the  native  peanut, — or  he  can  go  round 
with  the 


I/0  THREE   HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 

FAIR  NEWSPAPER,  which  should  be  furnished  daily  with 
witty  articles,  as  well  as  careful  advertisements  of  the  ob- 
jects for  sale  at  the  different  booths.  The  Arab  booths, 
indeed,  need  not  be  strictly  devoted  to  the  sale  of  Arab 
things,  though  all  the  decoration  should  resemble  as  far  as 
possible  the  shops  of  Cairo  and  Damascus,  out  of  whose 
dark  and  crowded  depths  come  rich  Oriental  things  new 
and  old.  A  perfumed  censer  should  be  swinging  inside 
to  give  an  Oriental  smell,  and*  the  Arab  youths  who  go  and 
come  should  have  plenty  of  brass  dishes  or  copper  cans  to 
make  a  tinkling  sound  with  ;  for  noise  is  an  indispensable 
feature  of  an  Arab  bazaar. 

All  along  the  front  of  the  raised  platform  should  be  a 
row  of  low  tables  containing  articles  for  sale,  which  should 
be  presided  over  by  young  girls  in  various  costumes,  —  at 
one  table  the  Neapolitan  girl,  with  a  flat  white  napkin  laid 
over  her  black  braids  as  head-dress,  with  short  petticoat 
and  white  waist;  at  another  a  Hamburg  basket-seller; 
at  another  a  Spanish  girl  with  cooling  drinks.  Every 
one  who  sells  anything,  indeed,  should  be  in  some  sort  of 
costume. 

A  row  of  garden  tents  might  be  placed  along  the  centre 
of  the  hall  for  the  sale  of  flowers,  while  under  the  awnings 
of  the  side  booths  every  nation  should  be  represented  as 
far  as  possible.  Boys  and  girls  dressed  in  costume,  with 
wheelbarrows  full  of  flowers,  should  find  their  way  around 
the  hall  from  time  to  time.  All  of  this  will  not  exclude 
the  usual  entertainments  at  a  fair. 

THE  FISH  POND  can  be  presided  over  by  Christie 
Johnstone,  dressed  as  fishwife. 


FAIR  SUGGESTIONS.  I/I 

THE  GRAB-BAG  is  always  attractive,  though  it  may  con- 
tain nothing  more  than  the  smaller  articles  that  can  find 
no  place  on  the  tables.  These,  however,  should  at  least 
he  worth  the  five  cents  or  ten  cents  paid  for  the  privilege 
of  grabbing.  The  high  tone  of  a  grab-bag  is  soon  dis- 
covered by  the  children,  who  are  likely  to  patronize  it.  A 
place  should  be  provided  for  the 

OLD  WOMAN  ix  HER  SHOE.  —  Far  the  best  plan  is  to  have 
a  large  shoe  made  in  common  material,  that  is,  moulded  in 
pasteboard  by  a  shoemaker ;  cover  it  with  satin,  silk,  or 
morocco  paper.  One  can  be  made  with  two  dolls  dressed 
as  babies,  exactly  alike,  and  labelled  "Twins  begging 
Charity."  In  one  shoe  there  can  be  several  sets  of  twins  of 
different  ages  ;  some  of  the  old  wooden  dolls  dressed  as 
untidy  charity  children,  boys  and  girls,  a  large  wooden 
spoon,  a  basin  of  gruel,  a  birch  rod,  and  a  very  dilapidated 
spelling-book. 

A  POST-OFFICE  at  a  fair  should  be  rigged  up  to  look  as 
much  like  a  real  one  as  possible,  save  that  there  should  be 
a  little  red  drapery  above  and  at  the  sides.  A  telegraph 
office  combined  adds  to  the  receipts.  Forms  and  yellow 
envelopes  should  be  procured.  Prepare  the  dispatches 
beforehand,  and  then  inform  the  various  people  that  there 
is  a  telegram  for  them,  and,  presenting  it,  claim  a  quarter 
of  a  dollar.  Letters  should  be  always  ready,  and  never 
send  one  without  attempting  to  make  a  demand  for  a  second 
necessary.  Make  plentiful  use  of  Zabziel's  Almanack,  and 
favor  the  recipients  with  astonishing  prophecies,  as  well  as 
tender  verses,  good  jokes,  and  ridiculous  scandals.  The 
whole  success  of  the  thing  depends  on  the  sharpness  of 


1/2  THREE   HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

the  presiding  genius,  and  the  ability  displayed  in  the 
letters.  There  can  be  added 

A  POST-OFFICE  SAVINGS  BANK.  —  Those  who  pay  five 
cents  can  have  a  dip  in  a  bowl,  in  which  should  be  slips  of 
paper,  some  blanks,  some  with  a  sum  of  money  marked  on 
them  varying  from  one  cent  to  ten  cents,  and  these  could 
be  presented  at  any  of  the  stalls  and  articles  obtained  to 
the  amount. 

A  GYPSY  TENT  should  appear  along  the  row  of  garden- 
tents,  where  should  be  a  gypsy  in  true  costume  and  color, 
to  tell  fortunes  from  the  palm  of  the  hand,  and  she  can 
have  mysterious  fortunes  to  sell  at  varied  prices  to  all  who 
will  buy  them,  written  on  leaves  made  of  paper.  Oak 
leaves  can  be  used  for  gentlemen,  and  grape  leaves  for 
ladies. 

ANOTHER  TENT  can  be  arranged  for  five  cent  or  ten 
cent  admission,  where  an  old  woman  disguised  as  a 
dwarf,  behind  a  table,  should  give  little  presents  to  each 
person,  with  a  few  words  of  fun  and  wisdom.  There 
should  be  a  table  covered  with  a  cloth  ;  a  pair  of  curtains 
should  be  arranged  behind  it  and  before  the  curtain  the 
dwarf  stands,  looking  as  if  she  were  on  the  table.  Behind 
her  stands  a  second  person,  whose  hands,  passing  under 
her  arms,  form  the  dwarf's  feet.  These  must  have  shoes 
and  stockings  on,  and  should  dance  about  at  intervals. 
The  dwarf  should  be  well  dressed  up,  and  should  be  some 
one  who  has  a  ready  wit  and  tongue,  as  all  the  fun  depends 
on  her. 

A  TRAVELLING  MINSTREL  should  wander  about  the  hall 
dressed  as  a  troubadour,  with  a  guitar  ;  or  dyed  black,  with  a 


FAIR  SUGGESTIONS.  1/3 

banjo,  who,  going  about,  collects  a  ring  round  him  and 
sings,  at  the  conclusion  of  each  concert  sending  round  his 
hat  for  contributions. 

PUNCH  AND  JUDY,  if  it  is  possible  to  obtain  one,  is  a 
great  acquisition. 

A  LAWN-TENNIS  TOURNAMENT  is  a  great  attraction  to 
the  fete,  if  it  can  be  arranged,  with  two  or  more  prizes. 
Seats  could  be  placed  for  the  spectators,  and  a  small 
charge  made,  if  wished.  The  players  would  perhaps  wear 
a  particular  costume  or  some  badge  to  distinguish  them. 
A  children's  match  might  be  arranged. 

A  FRUIT  TENT,  with  the  attendant  ladies  dressed  in 
fancy  costume,  would  be  popular  ;  and  adjoining  this  tent 
could  be  the  refreshment  tent,  with  small  tables  for  ices, 
tea,  etc.,  in  the  open  air. 

A  SWING  is  a  good  thing  for  children,  each  one  paying 
a  halfpenny  for  a  "good  swing." 

A  FLOWER  STALL  is  always  popular,  with  small  plants 
in  china  pots,  cut  flowers  in  pretty  fancy  baskets  with 
moss,  ferns  in  ornamental  china  articles,  and  buttonhole- 
bouquets.  White  and  blue  china  ornaments  are  cheap, 
and  easy  to  get. 

IN  A  MARKET-PLACE  such  as  we  have  described,  an  effec- 
tive addition  was  made  by  the  introduction  of  the  singing  of 
the  hour  to  mark  the  time  as  the  evening  passed  on,  as  is 
done  by  the  street  watchmen  in  the  night  in  the  smaller 
German  towns. 

We  give  the  verses  as  they  were  sung  by  a  choir  of  voices 
as  each  hour  came  round.  The  first  verse  was  listened  to 
with  interest,  and  in  a  few  moments  silenced  for  a  time  the 


1/4  THREE   HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 

buzz  of  voices  that  filled  the  place.  When  the  next  hour 
came  there  was  the  same  interest,  but  the  silence  was 
quickly  forgotten  in  the  usual  noises  of  a  crowd.  By  the  time 
the  hours  of  eight  and  nine  came,  the  voices  began  to  be 
expected,  and  when  the  final  ten  o'clock  bell  was  sung  out 
there  was  a  feeling  of  solemnity  that  gave  its  character  to 
the  occasion.  We  recommend  it  as  bringing  the  cere- 
monies of.  the  foreign  market-place  to  an  interesting  close. 

Hark,  ye  neighbors,  and  hear  us  tell, 
Five  now  strikes  on  the  evening  bell  ! 
Five  are  the  wondrous  senses  given 
To  man  on  earth  by  God  in  Heaven. 

Hark,  ye  neighbors,  and  hear  us  tell, 
Six  now  strikes  on  the  evening  bell ! 
Before  you  taste  the  food  now  given, 
Give  thanks  therefor  to  God  in  Heaven. 

Hark,  ye  neighbors,  and  hear  us  tell, 
Seven  now  strikes  on  the  evening  bell ! 
Look,  friends,  and  see  the  treasures  given 
To  help  the  cause  so  dear  to  Heaven. 

Hark,  ye  neighbors,  and  hear  us  tell, 
Eight  now  strikes  on  the  evening  bell  ! 
Of  all  the  gifts  the  Lord  has  given, 
Music  takes  us  nearest  Heaven. 

Hark,  ye  neighbors,  and  hear  us  tell, 
Nine  now  strikes  on  the  evening  bell ! 
Odors  from  flower-buds  now  are  riven, 
And  float  like  incense  up  to  Heaven. 

Hark,  ye  neighbors,  and  hear  us  tell, 

Ten  now  strikes  on  the  evening  bell  ! 

Now,  friends,  good  night.     For  pleasure  given, 

Let  praise  ascend  from  all  to  Heaven. 


FAIR  SUGGESTIONS.  1/5 

ARTICLES  TO  BE  SOLD  AT  FAIRS.  — The  descriptions  we 
have  given  in  the  earlier  part  of  this  book  will  seem  to 
suggest  a  sufficient  number  of  articles  to  be  sold  at  the 
tables  of  a  fair ;  there  are  over  three  hundred  of  these 
described,  and  for  a  fair  it  is  well  to  be  furnished  with 
at  least  a  dozen  of  each,  though  not  many  of  a  sort 
should  be  displayed  at  once.  This  would  give  nearly 
three  thousand  articles,  which  would  furnish  a  good- 
sized  fair,  especially  if  refreshments  including  fruit  are 
added,  besides  the  flowers  and  plants  suggested.  Plain 
articles  well  made  always  sell  well.  Plain  aprons  of  every 
sort,  if  not  too  expensive,  sell  quickly. 

WINDOW-CURTAINS,  made  for  the  lower  part  of  a  window, 
either  to  run  on  rings,  or  with  a  hem  for  a  wire  or  cord  to 
be  passed  through,  should  be  tied  up  in  pairs,,  done 
up  in  little  parcels,  and  there  should  be  a  sufficient 
number  of  duplicates  to  furnish  more  than  a  pair  of  the 
same,  if  desired.  These  can  be  made  of  cream  colored 
cambrics,  striped,  plaided,  or  open-work,  or  of  figured 
Madras  muslin,  finished  with  lace  at  the  bottom.  They 
are  very  pretty  of  Turkey  red  cotton,  in  Russian  embroid- 
ery, in  blue,  yellow,  white,  and  black  cottons,  worked  over 
canvas,  and  the  canvas  pulled  out,  and  these  can  be  edged 
at  the  bottom  with  Russian  lace,  with  the  colors  of  the 
embroidery  worked  in ;  these,  however,  should  not  be 
made  too  expensive  with  work,  but  they  should  be  attrac- 
tive from  their  neatness  and  inexpensiveness. 

SMALL  ARTICLES  FOR  CHILDREN  TO  BUY  always  sell 
well,  and  can  be  made  to  look  attractive.  All  the  varieties 
of  dolls  and  doll's  furniture  can  furnish  one  table. 


CHAPTER    XIV. 

WEDDINGS. 

As  WEDDINGS  are  matters  of  constant  occurrence,  a 
few  words  of  advice  respecting  the  giving  of  presents 
may  not  be  out  of  place.  Probably  no  custom  has  devel- 
oped so  greatly  of  late  years.  Formerly,  a  bride  only  re- 
ceived presents  from  her  immediate  relations  and  most 
intimate  friends ;  now  every  acquaintance  is  expected  to 
contribute  some  token  of  regard,  and  very  seldom  fails  to 
do  so.  Every  one  invited  to  the  wedding  is  expected,  as  a 
matter  of  course,  to  send  a  wedding  present ;  and  it  is 
possible  that  many  acquaintances  send  gifts  in  the  hope  of 
being  invited  to  the  ceremony,  if  it  promises  to  be  showy 
and  fashionable.  Formerly  every  one  who  sent  a  present 
thought  it  requisite  that  it  should  be  accompanied  by  a 
note  of  congratulation  and  good  wishes,  but  now  it  has 
become  very  usual  merely  to  send  with  the  gift  a  visiting 
card,  on  which  is  written  above  the  printed  name  "  with," 
and  below  it  "congratulations  and  best  wishes."  Of 
course,  near  relatives  generally  write  notes. 

WEDDING  PRESENTS  may  be  made  either  to  the  bride  or 

to  the  bridegroom  ;  generally  the  nearest  relations  give 

presents  both  to  him  and  to  the  bride.     Presents  may  be 

sent  at  any  time,  from  the  official  announcement  of  the 

176 


WEDDINGS.  177 

wedding  up  to  the  eve  of  the  ceremony.  It  is  as  well,  how- 
ever, not  to  be  too  precipitate,  as  in  the  event  of  the  wed- 
ding not  taking  place  it  is  always  awkward  and  unpleasant 
for  a  bride  to  have  to  return  her  presents,  which,  of  cotJtse, 
she  must  do  under  such  circumstances. 

THE  CHOICE  of  a  wedding  present  is  generally  a  matter 
of  some  difficulty,  unless  cost  is  no  object,  when,  of  course, 
jewelry  is  the  easiest  to  select  and  the  pleasantest  to  re- 
ceive. But  it  is  not  always  that  brides  marry  in  a  sphere 
where  a  profusion  of  jewelry  is  useful,  and  a  little  care  is 
requisite  to  render  the  gift  acceptable  to  its  recipient. 

SOME  ORNAMENT  FOR  THE  DRAWING-ROOM  is  the  gen- 
eral resource  of  those  who  do  not  wish  to  expend  the  sum 
requisite  for  a  handsome  ring  or  bracelet  ;  but  if  the  young 
lady  is  about  to  move  from  one  place  to  another,  gifts  of 
china,  lamps,  or  ornamental  furniture,  are  but  of  little  use, 
and  generally  spend  years  shut  up  in  some  storeroom, 
whence  they  at  length  emerge  too  old-fashioned  to  be  of 
any  use  or  pleasure.  A  little  thought  is  requisite  to  find 
an  appropriate  gift,  and  that  is  what  many  people  never 
will  expend.  When  a  young  couple  are  provided  with  a 
house,  there  should  be  no  difficulty  in  selecting  a  present 
in  accordance  with  the  means  of  the  donor. 

SILVER.  —  It  is  now  exceedingly  fashionable  to  give 
silver,  and  pretty  salt  cellars,  muffineers,  cream  jugs,  and 
sugar  basins,  fish  carvers  or  fish  eaters,  are  not  inordinately 
costly,  and  are  always  very  acceptable.  Plate  has  the 
advantage  that  it  suits  as  well  for  a  present  to  the  bride- 
groom as  to  the  bride,  and  the  same  may  be  said  of  an- 
other very  usual  gift,  a  claret  jug.  These  may  be  had  in 


1/  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

all  varieties,  and  at  all- prices,  some  of  those  shaped  like 
swans,  walruses,  etc.,  being  very  costly.  A  breakfast  dish 
for  hash  is  a  favorite  present,  and  rich  relations  sometimes 
giv$  sets  of  entree  dishes.  Cases  of  pretty  dessert  knives 
and  forks,  either  with  or  without  china  handles,  hand- 
somely embossed  grape-scissors,  sugar-sifters,  cases  of  ice 
spoons,  or  fanciful  sugar-tongs,  are  all  given,  and  some  of 
them  are  quite  within  the  reach  of  those  who  do  not  wish 
to  make  any  extravagant  outlay.  Old  silver  ornaments 
are  very  favorite  presents,  —  caskets,  small  trays  or  cups, 
fanciful  toys,  etc.,  all  of  which  will  afterwards  look  well 
arranged  on  small  plush  tables  in  the  drawing-room.  A 
pretty  gold  thimble,  either  set  with  pearls,  coral,  or  tur- 
quoise, or  plain,  in  a  case,  is  a  nice  small  present,  and  so 
are  scent  bottles,  of  which  there  are  now  an  infinite 
variety. 

FOR  HOME  ORNAMENTS. — Clocks  are  always  favorite 
wedding  presents.  Ornaments  for  the  writing-table  are  a 
boon  to  those  on  the  lookout  for  wedding  presents,  the 
consequence  being  that  a  bride  is  always  overwhelmed  by 
the  .quantity  of  inkstands  and  blotting-books  showered 
upon  her.  Candlesticks  are  a  thing  of  which  it  is  difficult 
to  have  too  many.  The  short  shape,  known  as  "  piano 
candlesticks,"  is  most  fashionable,  and  they  are  given  in 
silver,  bronze,  and  brass,  ormolu  being,  happily,  almost  en- 
tirely a  thing  of  the  past.  Choice  lamps,  too,  are  very 
useful  presents,  and  may  be  had  in  all  sizes  and  every  vari- 
ety of  form.  China  is  always  acceptable,  —  nothing  tends 
so  much  to  brighten  a  room,  —  and  pretty  glass  is  also  much 
appreciated.  It  is  almost  impossible  to  have  too  many  re- 


WEDDINGS.  179 

ceptacles  for  flowers,  from  the  tall  glasses,  in  which 
branches  of  evergreens  and  pampas  grass  can  be  arranged, 
to  those  adapted  to  the  exhibition  of  single  flowers.  Sal- 
viati's  Venetian  glass  is  always  a  valued  gift,  whether  it 
take  the  shape  of  a  chandelier,  wall  brackets,  looking- 
glasses,  or  a  set  of  champagne,  sherry,  and  hock  glasses. 
A  set  of  pretty  flower  vases,  either  in  glass  or  china,  for 
the  dinner  table,  forms  a  nice  and  inexpensive  present ; 
and  so  do  pretty  menu  holders.  Five  o'clock  tea  tables 
are  also  very  nice.  They  consist  frequently  of  a  black 
wooden  stand,  the  top  of  which  is  a  china  tea  tray,  with 
the  whole  tea  equipage  complete.  Small  tables  are  always 
useful  presents,  either  prettily  covered  with  plush,  or  else 
ebonized,  with  gold  ornaments.  Some  have  an  under-shelf 
that  revolves,  for  books.  The  art  of  painting  on  looking- 
glass  has  introduced  a  profusion  of  pretty  articles  ex- 
tremely suitable  for  wedding  presents.  Small  mirrors, 
either  to  stand  on  a  table  or  hang  against  a  wall,  folding 
screens  to  hide  a  fireless  grate,  and  various  other  things, 
are  remarkably  pretty,  and  have  at  the  present  moment 
the  advantage  of  being  quite  new,  though  rather  costly. 
Pretty  photograph  stands  are  always  acceptable,  and  among 
small  but  useful  presents  may  be  noted  stands  for  keeping 
newspapers  together,  and  ornamental  waste-paper  baskets. 
Folding  screens  to  keep  out  draughts  are  charming  pres- 
ents, and  may  be  had  in  all  degrees  of  costliness.  Small 
occasional  chairs,  prettily  covered  in  embroidery  or  plush, 
are  also  useful. 

IN    JEWELRY    the    choice  is  unbounded,  and  only  lim- 
ited  by   the    purse    of    the   donor.     Brooches,   stars,  and 


IO  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

bracelets  are  more  useful  now  than  lockets  —  at  one  time 
so  universal  a  present,  but  now  comparatively  little  worn. 
Small  brooches,  in  the  shape  of  bees,  flies,  spiders,  etc., 
which  can  be  used  to  fasten  the  bonnet  strings,  or  to  place 
about  the  bodice  of  the  dress,  are  greatly  prized,  and  ear- 
rings are  also  valued.  Whether  the  friend  will  wear  them 
should  be  ascertained  before  selecting  them  as  a  present. 
Sometimes  a  silver  Norwegian  belt  is  chosen  as  a  gift,  or 
a  chatelaine,  or,  as  a  more  humble  offering,  some  pretty 
object  to  attach  to  one.  The  choice  of  quaint-shaped  sil- 
ver pencil  cases,  for  instance,  seems  absolutely  endless, 
and  there  are  other  small  objects,  such  as  vinaigrettes, 
etuis,  etc.,  well  adapted  as  offerings  from  young  ladies 
whose  allowances  are  not  large. 

FANS  are  almost  always  numerous  in  a  collection  of 
wedding  presents,  and  are  always  acceptable  ;  by  far  the 
handsomest  now  are  those  of  curled  ostrich  feathers,  with 
either  tortoise-shell  or  mother-of-pearl  sticks.  Those  made 
entirely  of  Brussels  lace,  unlined,  though  very  pretty,  are 
not  of  the  slightest  use  as  fans.  There  is  an  admixture  of 
lace  with  painted  crape  mounted  on  silk,  which  is  ex- 
tremely tasteful. 

PAPER-KNIVES  of  every  sort  are  always  found  among 
wedding  presents,  from  the  huge  ivory  one  half  a  yard 
long,  on  which  the  monogram  is  generally  engraved,  to 
small  ones  of  silver,  gold,  or  enamel,  suitable  to  the  boudoir 
table. 

LACE  ;  A  CHECK.  —  Some  brides  are  fortunate  enough 
to  be  presented  with  sets  of  handsome  lace ;  but  such  a 
present  is,  of  course,  only  given  by  a  near  relative.  The 


WEDDINGS.  1 8 1 

same  remark  applies  to  the  growing  custom  of  giving  a 
check  instead  of  selecting  a  present.  Of  course,  a  check 
is  only  given  for  a  handsome  sum,  such  as  no  mere  ac- 
quaintance would  think  of  giving. 

HOUSE  LINEN.  —  When  the  marriage  is  not  very  affluent, 
some  kind  relative  sometimes  gives  the  house  linen. 

ALBUMS.  —  If  intended  as  presents,  albums  may  be 
beautified  with  drawings,  or  pen  and  ink  sketches,  to  suit 
the  individual  taste  of  the  recipient.  But  no  one  should 
undertake  such  work  who  cannot  do  it  well.  An  accurate 
knowledge  of  figure  and  animal  drawing  is  indispensable, 
unless,  indeed,  copies  are  resorted  to,  in  which  case  any 
one  who  can  color  can  turn  out  a  creditable  piece  of  deco- 
ration. 

It  seems  as  if  the  huge  and  costly  dressing-cases,  one 
of  which  was  at  one  time  considered  part  of  the  necessary 
paraphernalia  of  a  bride,  were  somewhat  out  of  favor, 
though  they  are  still  occasionally  given. 

TRAVELLING  BAGS,  mounted  in  gold  or  silver,  appear  to 
have  taken  their  place,  and  are  very  useful  when  not  made 
so  heavy  that  it  is  almost  impossible  for  a  maid  to  carry 
them. 

A  HANDSOME  TRAVELLING  RUG  is  a  nice  present,  and 
so  is  one  of  the  fur  travelling  bags  in  which  the  feet,  legs, 
and  skirts  are  comfortably  inclosed. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENT  AND  RECEPTION  OF  PRESENTS.  —  As 
soon  as  a  present  is  received,  the  recipient,  whether  bride 
or  bridegroom,  should  at  once  write  a  letter  of  thanks ;  any 
delay  is  most  ungracious.  Of  course  the  exhibition  of  the 
presents  is  one  of  the  features  of  the  wedding.  The  donors 


1 82  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

would  be  greatly  disappointed  if  they  were  not  duly  seen. 
The  arrangement  requires  considerable  care  and  taste,  and, 
if  the  presents  are  at  all  numerous,  the  drawing-rooms  are 
generally  tolerably  well  rilled.  Care  should  be  taken  that 
the  articles  are  not  packed  too  closely,  and  the  cards  stat- 
ing from  whom  each  article  came  should  be  so  placed  that 
there  can  be  no  mistake  as  to  the  present  to  which  they 
appertain.  Generally  the  card  sent  with  the  gift  is  used 
for  this.  Presents  should  be  classified,  plate  on  one  table, 
china,  glass,  fans,  clocks,  etc.,  all  separate;  jewelry 
always  on  a  table  entirely  apart,  and  the  various  articles 
should  be  exhibited  in  their  respective  cases.  The  presents 
given  to  the  bridegroom  are  brought  to  the  bride's  house, 
and  exhibited  at  the  same  time  as  hers.  The  presents 
suitable  to  him  are,  of  course,  hardly  so  numerous  as  those 
acceptable  to  a  lady.  They  generally  include  plate,  studs, 
links  and  pins,  liquor  case,  luncheon  basket,  horn  cups 
for  taking  out  shooting,  cigar  cases,  and  any  arrangement 
suitable  for  the  smoking-room,  riding  whips,  walking  sticks, 
etc.  A  piano,  a  carriage,  or  a  horse  are  all  presents  suit- 
able to  bride  or  bridegroom,  and  are  occasionally  given 
and  welcomed. 

Care  should  be  taken  not  to  repeat  in  the  invitation  the 
latest  mistake  of  the  engravers  :  "  Mr.  and  Mrs.  re- 
quest the  pleasure  of  your  Presents  at  the  marriage  of 
their  daughter." 

The  London  newspaper,  The  Qtteen,  speaks  of  American 
wedding  presents  as  seeming  "rather  odd  sometimes,"  and 
tells  of  one  occasion  where  the  bridesmaids  gave  the  bride- 
groom a  large  golden  latch-key  ornamented  with  his  mono- 


WEDDINGS.  183 

gram  in  jewels,  while  the  groomsman  presented  the  bride 
with  a  miniature  silver  broom  with  a  handle  of  precious 
stones. 

A  MORE  SENSIBLE  FASHION  is  spoken  of  as  set  by  a 
bride  at  another  American  wedding,  who  made  her  six 
bridesmaids'  dresses  and  trimmed  their  hats.  We  should 
suppose  this  fashion  to  be  as  rare  as.it  is  "  odd,"  but  it  can 
well  be  commended  wherever  the  bride  should  find  time 
after  arranging  her  own  dress  and  hat. 

THE  PEWTER  WEDDING  is  celebrated  on  the  first  anni- 
versary of  the  marriage,  and  gives  an  occasion  for  presents 
in  pewter  of  every  variety.  The  opportunity  is  chosen  for 
all  sorts  of  jokes  in  presents,  from  the  penny  whistle  up  to 
the  five  cent  pewter  basin.  But  if  there  is  any  old  pewter 
extant  in  the  family,  this  is  the  time  for  the  maiden  aunt 
to  present  it ;  for  some  of  the  old  hereditary  pewter  dishes 
and  platters  are  as  handsome  as  silver,  if  they  have  been 
kept  well  polished  and  in  good  order,  and  are  an  ornament 
to  the  mantelpiece. 

THE  WOODEN  WEDDING  comes  in  on  the  fifth  anniver- 
sary, and  is  celebrated  by  all  sorts  of  valuable  presents  in 
wood.  Any  one  who  is  skilful  in  the  use  of  the  jig-saw  or 
in  wood  carving  can  take  advantage  of  it  by  manufacturing 
porte-livres,  bookshelves,  and  all  the  larger  varieties  of 
furniture,  or  by  making  postage  stamp  and  button  boxes, 
etc. 

A  cuckoo  clock  is  one  of  the  prettiest  articles  ever  given 
on  such  an  occasion. 

THE  TIN  WEDDING,  celebrated  on  the  tenth  anniversary, 
bears  a  close  resemblance  to  the  pewter  wedding,  and,  like 


1 84  THREE  HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 

that,  can  be  made  the  occasion  for  giving  many  useful 
articles.  Pretty  tins  for  flowers  give  an  opportunity  for 
sending  any  form  of  floral  ornament.  An  appropriate  one 
is  to  have  two  separate  tins  made  six  inches  long  and  one 
and  one  half  inches  wide,  one  in  the  shape  of  the  numeral 
one,  the  other  in  the  shape  of  a  cipher.  The  two  placed 
side  by  side  of  course  form  the  number  ten. 

THE  BRASS  WEDDING  should  be  celebrated  on  the  fif- 
teenth anniversary,  and  all  sorts  of  amateur  work  in 
pounded  and  wrought  brass  can  be  brought  into  play, 
besides  the  Oriental  plaques  and  handsome  trays  and 
dishes,  of  which  a  housekeeper  can  never  have  too  many. 

THE  CRYSTAL  WEDDING.  —  On  the  twentieth  wedding 
anniversary,  every  variety  of  glassware  can  be  presented. 
The  more  expensive  articles,  such  as  cut  glass  salad  bowls 
or  preserve  dishes,  will  readily  suggest  themselves  to  every 
reader  whose  purse  will  bear  such  a  demand  upon  it.  To 
those  who  wish  to  give  a  less  expensive  present  the  follow- 
ing suggestions  may  not  come  amiss  :  A  pair  of  wine- 
glasses, finger-bowls,  or  goblets,  marked  with  the  crest  or 
initial  ;  ruby  or  other  bright  colored  glass  vases,  butter 
plates,  salt  cellars,  hand  glasses  ornamented  with  a  flower 
painted  on  one  end,  with  a  satin  bow  tied  around  the 
handle,  or  a  medicine  glass. 

THE  SILVER  WEDDING  is  so  often  celebrated  that  instruc- 
tions for  its  observance  are  scarcely  necessary.  This  is 
the  time  to  renew  the  silver  service,  and  to  supply  any 
wants  that  twenty-five  years  of  married  life  have  suggested. 
There  is  the  silver  tureen,  new  silver  ladles,  all  the  new 
varieties  of  pickle  forks,  olive  picks,  with  forks  and  knives, 


WEDDINGS.  185 

cheese  scoops,  grape  scissors,  etc.,  etc.,  that  the  fashion  of 
the  day  has  made  necessary. 

At  the  same  time  as  much  pleasure  is  given  by  a  skilful 
workwoman  making  something  of  taste,  that  suggests  the 
meaning  of  the  day,  and  many  things  can  be  done  in  em- 
broidery of  delicate  silver  material  that  answers  such  a 
purpose.  Silver  thread  certainly  tarnishes  quickly,  even 
in  working ;  but  silver  brocade  can  be  used  as  the  founda- 
tion of  any  piece  of  work ;  or  the  back  of  a  blotting  case 
in  crewel  silks  can  be  done  on  perforated  silver  cardboard, 
or  on  delicate  shades  of  white  silk  with  flosses. 

An  artistic  design  of  a  spider's  web,  the  corners  finished 
by  a  spray  of  leaves,  or  grasses,  may  be  well  carried  out  in 
silver  wire  on  gray  or  pale  blue  satin,  for  a  screen  or  table 
cover ;  this  would  be  appropriate,  and  would  not  tarnish. 
The  fine  silver  wire  can  be  kept  quite  clean  and  bright  by 
rubbing  with  a  piece  of  wash  leather,  and  the  wire  may  be 
had  so  fine  that  it  would  be  suitable  for  any  web.  The 
design  in  the  corners  should  be  worked  in  silks.  Another 
idea  would  be  to  work  heart's-ease,  arranged  as  a  flat 
pattern  all  over  the  centre  of  a  table  cover.  This  might 
be  worked  most  effectively  in  simple  outline  of  white  or 
pale  tinted  silk,  edged  with  the  silver  wire,  a  border  to  the 
cloth  of  plush  or  velvet  the  same  color  as  the  centre. 
Some  of  the  fifteenth  century  work  is  admirably  adapted 
for  white  silk  ;  and  many  beautiful  specimens  are  to  be 
seen  worked  entirely  with  white  on  a  silk  ground,  some 
with  gold  on  a  white  ground. 

Exquisite  work  is  done  by  embroidering  tiny  rose-buds 
or  small  leaves  on  white  satin,  and  edging  the  work  with 


1 86  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

gold  thread,  or  with  silver  thread  if  done  on  gray  satin. 
This  work  can  be  used  for  sachets,  tied  up  with  white  satin 
ribbon,  or  for  dainty  pincushions,  edged  with  lace  put  on 
with  white  shining  beads  scattered  along  the  edge.  A 
satin  work-bag,  tied  with  silver  cord  and  tassel,  would  be  a 
pretty  present ;  or  a  silvered  basket,  prettily  lined  and 
trimmed. 

THE  GOLDEN  WEDDING  need  not  be  described.  Its  very 
rarity  makes  it  well  known.  The  novel  of  the  Swedish 
author,  Miss  Bremer,  —  which  is  in  danger  of  being  for- 
gotten in  the  pressure  of  the  numerous  modern  novels, — 
this  novel,  "The  Neighbors,"  gives  a  charming  description 
of  the  Swedish  celebration  of  the  golden  wedding,  which 
can  well  be  followed.  On  this  fiftieth  anniversary  of  the 
wedding  day,  gold  should  come  into  the  ornament  of  every 
present,  which  should  be  rare  in  taste,  even  if  it  is  costly. 
A  wedding  cake,  trimmed  with  a  circle  of  fifty  gold  dol- 
lars laid  around  the  frosting,  is  an  appropriate  ornament 
for  the  supper-table,  or  such  an  offering  can  be  made  more 
entertaining  by  putting  the  gold  pieces  into  the  cake  and 
allowing  the  happy  pair  to  find  them  as  they  eat  it. 

THE  DIAMOND  WEDDING  is  seldom  reached.  It  receives 
this  name  under  the  idea  that  only  diamonds  are  precious 
enough  to  be  offered  on  an  occasion  so  rare.  But  we  may 
well  believe  that  the  two  who  have  had  the  happiness  to 
live  together  through  so  long  a  period,  will  have  outlived 
all  desire  for  worldly  jewels.  Nothing  can  so  well  express 
the  sympathy  and  taste  of  friends  at  such  a  time,  as  their 
cordial  good  wishes  and  heart-felt  respect,  tendered  in  per- 
son, or  in  written  words  in  prose  or  verse. 


CHAPTER    XV. 

CHRISTMAS. 

CHRISTMAS  EVE.  —  In  many  families  the  celebration 
begins  the  night  before  Christmas  Day,  and  the  Christmas- 
tree  is  put  up,  and  the  festivities  begin,  which  are  quite  as 
appropriate  the  night  before  as  on  the  day  itself. 

CHRISTMAS  WISHES  must  be  prepared  the  evening  before 
Christmas.  These  are  wishes  written  in  verse  for  each 
member  of  the  family.  These  wishes  are  to  be  written 
for  each  person,  and  folded  so  that  they  all  look  alike  on 
the  outside,  to  be  placed  under  the  pillow  and  slept  upon. 
Christmas  morning,  one  of  the  slips  is  to  be  drawn  out, 
which  will  contain  the  Christmas  wish  that  will  surely 
come  true.  This  gives  a  chance  to  express  any  Christmas 
wish  for  a  friend.  For  the  younger  members,  it  is  possible 
to  anticipate  their  Christmas  presents  by  bringing  in  some 
allusion  to  the  present  they  will  find  in  their  stocking,  or 
187 


!  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

on  the  Christmas  tree.     We  will  suggest  a  few  of  these 
which  can  be  imitated  or  varied :  — 

CHRISTMAS   WISHES. 

FOR   PAPA. 

May  fickle  fortune's  smiles  the  new  year  bless, 
May  stocks  grow  large  and  household  bills  grow  less; 
For  dinner  may  you  never  have  to  wait, 
Nor  lack  of  buttons  make  my  sire  irate. 

FOR   MAMMA. 

May  head  never  ache, 

May  china  ne'er  break, 
Nor  your  daughters  outgrow  their  new  gowns; 

Nor  servants  displease, 

Nor  water-pipes  freeze, 
Nor  your  sons  turn  your  smiles  into  frowns. 

FOR   SISTER. 

May  Santa  Claus  a  gold  watch  bring, 

And  in  your  stocking  hide  it; 
How  nice  'twill  be,  you'll  never  know 

Until,  my  dear,  you've  tried  it. 

FOR   SMALL   SISTER. 

A  dolly  of  wax, 

With  tresses  of  flax, 
And  eyes  that  shut  close,  when  laid  on  her  back, 

Who  stands  all  alone, 

Can  sing,  laugh,  or  moan, 
May  Santa  Claus  bring  you,  my  pet,  in  his  pack. 

FOR   BROTHER. 

May  Greek  be  naught  but  pleasure,  and  Latin  only  play, 
May  Algebra  and  Calculus  grow  easier  every  day  ; 
May  studious,  sober  sprites  and  persevering  fairies 
Carry  you,  my  student  dear,  through  your  preliminaries. 


CHRISTMAS.  189 


FOR    SMALL   BROTHER. 

A  pair  of  skates, 

A  handsome  sled, 
A  bunch  of  dates, 

An  apple  red  ; 

May  these  and  more,  upon  the  tree, 
Be  found  as  Christmas  gifts  for  thee. 


HANGING  UP  STOCKINGS  for  Christmas  is  not  so  much 
practised  as  formerly,  but  some  families  still  cling  to  the 
custom,  and  liberal  mothers  of  the  family  provide  large, 
roomy  stockings  to  be  hung  up  at  the  foot  of  the  bed,  or 
near  the  chimney,  and  Santa  Claus  is  ever  ready  to  fill 
them.  With  the  return  to  open  fireplaces,  which  are  now 
allowed  in  most  houses,  Santa  Claus  has  a  better  chance, 
and  can  even  get  a  rocking-horse  down  the  chimney,  even 
though  he  cannot  get  more  than  the  horse's  nose  into  the 
stocking. 

When  the  stockings  are  hung  up  the  night  before,  if 
there  is  a  family  of  children,  the  Christmas  morning  is  apt 
to  begin  at  an  early  hour.  A  patter  of  feet  is  heard  in  the 
upper  chambers,  hushed  by  the  warning  voice  of  the 
parents  below,  and  the  singular  shape  of  the  stockings  can 
only  be  felt  in  silence  and  darkness  till  the  morning  light 
comes  in. 

CHRISTMAS  MORNING  by  an  old  custom  is  sometimes 
welcomed  in  by  the  children  running  to  open  the  front 
door,  to  "let  the  Christmas  morning  in  !"  At  breakfast 
time  the  presents  are  sometimes  given,  and  the  Christmas 
wishes  are  read,  and  in  well-regulated  families  the  stock- 
ings are  now  for  the  first  time  examined. 


190 


THREE  HUNDRED   PRESEATTS. 


HIDING  THE  PRESENTS. — Among  the  many  ways  re- 
sorted to  for  giving  the  Christmas  presents,  when  the 
family  is  not  too  large,  it  is  entertaining  to  hide  the 
presents.  Perhaps  the  mother  of  the  family  undertakes 


FIG.  73- 

to  do  this,  or  else  each  member  finds  some  chance  early 
in  the  morning,  or  the  night  before,  to  hide  the  presents 
in  different  places,  and  perhaps  the  whole  day  may  pass 
before  all  the  presents  are  discovered.  One  finds  a  piece 
of  music  she  has  longed  for  shut  in  the  piano  when  she 
goes  to  open  it,  or  another  finds  a  valuable  pocketbook 


CHRISTMAS.  IQI 

hung  to  the  poker  when  he  goes  to  stir  up  the  fire,  or  the 
mother  of  the  family  finds  her  seat  unusually  hard  in  her 
favorite  easy-chair,  and  discovers  she  is  sitting  on  a 
brush  and  comb  basket.  But  usually  the  presents  are 
quickly  found.  The  seekers  know  well  how  to  look  in  the 
folds  of  .the  curtain,  or  penetrate  the  back  of  table-drawers, 
or  even  look  under  the  mats  and  behind  the  furniture,  and 
end  in  finding  something  for  everybody. 

THANKSGIVING  AD  CHRISTMAS  DINNERS. —  The  well 
established  dinner  of  roast  goose  for  Christmas,  and  roast 
turkey  for  Thanksgiving,  or  both  for  both,  is  too  well  un- 
derstood to  need  much  explanation.  But  families  who 
meet  regularly  for  a  Thanksgiving  dinner  with  one  mem- 
ber of  the  family,  and  for  Christmas  with  another,  like  to 
vary  the  customary  ceremonies,  otherwise  the  entertain- 
ment becomes  a  tiresome  affair.  The  children  begin  to  com- 
plain that  it  is  all  very  monotonous  to  go  over  the  same 
thing  so  often,  and  even  the  elders  nod  a  little  and  grow 
sleepy  in  the  evenings.  Of  course  it  is  necessary  to  have 
all  the  kinds  of  pies  for  Thanksgiving,  and  to  eat  of  each 
of  the  different  kinds  in  the  course  of  the  day,  making  up 
at  supper  what  has  not  been  accomplished  at  dinner.  And 
for  Christmas  there  must  be  a  smoking  plum-pudding,  as 
well  as  plenty  of  mince  pie. 

COSTUMES.  —  But  nothing  varies  the  occasion  more  than 
to  insist  that  every  guest  shall  come  in  some  sort  of 
costume.  It  is  a  good  opportunity  for  the  mother  of  the 
family  to  get  out  her  wedding-dress  once  more,  though  if 
she  had  it  on  for  last  Thanksgiving  she  must  think  of 
something  new  this  year  ;  for  the  object  is  to  present 


I92  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

something  unexpected,  and  nothing  adds  more  to  the 
liveliness  of  the  occasion  than  to  look  round  a  sober  family 
table,  and  see  each  guest  arrayed  in  an  unusual  costume, 
the  maiden  aunt  with  a  Spanish  mantilla  on  her  head,  the 
collegian  in  a  deep  red  domino,  the  belle  of  the  family  in 
her  great  grandmother's  cap  and  brocade,  and  the  father 
of  the  family  in  tight  breeches,  and  hair  done  in  queue. 
Conversation  becomes  more  lively  and  leaves  the  common 
ruts  and  keeps  on  in  an  entertaining  flow  through  the  nuts 
and  raisins,  till  it  is  time  to  adjourn  for  the  Christmas  tree 
or  the  evening's  entertainments. 

But  it  is  often  desirable  to  make  a  state  occasion  of  the 
Christmas  dinner,  when  it  is  an  advantage  to  know  some 
of  the  new  suggestions  for  laying  the  table  and  giving  it  a 
startling  effect. 

HARMONY  IN  YELLOW  AND  WHITE.  —  Under  this  title 
the  London  Queen  gives  a  description  of  an  effective 
dinner  table  decoration,  useful  to  those  who  desire  some- 
thing novel.  Down  the  centre  of  the  table  was  placed  a 
piece  of  cream-colored  satin  sheeting,  with  the  family  coat- 
of-arms  embroidered  in  yellow  silk  in  each  corner.  In  the 
middle  of  each  side  was  worked  the  crest  and  shield.  A 
conventional  border  worked  in  raw  silk  connected  the 
armorial  bearings.  The  whole  of  the  centre  of  the  satin 
was  finely  darned  with  the  same  silk  in  a  diamond  pattern, 
having  in  the  middle  of  each  diamond  a  small  flower ;  all 
round  the  edge  a  fringe  of  small  tassels  of  yellow  silk  was 
worked  in.  The  effect  of  such  a  centre  is  extremely 
handsome,  as  it  looks  like  a  mass  of  embroidery  where  the 
details  are  carried  out,  so  much  as  almost  to  hide  the  satin 


CHRISTMAS.  193 

sheeting.  The  D'Oyleys  for  the  dessert  plates  were  worked 
on  cream  satin,  with  the  coat-of-arms  in  the  centre,  hav- 
ing the  edge  scalloped  round,  with  a  tiny  tassel  fringe 
all  in  yellow ;  the  menus  were  plain,  cream-tinted,  with  a 
gold  line  round  the  edge.  The  names  of  the  guests  were 
tied  to  the  top  of  the  menus  with  yellow  ribbon. 

ANOTHER  TABLE  DECORATION  is  made  of  a  broad  stripe 
of  fancy  colored  Madras  muslin,  with  colored  flowers  har- 
monizing with  the  shade  of  the  glass  vases.  The  Madras 
muslin  is  fashionable  on  dinner  tables,  and  looks  well  over 
the  white  cloth,  —  the  kind  used  for  curtains  and  toilet 
drapery,  which  has  a  cream  ground,  and  is  almost  covered 
with  faintly  colored  flowers  in  quaint  shades  of  greens, 
blues,  and  pinks.  In  the  hand  the  colors  are  indistinct, 
but  over  the  white  cloth  they  show  up.  The  edges  are 
hemmed,  but  could  be  edged  with  corresponding  tinted 
lace,  and  the  width  of  the  muslin  depends  on  that  of  the 
table,  but  should  just  leave  room  for  the  plates  all  round. 
Sometimes  only  the  centre  of  the  table  is  thus  covered, 
the  length  being,  however,  greater  than  the  width. 

Another  novelty  is  to  lay  coffee-colored  lace  down  the 
centre  of  the  table,  and  the  D'Oyleys  to  match,  or  with  an 
edging  of  the  coffee  lace.  This  looks  pretty.  The  edges 
of  the  centre  piece  are  either  rounded  or  square. 

THE  MENUS  can  be  so  decorated  as  to  form  a  pretty 
Christmas  present.  These  are  sometimes  written  out 
to  convey  some  witticism  in  connection  with  the  dishes 
to  be  served.  Each  dish  can  receive  a  name  in  compli- 
ment to  each  guest.  Or  if  the  brains  are  not  used  in  this 
way,  with  the  fingers  and  taste  they  can  be  employed  in 


194  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

decorating  the  dinner-cards,  which  will  serve  as  a  pleasing 
memento  of  a  happy  occasion  to  carry  away. 

GUEST  CARDS,  cut  out  in  black  or  white  cardboard  in 
the  shape  of  Japanese  fans,  are  exceedingly  effective. 
The  addition  of  a  "  stamped-out "  bee,  butterfly,  ladybird, 
or  insect  to  the  ferns  is  a  great  improvement.  These 
fans  can  be  lined  out  with  gold,  vermilion,  or  blue  ;  the 
usual  size  of  them  is  about  two  and  one  half  inches  in 
diameter.  Two  slits  cut  with  a  penknife  at  one  and  one 
quarter  inches  from  each  other,  for  a  slip  of  paper  in- 
serted for  the  guest's  name,  will  enable  the  cards  to  be 
used  several  times. 

SHELL  GUEST  CARDS.  —  Small,  fluted  scalloped  shells, 
covered  on  the  inside  with  gilt  and  silver  put  on  diagonally 
with  the  name  of  the  guest  painted  over  the  groundwork, 
are  a  new  and  pretty  variety. 

MOTTO  GUEST  CARDS.  —  Fancy  cards,  upon  which  are 
written  poetical  quotations,  appropriate  to  each  guest,  are 
pleasing  from  their  originality.  Rather  a  novel  way  of 
arranging  one's  guests  at  a  dinner  or  tea  party  is  this.  If 
the  company  numbers  twelve,  six  of  whom  are  ladies  and 
six  gentlemen,  prepare  beforehand  twelve  bouquets,  of 
which  six  shall  each  be  wholly  made  of  different  flowers. 
One,  perhaps,  being  made  of  roses,  another  of  carnations, 
another  of  heliotrope,  etc.  Let  the  other  six  be  made  to 
correspond  with  these,  tying  the  first  six  with  blue,  and 
the  last  six  with  pink  ribbons.  Pass  them  on  a  tray  to 
the  company,  requesting  each  lady  to  select  a  bouquet  tied 
with  pink  ribbon,  and  each  gentleman  one  tied  with  blue 
ribbon.  When  all  have  been  taken,  the  lady  of  the  house 


CHRISTMAS. 


195 


then  announces  that  each  gentleman  is  to  take  to  the  table 
and  sit  by  the  lady  who  has  chosen  the  bouquet  corre- 
sponding to  his  own. 


THE  CHRISTMAS  TREE  and  its  arrangements  are  now 
so  well  understood  that  they  scarcely  need  a  description. 
The  shops  provide  all  the  necessaries,  candles  to  hang  upon 
the  tree,  gay  dolls,  and  gilt  shining  ornaments  for  decora- 


IQ  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

tion,  even  extinguishers  to  put  out  the  fire  which  is  sure 
to  break  out  in  some  part  of  the  tree,  and  which  easily 
spreads  among  the  dry  leaves  and  branches.  The  trees 
can  be  of  any  desired  size,  from  the  smaller  domestic  one, 
such  as  appears  in  every  German  family  on  Christmas 
Eve,  Fig.  74,  to  the  huge  pine-tree  which  can  supply  a 
whole  Sunday-school  with  games.  It  is  always  a  pretty 
object,  whether  seen  year  after  year,  or  whether  it  gleams 
for  the  first  time  for  the  youngest  child  of  the  family,  who 
looks  up  with  admiration  at  the  shiny  fruit.  It  furnishes 
entertainment  for  the  evening,  and  usually  retains  fruit 
enough  to  stand  for  a  week  or  more,  to  be  admired  by 
fresh  visitors. 

CHRISTMAS  PARTIES.  —  There  are  many  ways  of  enter- 
taining children  at  Christmas  parties,  if  the  Christmas 
tree  is  not  desired.  Hang  a  string  across  a  room,  and  on 
it  suspend  small  parcels  of  sweets,  toys,  etc.,  for  prizes, 
some  containing  nothing.  Blindfold  the  children  in  turns, 
and  let  them  strike  at  the  parcels  with  a  stick.  They 
obtain  what  they  knock  down. 

CHRISTMAS  POST-OFFICE.  —  This  can  be  arranged  in  a 
separate  room,  and  should  be  done  by  means  of  shelves, 
with  a  table  in  front,  on  which  should  be  laid  a  lot  of  the 
usual  bills  and  forms  found  in  post-offices.  A  big  boy 
should  be  dressed  as  a  postman,  and  should  come  in 
where  the  children  are,  and  distribute  envelopes  addressed 
to  each  child.  On  presenting  these  at  the  office  each 
child  receives  a  parcel  addressed  to  it  containing  some 
small  present.  This  is  a  good  wind-up  to  a  party. 

MAGIC  Music  for  the  discovery  of  little  toys  is  popular 


CHRISTMAS. 


197 


for  young  children,  and  each  finder  should  be  the  next 
hider,  so  that  the  gifts  are  not  unequally  distributed  ;  or 
the  presents  can  previously  have  been  hidden  in  different 
parts  of  the  room.  Their  places  should  be  known  by  the 
performer  on  the  piano,  who  should  indicate  by  playing 
loud  or  soft  whether  each  child  is  finding  its  present,  or 
whether  it  must  look  elsewhere. 


SANTA  CLAUS  is  perhaps  as  much  of  a  favorite  whether 
he  hides  himself  behind  a  chimney,  or  is  never  seen,  as 
when  he  appears  in  person.  But  for  a  large  party  of  little 
children  it  is  very  amusing  to  see  him  appear  all  covered 
\jith  snow,  with  white  beard,  and  presents  sticking  out  of 
all  his  pockets.  If  he  is  personated  by  somebody  who 
understands  how,  he  can  frighten  or  delight  the  children 
as  he  pleases,  and  must  be  quite  sure  to  reward  them  all. 


19°  THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 

CHRISTMAS  ENTERTAINMENTS.  —  When  the  Christmas 
presents  have  been  disposed  of  early  in  the  day,  some 
other  entertainment  is  desired  for  the  evening.  On 
Thanksgiving  evenings,  as  well  as  on  Christmas,  large 
numbers  of  children  and  young  folks  assemble  and  look  at 


each  other  eagerly,  wondering  what  they  had  better  do 
next  ?  Perhaps  they  have  not  met  since  last  year,  and 
have  talked  out  at  the  dinner  table,  at  the  side-table  per- 
haps, where  the  children  could  talk  freely,  all  the  little 
subjects  they  can  have  in  common.  The  elders  have  to 
come  in  and  help.  It  is  very  easy  if  the  rooms  are  large, 
and  a  patient  elder  sister  or  a  kind  cousin  will  sit  down  to 
the  piano  and  play  all  the  evening  for 


CHRISTMAS.  199 

A  DANCE.  —  Everybody  can  join  in,  but  the  young  folks 
have  it  their  own  way  at  first,  and  the  mothers  and  fathers 
look  on  admiring. 

ROUND  DANCES  and  square  dances  fill  up  the  joy  of  the 
evening.  Even  to  look  on  is  bliss.  And  the  entertain- 
ment ends  off  with 

AN  OBLONG  DANCE  or  Virginia  reel,  in  which  everybody 
must  join  —  grandmamma  and  bachelor  uncle,  and  all  the 
guests  —  till  they  are  ready  to  drop  with  fatigue  and  to 
rest  till  next  Christmas. 


INDEX. 


The  details  of  working  the  several  stitches  mentioned  in  these  pages  can  be  found 
in  Tilton's  Art-Needlework  Books.  These  are  to  be  published  in  one  volume,  with 
additions  containing  instructions  for  Crochet,  Worsted  Work,  and  other  stitches,  be- 
sides those  in  Embroidery,  Holbein,  Punto  Tirato,  Lace  Work,  and  Knitting  already 
published.  "  Self-Instructive  Lessons  in  Oil  and  Water  Color  Painting,"  published 
by  S.  W.  Tilton  &  Co.,  will  give  the  details  for  the  painting  needed  in  these  articles. 


Acknowledgment   and  Reception  of 

Presents,  181. 
Afternoon  Aprons,  7. 
Albums,  181. 
Alsatian  Nurse  Doll,  89. 
Alum  Basket,  100. 
American  Pompadour,  17. 
Amber  Satin  Apron,  6. 
Aprons  (Chap.  II.),  4-11. 
Arab  Shops,  169. 
Articles  to  be  sold  at  Fairs,  175. 

Baby-Carriage  Blankets,  82. 

Baby  Dolls,  89. 

Baby-House,  90. 

Bags  (Chap.  III.),  11-29. 

Balls,  85. 

Ball-Pattern  Rug,  47. 

Bashlik  (for  the  head),  130. 

Basket  Pails,  161. 

Basket-Chairs,  60. 

Baskets  for  Pet  Cats  or  Dogs,  49. 

Baskets  Made  of  Hats,  146. 

Baskets  for  Flowers,  147. 

Bath  Blankets,  Si. 

Battledores,  69. 


Bell-Pulls,  38. 

Bellows  Needle-Book,  150. 

Birthday  Lists,  2. 

Black  Velvet  Bag,  14. 

Blotting-Book,  66. 

Blotting-Book,  another,  66. 

Bolster  Pillow,  34. 

Bolster  Pillow,  smaller,  35. 

Bolster  Pincushion,  156. 

Book  Covers,  67. 

Book  Wagon,  64. 

Boot  Case,  145. 

Braids  of  Sewing-Silk,  158. 

Brass  Wedding,  184. 

Broom  Brigade,  166. 

Brush    and    Comb    Basket,   No.   i, 

79- 
Brush    and    Comb    Basket,   No.   2, 

79- 

Brush  and  Comb  Case,  125. 
Bulbs  in  Glasses  or  Pots,  99. 
Burlap  Rug,  46. 
Burnt  Match  Receiver,  143. 
Butterfly  Pincushion,  157. 
Button  Bag,  Triple,  25. 
Button  Bag,  another,  25. 


202 


THREE  HUNDRED   PRESENTS. 


Camphor  Bags,  117. 

Cap  Bag,  1 8. 

Card-Cases,  108,  in,  157. 

Cardinal  Satin  Aprons,  6. 

Carriage  Blankets,  82. 

Case  for  Travelling  Wraps,  132. 

Catch-Alls  and  Ornaments,  67. 

Chair  Bags,  16. 

Chair- Back  Cover  Scarf,  40. 

Chair-Back  Covers,  40. 

Charity  Girl  Doll,  89. 

Chatelaine  Bag,  20. 

Check,  180. 

Child's  Crochet  Ball,  86. 

Children's  Play  Reins,  91. 

Chimney-Pot  Hats,  148. 

China  Closet  Steps,  64. 

China  Closet  Towels,  52. 

Christmas  (Chap.  XV.),  187. 

Christmas  Entertainments,  198. 

Christmas  Eve,  187. 

Christmas  Morning,  189. 

Christmas  Post-Office,  196. 

Christmas  Parties,  196. 

Christmas  Tree,  195. 

Christmas  Wishes,  187,  188. 

Cigar-Case,  no. 

Closing  Song  for  Market-Place,  174. 

Clothes-Brush  Case,  80. 

Clothes-Pin  Bag,  27. 

Comforters  for  Gentlemen,  113. 

Conundrum  Cards,  137 

Cosey,  another  way,  55. 

Cosies,  54. 

Costumes,  191. 

Cracker  Sachets,  121. 

Crash  Apron,  9. 

Cretonne  Table-Cover,  36. 

Crewel-Case,  154. 

Crocheted  Purse,  83. 

Crush  Bag,  19. 

Crystal  Wedding,  184. 


Decorated  Chess-Board,  95. 

Diamond  Wedding,  186. 

Dinner  Menus,  193. 

Dish  Drainer  for  Book-Rack,  68. 

Dog's  Coat,  114. 

Dolls,  88. 

D'Oyleys,  51. 

D'Oyleys,  designs  for,  52. 

Dressing  Towel,  106. 

Drums,  69. 

Dusters,  50. 

Duster  Bags,  27,  50. 

Easter  Eggs,  94. 
Easter  Eggs,  a  second  way,  94. 
Easter  Eggs,  a  third  way,  94. 
Easter  Eggs,  a  fourth  way,  94. 
Embroidery  on  Screens,  33. 
Embroidered  Table-Covers,  37. 
Etching  Stitch,  52. 

Fair  Entertainments,  162. 

Fair  Newspaper,  170. 

Fair  Suggestions  (Chap.  XIII.),  162- 

175- 

Fancy  Aprons,  6. 
Fancy  Work  Sachet,  119. 
Fans,  180. 
Fan  Brigade,  162. 
Fan  Wall-Pocket,  140. 
Feeding  Bib,  10. 
Felt  Hat  Baskets,  148. 
Felt  Table-Mats,  87. 
Fender  Stools,  39. 
Ferns  for  Ornament,  99. 
Finger-Plates  for  Doors,  49. 
Fish  Pond,  170. 
Five  O'Clock  Tea-Cloths,  37. 
Flat-iron  Wipers,  56. 
Flat-iron  Pads,  56. 
Flat  Pen-Wiper,  73. 
Flower  Stall,  173. 


INDEX. 


203 


Foot-Muff,  102.  • 

Foot-Muff,  another,  103. 

Foot-Stool,  40. 

Foot-Stool,  another,  41. 

Foreign  Market-Placc,  169. 

French  Purse,  83. 

"Friend  in  Need"  Work-Case,  153. 

Fruit  Tent,  173. 

Game-Bag,  23. 
Game-Bag,  another,  24. 
Garden  Cushions,  60. 
Gentlemen's  Braces,  112. 
Gipsy  Tent,  172. 
Glove  Sachets,  116. 
Golden  Wedding,  186. 
Grab-Bag,  171. 
Guest-Cards,  194. 

Handkerchief  Apron,  5. 

Handkerchief  Sachet,  Checker- 
Board,  115. 

Handkerchief  Work-Bag,  14 . 

Handkerchief  Bow,  107. 

Hair-Pin  Cushion,  80. 

Hanging   up    Stockings   for   Christ- 
mas, 189. 

Harlequin  Bag,  1 5. 

Harmony  in  Yellow  and  White,  192. 

Hat-Markers,  113. 

Hanging  Shelves,  143. 

Head  Wrap,  in  Crochet,  131. 

Hiding  the  Presents,  190. 

Hop  Pillows,  36. 

Household  (Chap.  IV.),  29-57. 

House  Linen,  181. 

House  Ornaments,  178. 

Housewife,  148. 

Infant's  Shoes,  107. 
Inkstand  Splasher,  65. 
Iron  Skillets,  68. 


Jabot  Apron,  5. 

Jewelry  for  Wedding  Present,  179. 

•Key  Rack,  56. 
Key  Rack,  another,  56. 
Knife  Cases,  54. 
Knit  Head  Wrap,  132. 
Knit  Smyrna  Rug,  47. 

Long  Black  Lace  Aprons,  6. 

Lady's  Necessaire,  20. 

Lace,  1  80. 

Lady  Doll,  88. 

Lamp  Shades,  75. 

Lamp    Shades   of    Silk   and    Lace, 

77- 

Larun  for  a  Hood,  130. 
Lawn  Tennis  Accessories  (Chap.  V.), 


Lawn  Tennis  Bag,  63. 
Lawn  Tennis  Belts,  59. 
Lawn  Tennis  Nets,  63. 
Lawn  Tennis  Receptacle,  57. 
Lawn  Tennis  Tournament,  173. 
Leaf  Pen-Wiper,  73. 
Leather  Purse,  84. 
Letter  Box,  142. 
Letter  Pocket,  140. 
Library  (Chap.  VI.),  64-75. 
Library  Steps,  64. 

Macrame  Bag,  14. 
Madras  Table-Cover,  38. 
Madras  Aprons,  7. 
Mantel-Board,  29. 
Mantel-Curtains,  30. 
Match-Scratchers,  144. 
Magic  Music,  196. 
Mediaeval  Aprons,  4, 
Melon-Seed  Necklace,  88. 
Memorandum-Book  for  Whist  Play- 
ers, 96. 


2O4 


THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 


Memorandum-Case,  143. 
Milk  Pails,  159. 
Milking  Stools,  160. 
Mirror  Drapery,  31. 
Miscellaneous  (Chap.  VII.),  75-102. 
Moth  Sachet,  117. 
Motto  Guest-Cards,  194. 
Music  Portfolio,  92. 
Music-Stool,  42. 

Napkin  for  Corn,  54. 

Needle- Book,  151. 

Needle-Case,  151. 

Nest  for  Easter  Eggs,  94. 

Night-Dress  Sachets,  120. 

Nightingale,  106. 

Note  Paper  Sachets,  117. 

Odds   and    Ends  for  Curtains,  etc. 

158. 

Old  Woman  Doll,  89. 
Old  Woman  in  Her  Shoe,  171. 
Opera-Glass  Bag,  21. 
Ornamental  Bellows,  140. 
Ornament  for  Sachets,  118. 
Other  Handkerchief  Sachets,  116. 
Outlining  Flowers  and  Leaves,  97. 

Pails  for  Work-Baskets,  160. 
Painted  Bassinette  Covers,  82. 
Palm  Leaf  Fan,  78. 
Paper-Knives,  180. 
Paper  Weight,  74. 
Paper- Weight,  another,  74. 
Parasols  Decorated,  107. 
Pattern  for  Foot-Muff,  104. 
Peach- Basket  Work  Stand,  146. 
Pen-Wipers,  70. 
Pen-Wipers,  I ;  round,  70. 
Pen  Wiper,  2;  folded,  71. 
Pen- Wiper.  3;  circular,  71. 
Pen  Wiper,  4;  doll,  71. 


Pen-Wiper,  5;  flower,  72. 
Pen-Wiper,  6;  fez,  72. 
Pen-Wiper,  7 ;  shell,  73. 
Pen-Wiper,  8;  roll,  73. 
Perforated  Paper  Mats,  87. 
Perfume  Sachet,  119. 
Personal  (Chap.  VIII.),  102-123. 
Pewter  Wedding,  183. 
Philopaena  Presents,  3. 
Photograph  Fan,  78. 
Photograph  (Cabinet)  Case,  95. 
Piece  Bag,  24. 
Pillow-Shams,  38. 
Pillow-Sham  Scarf,  39. 
Pique  Sachet,  122. 
Pine-Needle  Pillows,  36. 
Plush  Pillow,  35. 
Plush  Wall-Pocket,  138. 
Pocket  Pencil  and  Pen  Case,  66. 
Pocket  Pincushions,  157. 
Pocket  Writing-Case,  133. 
Pompadour;  bag,  13. 
Pompadour ;  doll,  89. 
Portieres,  32. 
Post-Office,  171. 
Post-Office  Savings  Bank,  172. 
Pot-Pourri,  92. 
Pot-Pourri,  another,  92. 
Punch  and  Judy,  173. 
Purses,  83,  84. 

Ribbon  Bag,  18. 

Riddle  Fan,  136. 

Red  Cross  Nurse  Doll,  89. 

Red  Riding  Hood  Doll,  89. 

Roman  Apron,  10. 

Rugs ;  home-made,  43. 

Rugs ;  knotted,  45. 

Rugs  of  rags,  44. 

Rug-Making  Machine,  45. 

Rustic  Stand,  43. 

Rustic  Wheelbarrows,  43. 


INDEX. 


205 


Sachets  (Chap.  IX.),  115-123. 
Sachet  for  Gentlemen's  Ties,   No.  i, 

122. 
Sachet  for  Gentlemen's  Ties,  No.  2, 

122. 

Sachet  of  Japanese  Square,  1 19. 
Sachet  for  Lace,  119. 
Sailor  Doll,  89. 
Santa  Claus,  197. 
Sateen  Work  Aprons,  7. 
School  Bags,  18. 
Scissors  Case,  154. 
Scrap-Books,  86. 
Screens,  32,  33. 
Sermon  Case,  113. 
Shawl-Case,  123. 
Shawl  Strap  Pen-Wiper  73. 
Shaving  Cloths,  114. 
Shell  Guest-Cards,  194. 
Shell  Pen-Wiper  73. 
Shell  Pincushions,  156. 
Shopping  Bag,  11. 
Shopping  Bag,  another,  12. 
Skate  Bag,  22. 
Silver  Tripods,  42. 
Silver  Wedding,  184,  185. 
Silver  for  Weddings,  177. 
Slipper  Work-Case,  155. 
Smoking  Cap,  112. 
Smoking  Coat,  112. 
Soap  Bag,  26. 

Song  of  the  Broom  Brigade,  167. 
Spanish  Alforca,  128. 
Spectacle  Cleaners,  107. 
Splasher,  140. 
Sponge  Bag,  27. 
Sponge  Box,  27. 
Sponge  Holder,  26. 
Suggestions  for  Pen-Wipers,  73. 
Sun-Flower  Lamp  Shade,  76. 
Sun- Flower  Pincushion,  155. 
Sweeping-Cap,  50. 


Sweeping-Cap,  another,  51. 
Sweet  Fern  Pillow,  36. 
Swing,  173. 
Syrian  Muslin  Aprons,  7. 

Table-Cloths  with  Pockets,  70. 

Table  Decoration,  193. 

Tambourines,  69. 

Tea-Cosies,  54. 

Tea-Pot  Holder,  53. 

Tennis  Apron,  59. 

Tennis  Apron,  another,  59. 

Tennis  Ball  Boxes,  62. 

Tennis  Mats,  60. 

Tent  for  Dwarf,  172. 

Thanksgiving  and  Christinas  Din- 
ners, 191. 

Tin  Wedding,  183. 

Tobacco  Pouch,  108. 

Tobacco  Pouch,  another,  no. 

Tobacco  Pouch  in  Crochet,  no. 

Toilet  Bag,  21. 

Toilet  Box,  78. 

Toilet  Pincushion,  147. 

Toilet  Wall-Pocket,  139. 

Towel  Apron,  9. 

Travelling  Conveniences  (Chap.X.), 
123-138. 

Travelling  Minstrels,  172. 

Travelling  Pillow,  128. 

Travelling  Toilet  Case,  123. 

Travelling  Work-Box,  126. 

Triple  Button  Bag,  25. 

Umbrella  Case,  134. 
Umbrella  Stand,  49. 
Umbrella  Tents,  58. 

Vases  made  of  Bottles,  101. 
Violin  Bag,  23. 
Violin  Blanket,  23. 
Velvet  Muff,  105. 


206 


THREE  HUNDRED  PRESENTS. 


Walnut-Shell  Pincushion,  157. 
Wall-Pockets,  etc.  (Chap.  XL),  i; 

-146. 

Waste-Paper  Baskets,  69. 
Watch  and  Ring  Case,  144. 
Watch  Cases,  other,  145. 
Weddings  (Chap.  XIV.),  176-187. 
Wedding  Presents,  2,  29,  176-181. 
Window  Curtains,  175. 
Window  Ornament,  97. 


Wooden  Bowls,  68. 

Wooden  Pails,  70. 

Wooden  Wedding,  183. 

Woollen  Ends  Rug,  46. 

Work  Apron,  8. 

Work  Bag,  n. 

Work  Table  (Chap  XII.),  146-162. 

Writing  Pad,  67. 

Yellow  Satin  and  Lace  Aprons,  6. 


OIL  AND  WATER-COLORS, 

On  Silk,  Satin,  Plush,  Linen,  Wood,  <£c.,  <feo. ; 
Landscape  Painting  with  Oil  and  Water  Colors. 
Hammered  Brass,  China  and  Pottery  Painting, 
Tapestry  Painting,  Etching,  Illumination,  Ori- 
ental and  (Irecian  Painting,  Amateur  Photography,  How  to  make  Christmas  and  Birth- 
day  Cards  <Vayor,  ;i"d  Charcoal  Drawing,  Bron/ing  and  Gilding,  Stencilling,  ''donah 
I'aiminir,  Moulding  Frr.it  iu  Wax  and  Plaster,  Fresco  Painting,  Cliromo  Photography, 
Leather  Work,  Photograph  Painting  with  Oil  and  Water  Colors  bes-Mes  many  other 
kinds  of  Decorative  Art  Work  w'lich  we  have  not  space  to  mention  here. 
It  also  contains  designs  for  various  kinds  of  Ornamental  Work. 

Sent  by  llfaU,  posfpttii,'.  <>»  n^-hit  <>f  pries,  SL>.H<I.  /•// 

S.  W.  TILTON   &  CO., 
333  Washington  St.  (up  one  flight) BOSTON,   MASS. 


BULFINCH'S   MYTHOLOGY. 


AGE   OF  FABLE, 

CONTAINING  THE  STOKIES  OF  THE 

GODS   AND    HEROES, 

Which  form  the  subjects  of  by  far  the  greater  portion  of  the 
ANCIENT    PAlNTINGrS    AND    STATUARY 

to  be  found  in  the  ART   MUSEUMS  of  the   Old    and    New    Worlds. 

By  THOMAS  BULFINCH.     An  Enlarged  Edition,  printed  from 

entirely  new  type,  with  over  One  Hundred   New 

Illustrations  from  Ancient  Paintings 

and  Statuary. 

EDITED  BY   REV.    E.    E.    HALE, 

Without  a  knowlege  of  Mythology  much  of  the  elegant  literature  of  our  own 
language  cannot  be  understood  and  appreciated.  In  this  volume  the  stories  of 
Mythology  are  told  in  such  a  manner  as  to  make  them  a  source  of  amusement  and 
to  give  our  work  the  charm  of  a  story  book,  yet  by  means  of  it  to  impart  a  knowledge 
of  an  important  branch  of  education. 

In  the  new  edition  the  publishers  have  added  very  largely  to  the  value  of  the  book, 
as  well  as  to  its  beauty,  by  the  numerous  illustrations  from  the  very  best  classical 
source?.  The  reader  will  see  that  these  illustrations,  in  reproducing  the  master- 
pieces of  ancient  art,  give  the  best  idea  whicn  we  can  have  of  the  conceptions  which 
Greek  and  Roman  had  of  the  sacred  beings  in  their  Mythology. 

We  trust  our  young  readers  will  find  it  a  source  of  entertainment;  those  more 
advanced,  a  useful  companion  in  their  reading;  those  who  travel  and  visit  museums 
and  galleries  of  art,  an  interpreter  of  paintings  and  sculptures;  and  those  who  min- 
gle in  cultivated  society,  a  key  to  allusions  which  are  occasionally  made. 

The  book  has  been  so  widely  and  so  successfully  used  in  schools  that  it  seems 
proper  to  add  that  this  new  edition  is  considerably  enlarged. 

S<   W.    T8LTON    &    CO.,   Publishers. 

Sold  at  our  Chambers,  333  WASHINGTON  STREET,  Boston,  or  sent  by  mail 
to  any  address  on  receipt  of  pnce,  $2.50. 


A     000  580  655 


